Embed Size (px)
Citation preview
FM 6-20-40
P R E F A C E
The purpose of this publication is to provide heavy forces fire support officers andenlisted personnel at maneuver company, battalion and brigade with a how-to manual.It focuses on fire support officers (FSOs) in mechanized infantry, armor, and taskforces at brigade (bde) and below.
This publication describes maneuver techniques and fire support considerations atmaneuver (mvr) brigade and below. It establishes responsibilities and duties of keypersonnel by focusing on how the fire support system can support the ground-gainingarms. Maneuver and fire support doctrine should be studied in depth to obtain acomplete understanding of doctrine, tactics, and techniques, That basic understanding isa prerequisite in order to effectively apply the contents of this how-to manual.
This manual is fully compatible with the Army AirLand Battle doctrine and isconsistent with current joint and combined doctrine. It assumes that the user has afundamental understanding of the fire support principles set forth in FM 6-20.
In its development, FM 6-20-40 has undergone several draft revisions. Numerousindividual Redlegs helped make it the authoritative fire support reference it is.Members of every heavy division artillery (div arty) have provided input at some stagein the development cycle. The units listed below provided representatives from thefield to a unique exercise encompassing major input and comprehensive rewrite of thedeveloped draft. The effort of these senior fire support officers resulted in this finalproduct. It reflects the consensus of the field on fire support tactics, techniques, andprocedures for the brigades in heavy divisions. The field representatives were from–
Ž 1st Armored Division Artillery, Zirndorf, Federal Republic of Germany
Ž 1st Cavalry Division Artillery, Fort Hood, Texas
Ž 5th Infantry Division Artillery (Mechanized), Fort Polk, Louisiana
Ž 8th Infantry Division Artillery, Baumholder, Federal Republic of Germany
Ž 24th Infantry Division Artillery (Mechanized), Fort Stewart Georgia
Ž 197th Infantry Brigade, Fort Benning, Georgia
Ž National Training Center, Fort Irwin, California
The US Army Field Artillery School (USAFAS) owes them, and many others,a greatdebt of gratitude for the professionalism they displayed in true Redleg fashion.
ix
FM 6-20-40
The provisions of this publication are the subject of international agreements (NATOStandardization Agreements [STANAGs] and Quadripartite StandardizationAgreements [QSTAGs]):
Ž 2014/506 Operation Orders, Annexes to Operation Orders, and Administrativeand Logistics Orders
Ž 2031/515 Proforma for Atillery Fire Plan
Ž 2082 Relief of Combat Troops
Ž 2099/531 Fire Cooordination is Support of Land Forces
Ž 2147/221 Target Numbering System (Nonnuclear)
Ž 2887/217 Tactical Tasks and Responsibilities for Control of Artillery
The proponent of this publication is HQ TRADOC. Submit changes for improving thispublication on DA Form 2028 (Recommended Changes to Publications and BlankForms), and forward it to:
CommandantUS Army Field Artillery SchoolATTN: ATSF-DDFort Sill, Oklahoma 73503-5600
Unless otherwise stated, whenever the masculine gender is used, both men and womenare included.
x
FM 6-20-40
CHAPTER 1
ORGANIZATION AND DUTIES
Section I. HEAVY FORCES ORGANIZATION
Mission
The overall design of the heavy forcesstructure provides mobile armor-protectedfirepower. Because of their mobility andsurvivability, heavy forces are best employedwhere battles are fought over wide areas. Theydestroy enemy armed forces and control landareas, including populations and resources. Inoffensive operations, heavy forces quicklyconcentrate overwhelming combat power tobreak through or envelop enemy defenses.They then strike deep to destroy fire support,command and control, and service supportelements. Heavy forces can defend widefrontages. Using mobility for rapid concentra-tions to attack, reinforce, or block, they defeatan enemy while economizing forces in otherareas. Heavy forces operate best in basicallyopen terrain where they can use their mobilityand long-range direct fire weapons to the bestadvantage.
Section
Components
Significant Features
Significant capabilities of heavy forces includethe following:
Ž Can conduct nuclear and chemical operationswith organic delivery systems.
Ž Can rapidly shift forces on the battlefield.
Ž Can cover wide frontages.
Ž Can conduct the entire battle – rear, close,and deep.
The more significant limitations are as follows:
Ž Have limited strategic mobility.
Ž Have restricted mobility in rugged terrain(jungle, built-up areas, and forests).
Ž Require significant logistical support.
II. THE FIRE SUPPORT SYSTEM
The fire support system supporting the heavyforces is the collective body of targetacquisition and battlefield surveillance assets;attack systems (both lethal and nonlethal) andmunitions; command and control systems andfacilities; technical support (meteorological andsurvey); and the personnel required to provideand manage fire support.
Target Acquisition
Target acquisition assets are the target-producing eyes and ears of the system. They
gather targeting information and targets byusing all available means. These meansinclude, but are not limited to, observers,radars, intelligence and electronic warfare(IEW) assets, Army aviators, and frontlinetroops.
Attack Systems
The attack could be lethal or nonlethal (forexample, smoke, illumination, and offensiveelectronic warfare). Assets normally availableat brigade level and below are field artillery(FA), mortars, tactical air (TACAIR) support,communications jarnmers, and naval gunfire
1-1
FM 6-20-40
(NGF). Air defense (AD) and engineer assetsmay also become important components of thefire support system. Fire support assets aredescribed in Appendix A.
Command and ControlThese are the elements that make the systemwork. These elements translate thecommander’s concepts and desires into thetechnical and tactical actions needed to attacktargets quickly and effectively.
Technical Support
Meteorological (met) and survey support isthat technical part of the fire support systemthat ensures accurate unobserved surprise fires,transfer of target data, and effective massedfires.
Fire Support Planning andCoordination
Fire support planning is the continuing andconcurrent process of acquiring and analyzingtargets, allocating fire support to targets,scheduling the attack of targets, andsynchronizing all available fire support toachieve the commander’s intent.
Fire support coordination is the continuousprocess of implementing fire support planningand managing fire support assets that are
available to the maneuver force. The greatestfire support plan in the world is worthlessunless it is properly coordinated with theappropriate personnel and/or agencies. Inshort, coordination makes the plan happen.See FM 6-20 for detailed discussion.
PRINCIPLES OF FIRE SUPPORTPLANNING AND COORDINATION
Plan early and continuously.
Follow the commander’s targeting guidance.
Exploit all available targeting assets.
Consider the use of all available fire supportmeans, both lethal and nonlethal.
Use the lowest echelon capable of providingeffective fire support.
Use the most effective means.
Furnish the type of support appropriate.
Avoid unnecessary duplication.
Consider airspace coordination.
Provide adequate fire support.
Provide rapid and effective coordination.
Remain flexible.
Provide for the safeguarding and survivability offriendly forces and/or installations.
Section III. FIRE SUPPORT ORGANIZATIONS, PERSONNEL,AND DUTIES
Role of the Direct Support Field support planning and coordination for theArtillery Battalion Commander maneuver brigade. The DS battalion
commander brings, as his unique contributionThe direct support (DS) FA battalion to battle, his professional assessment of thecommander is the fire support coordinator current and near-term capabilities of his unit(FSCOORD) for the supported brigade. As and of other fire support assets supporting thesuch, he is specifically responsible for all fire force. His duty location at any given time is
1-2
FM 6-20-40
where he can best execute the maneuvercommander’s intent for fire support. Inaddition to being personally in charge of firesupport coordination for the brigade, the directsupport FA battal ion commander isresponsible for–
Ž Training all personnel involved in fire supportto perform successfully all stated and impliedmissions and tasks associated with providingfire support to a maneuver force.
Ž Continuously articulating his assessment ofthe current and future capabilities and statusof all fire support assets supporting themaneuver force. The FSCOORD may basethis assessment on reports or on personalobservation.
Ž Providing a knowledgeable, experiencedofficer as the brigade fire support officer. TheFSCOORD also must establish a specialmentor relationship with this officer, since theFSO, in the absence of the FSCOORD,personally represents him to the brigadecommander. More than any other officer, theFSO must understand the FSCOORD’sintent in supporting the maneuver plan. Inaddition, the FSCOORD must ensure that hisbrigade FSO is equally conversant on theFSCOORD’s assessment of fire supportassets supporting the maneuver force.
Ž Commanding his battalion. As thecommander of the primary unit providing firesupport to the force, the FSCOORD isresponsible for the operational status of hisunit, its morale and response to criticalpersonnel shortages, and its current andfuture logistic capabilities to support themaneuver force.
Ž
Ž
ŽNOTE: See FM 6-20-1 for further discussion onthe responsibilities of the direct support FA bat-talion commander.
Fire Support Team OrganizationThere are two types of fire support team(FIST) organizations for heavy forces. TheFIST for the mechanized (mech) infantry (inf)consists of a FIST headquarters (HQ) andthree forward observer (FO) parties percompany. Each FO party includes one FO(SGT) and one radio operator (PFC). TheFIST for the armor company or armoredcavalry regiment (ACR) consists of a FISTheadquarters only. The FIST headquarters forboth types of FIST organizations are the same.
FIST HEADQUARTERS ORGANIZATION
TITLE RANK NUMBER
Company FSO LT 1
Fire Support Sergeant SSG 1
Fire Support Specialist
Radiotelephone Operator(RATELO) PFC 1
Company Fire Support OfficerDuties
The company FSO is the maneuver companyFSCOORD. As such, he integrates all fires tosupport the commander’s scheme of maneuver.Although he is not the primary shooter for thecompany, the FSO must be an expert atlocating targets and adjusting tires. His dutiesare as follows:
Plan, coordinate, and execute fire support.
Advise the maneuver commander on firesupport matters.
Keep key personnel informed of pertinentinformation (by spot reports and situationreports [SITREPs]).
1-3
FM 6-20-40
Ž Train the FIST and FOs in applicable firesupport matters.
Ž Request, adjust, and direct all types of firesupport.
Ž Ensure that the fire support plan and/or firesupport execution matrix is prepared anddisseminated to key personnel.
Ž Allocate FOs and other observers to maintainsurveillance of targets and named areas ofinterest.
Ž Provide emergency control of close air support(CAS) missions in the absence of qualified AirForce personnel (air liaison officer [ALO],enlisted terminal attack controller [ETAC],and/or airborne forward air controller[AFACJ).
Company Fire SupportSergeant Duties
The company fire support sergeant is thesenior enlisted assistant to the company FSO.The fire support sergeant acts as the companyFSO in his absence. He is responsible forsupervising and training all enlisted sectionmembers on the maintenance and use of theirequipment. The company fire support sergeantmust be able to perform all the duties of hisFSO.
Company Fire Support OfficerWorking Relationships
The company FSO interacts and coordinateswith other personnel as discussed below.
Maneuver Company CommanderThe company FSO works with the companycommander. The maneuver companycommander is ultimately responsible for firesupport. The company FSO givesrecommendations and advice to thecommander on all fire support matters;
therefore, he is the maneuver unit fire supportexpert. Final decisions on company (co) firesupport are made by the company commander.The company FSO must work closely with thecompany commander and goes with him toreceive plans and orders. The FSO mustunderstand the scheme of maneuver as well asthe company commander does. (See AppendixB.) On the basis of the commander’s guidanceand war-gaming, the FSO devises his firesupport plan, which must be presented to thecommander or his approval. (See Appendix C.)
Battalion Fire Support Officer
The battalion FSO is the FSCOORD at themaneuver battalion. The company FSO worksfor the battalion FSO. The battalion FSOprovides guidance, battlefield intelligence,information on fire support assets, fire supportcoordinating measures, and technical advice tothe company FSO. The battalion FSOcoordinates and clears FIST fire missions thatfall outside the company boundaries of therequesting company FIST. The company FSOprovides updated friendly and enemybattlefield information to the battalion FSO.This information includes the forward line ofown troops (FLOT) location, situation reports,spot reports, and other essential elements offriendly information (EEFI) and informationrelating to priority intelligence requirements(PIR). The battalion FSO helps the DSbattalion (bn) commander train the companyFSO.
Fire Support Team Headquarters
The company FSO is responsible forsupervising the training of his team in allaspects of fire support. He also ensures that histeam is fully equipped and that the equipmentis fully operational. In heavy forces, mostoperations are conducted on the move.Therefore, the company FSO should locatehimself where he can best support thecompany; this is not necessarily at the companycommander’s side. Most maneuver company
1-4
FM 6-20-40
headquarters have a standing operatingprocedure (SOP) that specifies where thecompany headquarters will locate, move, andprovide security in tactical operations. It is veryimportant that all members of the FIST knowand comply with the SOP. Also, in mostcompany SOPs, the immediate-action drillsdelineate what each member of the HQelement will do in specific circumstances, Eachmember of the FIST must be thoroughlytrained in these drills.
Forward Observers
The forward observers are the primaryshooters for the mechanized infantry companyand are normally collocated with the maneuverplatoon leaders. The company FSO must givethe FOs enough information to ensure theyunderstand how the fire support plan is to beintegrated into the commander’s scheme ofmaneuver. This information includes –
Ž Target numbers.
Ž Target lists (Appendix D).
Ž Known points.
Ž Priority of fires on targets.
Ž Degree of control.
Ž Commander’s intent.
Ž Fire support coordinating measures(Appendix E).
As the eyes and curs of the mechanized infantrycompany, the FOs must report battlefieldinformation to the company FSO. They reportthis information, to include FLOT location, bymeans of situation reports and spot reports.
Required Fire Support Actions
Ž
Ž
Ž
Ž
Ž
Actions that the companybefore any operation begins
FSO must takedepend primarily
on the current situation and applicable SOP.The FIST deploys with the maneuver companyon all combat operations.
The company FSO and/or fire supportsergeant must –
Train the FOs.
Train the company personnel to call for andadjust fires.
Ensure that all equipment is properlymaintained.
Ensure that FIST personnel know thecompany tactical SOP (TSOP) thoroughly.
As the company FSCOORD, the FSO shouldobtain the following information from thebattalion FSO:
Ž Status and location of fire support deliverysystems that the company can use.
Status of TACAIR missions, tactical aircontrol party (TACP), and CAS controlpersonnel (ALO, ETAC, and AFAC).
Ž Existing targets, scheduled fires, and knownpoints.
Ž
Ž
Ž
Ž
Fire support coordinating measures in effect.
Verified frequencies and call signs.
Status of combat observation/lasing teams(COLTS), if available.
Availability of position location assets,position and azimuth determining system(PADS), or survey to accurately locateminefield or obstacles.
Also as the company FSCOORD, the FSOshould obtain a mission briefing from thecompany commander, to include the following:
Ž Scheme of maneuver and/or commander’sintent.
1-5
FM 6-20-40
Ž
Ž Locations of platoons, crew-sewed weapons,and listening posts (LPs), and/or observationposts (OPs).
Ž Current enemy situation.
Company strength (equipment andpersonnel).
Ž Status and location of obstacles.
Ž Location of final protective fire (FPF).
Ž Mission-oriented protective posture (MOPP)level.
Ž Air defense status.
The FSO should provide the followinginformation, as a minimum, at the companyorders briefing:
Fire support plan for the operation, toinclude responsibilities for its execution.
Ž
Ž
Ž
Ž
Ž Existing targets, scheduled fires, and knownpoints.
Fire support coordinating measures for theoperation.
Status of priority fires.
Fire support assets available to support theoperation, their location, and status.
Verified frequencies and call signs.
Availability of position location assets.
Status of FIST personnel and equipment (to
Ž
Ž
Žinc lude Classes I , I I I , and V) .
The FSO or fire support sergeant shouldestablish communications with the following(Appendix F):
Ž Fire support assets (such as artillery andmortars).
1-6
Ž The FOs, including COLTS, if applicable.
Ž The battalion FSO.
Ž The maneuver commander.
Battalion or Squadron FireSupport Organization.
The battalion FSO is the FSCOORD atmaneuver battalion. He is in charge of the firesupport element (FSE) and is the principal firesupport advisor to the maneuver commander,The FSE is located with the operationselement of the maneuver force. The FSE mayinclude the personnel shown below.
BATTALION OR SQUADRON FIRESUPPORT ELEMENT PERSONNEL
TITLE RANK NUMBER
Fire Support Officer CPT 1
Fire Support Plans/Targeting Officer LT 1
Fire Support Sergeant SFC 1
Fire Support Specialist SPC 2
Amplitude Modulated (AM)Radio Operators PFC 2
1ACR only until fielding of the AN/GRC-193
When added to the FSE to perform their firesupport functions, other representativescomprise a functional fire support cell (FScell) to enhance and speed fire supportcoordination. These representatives mayinclude the following:
Ž S3 air.
FM 6-20-40
Ž Heavy mortar platoon leader.
Ž Battalion chemical officer.
Ž
Ž
Ž
Tactical air control party.
Supporting arms liaison team (SALT).
Air defense officer.
Other representatives (engineer, allied forces,Žor Army aviation representatives).
Battalion Fire SupportOfficer Duties
The battalion FSO's primary duty is to plan,coordinate, and execute fires to support thecommander’s scheme of maneuver. He must –
Ž Advise the maneuver commander and hisstaff on fire support matters.
Ž Keep key personnel informed of pertinentinformation, such as battlefield intelligence.
Ž Train the battalion FSE.
Ž Supervise all functions of the battalion FScell.
Ž Train the company FSOs.
Ž Recommend fire support coordinatingmeasures.
Ž Write and disseminate the fire support planand fire support execution matrix.
Ž Coordinate with the TACP on TACAIRmissions and coordinate with CAS controlpersonnel (ALO, ETAC, and AFAC).
Battalion Fire SupportPlans/Targeting Officer Duties
The plans/targeting officer gives the FSE a24-hour FSO capability. He helps the FSO
perform his duties and acts as the FSO in hisabsence. Also, he interfaces with the battalionS2 and helps him and the FSO by providinginformation - on the vulnerabilities of targets. Headvises the maneuver battalion S2 on targetaccuracy and description requirements andevaluates dwell times for attack by fire supportsystems. His duties in the targeting area are asfollows:
Ž
Ž
Help the battalion S2 develop the informaltarget acquisition and surveillance plan.
Help provide staff supervsion of the targetacquistion (TA) assets organic to and underoperational control (OPCON) of thebattalion.
Ž Develop, recommend to the commander, anddisseminate the attack guidance matrix to theFS cell, command post (CP), and subordinateelements. (See Appendix G.)
Ž Determine, recommend, and process time-sensitive high-payoff targets to the firesupport element.
Ž Coordinate with the maneuver battalion S2for target acquisition coverage and processingof battalion high-payoff targets.
Ž With the battalion S2, produce targetselection standards matrix for TA assetsworking for the battalion.
Battalion Fire SupportSergeant Duties
The battalion fire support sergeant is thesenior enlisted assistant to the battalion FSO.He acts as the FSO in his absence. He isresponsible for training the enlisted personnelof the battalion FSE and four maneuverFISTs. He supervises the maintenance of allequipment assigned to these sections. Thebattalion fire support sergeant must be able toperform all the duties of his FSO.
1-7
FM 6-20-40
Battalion Fire Support OfficerWorking Relationships
The battalion FSO interacts and coordinateswith many personnel within a maneuverorganization.
Maneuver Battalion Commander
The battalion FSO is the maneuvercommander’s fire support expert. Themaneuver battalion commander–
Ž States his intentions through his concept ofthe operation and the commander’s intent.
Ž Specifies priority of fires, including allocationof FPFs and priority targets.
Ž Specifies fire support coordinating measuresrequired.
Ž Specifies special munitions required (smoke,illumination, lethal chemicals, riot controlagents, family of scatterable mines[FASCAM]) (See Appendix H),
Maneuver Battalion S3
The S3 integrates fire support into the schemeof maneuver in accordance with thecommander’s guidance. The S3–
Ž
Ž
Ž
Develops the commander’s intent into ascheme of maneuver or plan for the defense.
Establishes boundaries for subordinate unitsand other maneuver control measures (phaselines, passage points, checkpoints).
Answers questions and elaborates oncommander’s guidance on priority of fires,special munitions, use of TACAIR,employment of COLTS (Appendix I),allocation of FPFs, employment of mortars,and/or any other areas involving fire supportplanning and coordination.
Brigade Fire Support Officer
The brigade FSO is responsible for trainingthe battalion FSOs. He is the assistantFSCOORD and is responsible for all firesupport. The brigade FSO –
Ž
Ž
Ž
Ž
Ž
Disseminates fire support guidance as itapplies to the battalion FSO (such aspreplanned CAS missions, availability ofimmediate CAS, additional fire supportassets, and target lists).
Disseminates the pulse repetition frequency(PRF) codes for laser designators.
Recommends fire support coordinatingmeasures.
Writes and disseminates the brigade firesupport plan.
Trains battalion FSOs.
Maneuver Battalion S3 AirThe battalion S3 air –
Ž
Ž
Ž
Ž
Works closely with the FSO to prioritize CASrequests.
Integrates TACAIR support into thecommander’s scheme of maneuver.
Forwards preplanned and immediateTACAIR requests to brigade.
Is the point of contact for Army aviation(attack helicopter) requests.
Maneuver Battalion S2The battalion S2 is responsible for conductingterrain and weather analyses and for enemysituation templating. He then integrates therest of the intelligence preparation of thebattlefield (IPB) process and the creation ofthe decision support template as overseen bythe S3. Through the intelligence preparation ofthe battlefield, he develops named areas of
1-8
FM 6-20-40
interest (NAIs) and target areas of interest(TAIs) which the FSO uses in thedevelopment of the fire support plan.
Maneuver Battalion Signal Officer
The maneuver battalion signal officer (BSO) isa signal officer on the special staff. The BSO –
Ž Advises the commander and/or S3 on all
Ž
communications and electronics mattersincluding positioning command and controlelements.
Is the FSO’s point of contact for signaloperation instructions (S0I) issue duringoperations and for communicationstroubleshooting.
IS responsible for repair, turn-in, andŽexchange of communications equipment ofattached fire support assets. Coordinates forbatteries and communications supplies.
Ž Has a retransmission capability that permitsradio communications ‘on one net over agreater distance.
Task Force Engineer
The coordination between the task forceengineer and the FSO is critical to the successof the obstacle plan. Fires such asantibreaching team fires, smoke to silhouettetargets emerging from a breach, andillumination fires for night breaching areessential.
Field Artillery Battalion S3
The FA battalion S3 may coordinate with thebattalion FSO during quick fire planning and todisseminate the scheme of maneuver, asrequired.
Battalion Chemical Officer
The battalion chemical officer is responsible foradvising the commander or S3 of the effects of
friendly and enemy nuclear, biological,chemical (NBC) attacks. When brigade hasasked for nominations of chemical targets forfriendly attack, the FSO coordinates with thechemical officer for the location ofcontaminated areas and NBC defensemeasures. The battalion chemical officer is alsoresponsible for advising the commander on theuse of riot control agents and obscurants.
Mortar Platoon Leader
The mortar platoon leader –
• Advises the S3 or FSO) of mortar positionsand ammunition.
• Seeks survey and/or met support from theFSO.
Tactical Air Control Party
The tactical air control party –
Ž Advises the maneuver commander and hisstaff on the capabilities, limitations, and useof TACAIR support.
Ž Helps process TACAIR requests.
Ž Controls CAS sorties supporting thebatttalion.
Ž Provides the battalion FSO with TACAIRinformation and characteristics.
Supporting Arm Liaison Team
The supporting arms liaison team –
Ž Advises the commander and/or S3 of navalgunfire matters.
Ž Provides the battalion FSO with N G Finformation and characteristics.
Ž Monitors the firepower control team andrequests for fire support.
1-9
FM 6-20-40
Company Fire Support OfficersThe company FSOs work for the battalionFSO, and they work with their respectivecompany commanders.
The battalion FSO provides the companyFSOs with guidance, battlefield intelligence,information on fire support assets andcoordinating measures, and technical advice.Company FSOs send target lists, FLOTlocations, situation reports, spot reports, andother PIR to the battalion fire supportelement.
Requests for fires from the FISTS or observersmay be sent directly to the field artillery overthe FA fire direction (FD) net, or they may besent through the battalion FSO. The methodused may depend on the fire support assetsavailable, situation, and equipment on hand.Requests for mortars may be handled in thesame manner.
Ž
Brigade Fire Support Organization
The brigade or regimental fire support elementis organized with the personnel shown below. Ž
BRIGADE OR REGIMENT FIRESUPPORT ELEMENT ORGANIZATION
TITLE RANK NUMBER
Fire Support Officer MAJ 1
Fire Support Plans/Targeting Officer 1 LT1 1
Fire Support Sergeant SFC 1
Fire Support Specialist SPC 2
AM Radio Operator2 PFC 21ACR is authorized a captain.2ACR only until fielding of the AN/GRC-1 93.
When added to the FSE to perform theirfire support functions, other representativescomprise a functional fire support cell toe n h a n c e a n d s p e e d f i r e s u p p o r tcoordination. These representatives mayinclude the following:
Ž An ALO for matters concerning thecoordination and employment of Air Forceassets in ‘support of the brigade.
Ž A naval gunfire liaison officer (NGLO) formatters concerning the coordination andemployment of naval gunfire and naval air insupport of the brigade.
A brigade chemical officer for matters
Ž
concerning use of chemical agents, riotcontrol agents, obscurants, and aerosol agentsand deployment of NBC defense.
An S3 air as a maneuver assistant S3 and tocoordinate the employment of TACAIRsupport with Army aviation with the FSO.ALO, and AD platoon leader.
Other representatives as required, such asliaison officers of allied forces supporting theoperation or an Army aviation liaison officerwhen Army aviation is used as a fire supportasset.
In addition to the staff officers describedabove and at battalion level, a few otherstaff members may be in the brigadetactical CP. The FSO should have aworking knowledge of their duties. Theyare as follows:
Ž The brigade air defense officer manages theair defense assets in support of the brigade.He may have valuable information onairspace coordination, the enemy airsituation, and the location of enemy airdefense targets.
Ž The brigade engineer manages the engineerassets that are placed in support of the
1-10
FM 6-20-40
brigade. He is the person with whom tocoordinate the coverage of obstacles, the useof FASCAM, and requirements for generalbattlefield mobility and countermobility.
Ž The IEW representative from the divisionalcombat electronic warfare intelligence(CEWI) assets controls and supervises theIEW assets that are in support of the brigade.He can provide some targets and informationand is the tie-in for the offensive use ofjamming. The FSO needs a workingknowledge of the IEW assets available fromthis source to effectively coordinate their usein the attack of targets.
Brigade Fire SupportOfficer Duties
T h e F S C O O R D ( t h e D S b a t t a l i o ncommander) cannot be at the brigadeheadquarters constantly. Therefore, he has anassistant, the brigade FSO, to serve as afull-time liaison between the DS FA battalionand the maneuver brigade. He helps themaneuver brigade S3 integrate fire support intothe maneuver commander’s scheme ofoperation. Assisting the FSO are the other staffofficers who make up the FS cell. The duties ofthe brigade FSO are as follows:
Ž
Ž
Ž
Keep the brigade commander informed ofthe fire support assets, their capabilities andlimitations, and their tactical missions.
Keep the commander informed of enemyindirect fire capabilities and limitations.
Help the commander develop his estimate ofthe situation and war-game possible coursesof action, resulting in the creation of thedecision support template.
Develop the brigade fire support plan on thebasis of the commander’s intent, and brief thecommander.
Ž Ensure battalion FS0s plan fires inaccordance with the brigade commander’sguidance, and establish priority of fires.
Ž
Ž
Ž
Ž
Consolidate target lists from the battalionFSOs, and resolve duplications.
Plan targets in depth and other targets thatwere not planned by subordinate FSOs butare within the brigade zone of action.
Coordinate requests for additional firesupport from battalion FSOs when the firesupport means available at company orbattalion level are inadequate.
Recommend and adhere to fire supportcoordinating measures.
Ž Use commander’s guidance (See Appendix B)as a checklist in preparing fire support plansand briefings.
Ž Coordinate with the ALO on brigade use ofTACAIR assets.
Brigade Fire SupportPlans/Targeting Officer Duties
The plans/targeting officer gives the FSE a24-hour FSO capability. He acts as the FSO inhis absence and helps the FSO perform hisduties. Also, he interfaces with the brigade S2and helps him and the FSO by providinginformation on the vulnerabilities of targets.He advises the brigade S2 on target accuracyand description requirements and evaluatesdwell times for attack by fire support systems.His duties in the targeting area are as follows:
Ž Help the brigade S2 write the targetacquisition and surveillance plan.
Ž Ž Help provide staff supervision of the targetacquisition assets attached or organic to andunder operational control of the brigade.
1-11
FM 6-20-40
Ž
Ž
Ž
Ž
Develop, recommend to the commander, anddisseminate the attack guidance matrix to theFS cell, CP, and subordinate elements. (SeeAppendix G.)
Determine, recommend, and processtime-sensitive high-payoff targets to the firesupport element.
Coordinate with the maneuver brigade S2 fortarget acquisition coverage and processing ofbrigade high-payoff targets.
With the brigade S2, produce a targetselection standards matrix for TA assetsworking for the brigade.
Brigade Fire SupportSergeant Duties
The brigade fire support sergeant is thesenior enlisted assistant to the brigadeFSO. He may be a shift leader in the FSE.He is responsible for training enlistedpersonnel of maneuver battalion FSEs,maneuver FISTs, and assigned COLTs. Hesuperv ises the main tenance of a l lequipment assigned to these sections. Thebrigade fire support sergeant must be ableto perform all the duties of his FSO.
Brigade Fire Support OfficerWorking Relationships
The brigade FSO interacts and coordinateswith personnel as discussed below.
Maneuver Brigade Commander and/or S3
The maneuver commander is the personresponsible for the operation. The maneuver
S3 is detailed responsibility for the integrationof fire support into the operation.
Direct Support Battalion Commander
The DS battalion commander is the brigadeFSCOORD. He is accountable to themaneuver brigade commander for the qualityof fire support provided to the maneuverbrigade. As the brigade FSCOORD, he advisesand assists the brigade commander in allaspects of fire support planning andcoordination. He is responsible for the trainingof all fire support personnel supporting thebrigade.
Direct Support Battalion S3
The DS battalion S3 prepares the FA supportplan and is responsible for ensuring that theplan is executed in concert with the maneuverplan. He continuously coordinates with thebrigade FSO and the brigade S3 for positionareas, movements, future operations, needs foradditional fire support, and status of firesupport systems.
Division Fire Support Cell
The division FS cell is the next higher link inthe fire support chain. The division FS cellprovides guidance to the brigade FS cell, andboth FS cells exchange fire support planningand coordination information.
Battalion Fire Support Offieers
The brigade FSO is responsible for thetechnical supervision and training of thebattalion FSOs. He ensures that they properlydevelop and execute their fire support plan.
1-12
FM 6-20-40
CHAPTER 2
THE "WHAT" OF FIRE SUPPORT PLANNINGAND COORDINATION
Fire Support PlanningFire support planning is the continuing processof analyzing, allocating, and scheduling firesupport. It determines how fire support will beused, what types of targets will be attacked, whenthey will be attacked, and with what means. Thegoal is to effectively integrate fire support intobattle plans to optimize combat power. To dothis, fire support planning is concurrent withbattle planning. Planning must be flexible toaccommodate the unexpected in combat and tofacilitate rapid change. It anticipates the massingof fire support assets, changes in the forcemission, realistic movement times, resupply,target acquisition technical support to includesurvey and met requirements, and thereplacement of entire units. In fire supportplanning, the FSO must consider three vital setsof information:
Ž Commander’s intent and/or scheme ofmaneuver.
Ž Mission, enemy, terrain and weather, andtroops and time available (METT-T).
Ž Guidance from higher FA headquarters.
These three items cannot be consideredseparately. Each impacts on the others.
Commander’s Intent
At each level, the FSO plans fires as thecommander outlines his scheme of maneuver.The FSO must know when and where thecommander wants fire support, He must fullyunderstand what the commander wants in theway of effects, duration, and timing. To trulyunderstand the commander’s intent, the FSOmust know why the commander wants support.He must also understand how the unit direct fireassets are to be used so he can supplement, notinterfere with, their employment. The FSO mustseek and understand the commander’s guidanceand intent and be prepared to recommend theintegration of available fire support. The FSOmust inform the maneuver brigade commanderand the S3 of the FA logistics cost forimplementing the fire support battlefieldoperating system (BOS) for each course ofaction. This information must be presentedduring the war-gaming portion of the commandestimate process. Also, the FSO informs thecommander of all changes to the fire supportplan he receives through fire support channels.
Considerations of METT-TAll levels of command continuously analyzeinformation while considering factors ofMETT-T.
CONSIDERATIONS OF METT-T
FACTORMission
CONSIDERATIONSWhat is the mission?What are the commander’s concept of the operation and scheme of maneuver?What is the commander’s intent?What is the objective of the operation?What route is the unit using?
2-1
FM 6-20-40
FACTORMission (Continued)
Enemy
Terrain andWeather
Troops Available
CONSIDERATIONS OF METT-T (CONTINUED)CONSIDERATIONS
What are the intermediate objectives?What are the missions of the higher, lower, and adjacent units?Are there any contingency missions?
What are the capabilities and limitations of enemy forces in the unit zone of action(for example, fire support assets, direct fire weapons, and vehicle mobility)?What are the likely courses of action?Where are known, suspected, and likely enemy locations?How does the enemy employ his forces (artillery, patrols, FOs, attack helicopters)?
Consider observation, cover and concealment, obstacles, key terrain, and avenues ofapproach (OCOKA).What is observation like in sector?Are cover and concealment available in sector’?Where are the obstacles (man-made and natural) in sector?Where is the key terrain?Where are Iikely positions for ambushes, LPs, and or OPS, and killing zones?Where are the avenues of approach?What is the weather forecast, and how will it affect mobility and visibility?How does terrain affect mobility, both friendly and enemy?What munitions are best suited for the terrain and weather?Are appropriate fire support coordinating measures tied to terrain, when applicable?
NOTE: Environmental and terrain considerations are discussed in Appendix J.
What is the status of FIST and/or FS cell training, experience, personnel, andequipment?What fire support assets are available, and what are their locations and/or capabilities?What is the status of the supported unit?What is the status of the observers in sector (FOs, COLTS, scouts, and such)?
How long before the operation begins?How much time is available to fire-plan?How long will it take to coordinate the fire plan?How long is the operation expected to last?
Time Available
Guidance From Higher HeadquartersHigher headquarters will give the FSOinformation essential to the fire support plan.This information includes–
Ž The commander's intent at that level.
2-2
FM 6-20-40
Ž Fire Support assets available.
Ž Fire support coordinating measures.
Ž Target lists.
Ž Schedules of fires.
Ž Constraints on FA Class V consumption,stated in terms of a controlled supply rate(CSR).
Ž Technical advice on fire support matters.
Decision-Making ProcessThe decision-making process is as detailed, oras simple, as time permits. The commanderplays the central role in this process, with thestaff providing advice and information relatedto their respective areas. The process isprimarily downward, beginning at higherechelons and progressing down to the companyFSO. Its effectiveness requires continuousinteraction and bottom-up feedback. Thefollowing paragraphs describe some firesupport aspects of the decision-making processat company, battalion, and brigade levels.
When the maneuver commander receives hismission (step 1) and issues his initial planningguidance (step 2), the corresponding FS cellreceives guidance from the higher FS cell. Asa minimum, this guidance should include thefollowing:
Ž Fire support asset allocation and status.
Ž Commander's target attack guidance.
Fires in the zone planned by higherheadquarters.
The commander analyzes and restates themission and issues his intent and planningguidance (step 3). This planning guidancemay have several courses of action, Uponreceipt of the guidance, staff members takethe following actions:
Ž The FSO makes his staff estimate (step 4). Heinteracts with the other staff members andwar-games the courses of action to determinethe suitability of fire support to support thecourses of action.
Ž The S2 analyzes the area of operations (AO)and starts the IPB process. He informs otherstaff members of the known enemy locations,capabilities and projected courses of actionfor the enemy force, and assets that are mostimportant to the accomplishment of theenemy mission. He determines which organicand attached collection assets (maneuver, firesupport, and military intelligence) can acquirethose enemy assets. He also tasks andprovides staff supervision of the collectionassets. If time permits, the S2 and thetargeting officer identify high-value targetswithin the brigade zone.
Staff members prepare and brief theirestimates to the commander. The FSO mustbe able to brief the fire support requirementsfor each course of action and recommend thebest one from a fire support perspective. Therequirements he should be prepared to discussinclude the following:
Ž Assets available to support the operation.
Ž Capabilities and limitations of fire support foreach course of action (both friendly andenemy).
Ž
The commander gives his estimate and makesa decision. Then he issues his concept, statinghow he visualizes the conduct of the battle(step 5). As he develops his battle plan for theemployment of maneuver forces, he must alsovisualize and articulate how he will use his firesupport resources, which subordinate echelonhe will weight with fire support, and whattargets to attack. Subordinate commanders andtheir FSOs may be present. The commanderissues guidance to the staff on prioritization oftargets, desired effects, and targets that requiresome sort of formal assessment after attack.
2-3
FM 6-20-40
MILITARY DECISION-MAKING PROCESS
1In time-critical situations, the commander may be forced to base his estimate on his personal knowledge ofthe situation and issue oral orders to his subordinate units.
2-4
FM 6-20-40
Plans and orders are prepared (step 6). The FSO,assisted by the other fire support staff officers,writes the fire support plan. The brigade FSOplans fires in support of the brigade operation inaccordance with the commander’s concept,intent, and scheme of maneuver. Fires plannedoutside the brigade zone are coordinated withhigher and adjacent units. Fires planned in thebrigade rear are coordinated with the S3 and thecontrolling agency in the brigade support area(BSA), normally the forward support battalioncommander. The fire plan is disseminated tohigher and adjacent units and to the battalionFSOs. The targeting officer helps the S2 writethe target acquisition and surveillance plans. As aminimum, the fire support plan should include–
Ž Availability and status of each fire support asset.
Ž Priority of fires and how that priority will beexecuted.
Ž Planned fire support within the zone.
Ž Fire support execution matrix.
Ž Target lists.
Ž Attack guidance matrix.
Ž Any requirements the higher FS cell willplace on subordinate FS cells.
Ž Retransmission requirements for communi-cations, depending on terrain.
The commander approves the plan or order (step7). The written plan is disseminated to thesubordinate units (step 8). The FSO at each levelshould accompany his maneuver commanderwhen he receives briefings from higherheadquarters on plans or orders.
Before execution, plans are refined as follows:
Ž Target lists are refined and duplicationsresolved. Company FSOs are particularlyvaluable in this refinement.
Ž Schedules are updated and disseminated.
Ž
Ž
Ž
Ž
Additional fire support assets are requested.
The collection plan is reviewed to ensure it iscompatible with the fire support plan.
Information collected by sensors before andduring execution is processed. The targetingofficer monitors reports by collection assets,updates target lists, and submits to the FS celltime-sensitive targets not in the fire supportsystem.
The FA support plan is developed by the FAbattalion S3. It is based on informationreceived from the FA battalion commanderand the brigade FSO. This plan embodies theDS battalion commander’s concept forexecuting the fire support plan supporting thebrigade commander’s intent. The DSbattalion commander briefs the brigadecommander on the FA support plan, which isthe FA battalion operation order (OPORD).
The fire support plan rehearsal (discussedbelow) is an important part of step 9 of thedecision-making process.
As the plan is executed, the FSO continuesplanning. As the battle progresses, thecommander may issue new guidance to reflectchanges in enemy equipment and tactics,changes in friendly capability, and changes inthe unit mission.
Fire Support Plan RehearsalThe FSO should gather all available membersof the FS cell to actively participate in themaneuver commander’s rehearsal. Rehearsalsimprove total comprehension of the plan.Participants who are unclear on specificportions of the plan gain answers through therepetitiveness afforded by war-gaming theoperation. The maneuver course of action andsupporting fire plan should be analyzed inanticipation of enemy courses of action thatmight occur in actual execution of the plan. Iaddition to war-gaming possible enemy courses
2-5
FM 6-20-40
of action, the rehearsal may address the use ofprimary and alternate communications nets,alternative attack systems to be used in theengagement of specified targets, andpositioning of munitions, observers, andweapon systems. The rehearsal improvesresponsiveness of fires and the synchronizationof all the maneuver commander’s resourcesfor the battle.
At any level, fire support participants in amaneuver commander’s rehearsal shouldinclude all members of the FS cell and anysubordinate FS cell members associated withpart icipating subordinate maneuverheadquarters. These members include theFSCOORD and/or FSO, ALO, NGLO and/orSALT officer, mortar platoon leader, chemicalofficer, and Army aviation liaison officer, asapplicable. The FA battalion S3 will benefitfrom the maneuver commander’s rehearsal byobtaining information for movement, schedulesof fire submitted by the FSOs, munitionrequirements, and a more completeunderstanding of the operational time involvedwith the scheme of maneuver. Also, the S2,the intelligence and electronic warfare supportelement (IEWSE) team leader, and theengineer officer, in particular, should bepresent. They should participate in thewar-gaming of significant events, such as targetacquisition employment and obstacleemplacement.
If the maneuver commander does not conducta rehearsal and rehearsal time is available, theFSCOORD and/or FSO should conduct a firesupport rehearsal by using the existingmaneuver operation plan (OPLAN), firesupport plan, and fire support executionmatrix. The fire support execution matrix isideal for use in the rehearsal, since therehearsal is normally conducted by performingand/or reciting–
Ž Actions to occur.
Ž Possible friendly initiatives.
Ž Possible reactions to enemy initiatives.
Ž Control measures.
Ž Significant events that are to occur in relationto time or phases of an operation.
The rehearsal conducted by only fire supportpersonnel is limited in that the success of therehearsal and benefits to be derived from itdepend on how well the FSCOORD and/orFSO conducting the rehearsal know themaneuver commander’s concept of theoperation. Within the DS artillery battalion,the commander, S3, FSO, and S2 structure thefire support rehearsal in accordance with theenemy’s most likely course of action and thefriendly scheme of maneuver. At theappropriate time, each participant executes hispart of the plan. The FSOs fire their assignedtargets, place fire support coordinatingmeasures into effect, and make the reports thebattalion depends on for its combatinformation. The FOs do the same. Theyensure that their assigned missions, especiallyhigh-priority ones like FPFs, are loaded in thebuffers of their digital message devices(DMDs) and ready for transmission. TheALOs monitor airspace coordinationprocedures, clear aircraft to depart from theinitial point (IP), call for target marking, andrequest fires for suppression of enemy airdefenses (SEAD). The DS battalion CPmonitors all of this. The battalion operationsand intelligence (O&I) section pays particularattention to displacements. The battalion firedirection center (FDC) issues fire orders andpasses messages to observers. If there is amutual support unit, the two FDCs exercisetransfer of control. Attached radars worksituational cues with the cueing agents. Eachfire unit FDC computes fire commands,acknowledges fire support coordinatingmeasures, and ensures that it can fire itsassigned mission. Where alternative friendlycourses of action hinge on enemy actions andwhen time permits, the alternatives may berehearsed.
2-6
FM 6-20-40
Note the important features of the rehearsal. Itpresupposes a complete plan – a plan completeenough to be executed. It is designed to showwhether everyone knows his responsibilities(such as firing a target, moving a battery,switching frequencies, observing a named areaof interest) and the cues for his action. Itallows a check on whether the plan will work.For example, observers confirm that they cansee their targets, and FDCs confirm that theyhave ballistic solutions to their targets, Finally,the rehearsal as a whole is clearly undersomeone’s direction.
There are many ways to conduct rehearsals.When time is limited, you will not have achance to rehearse everything. You muststreamline your plan and focus your rehearsalon critical events. Some rehearsal methods aredescribed below.
Suitable or Actual Terrain
Because of its increased realism, a rehearsalusing a suitable maneuver area or the actualarea in which the operation is to be conductedis the best method. Communications lines ofsight, clutter on specific communications nets,trigger points and/or target reference points(TRPs), and actual operational times requiredto move from position to position may bevisually simulated. This method requires alarge area and an increased amount ofpreparation and planning time. Use of thismethod depends on operational or signalsecurity considerations.
Model Rehearsal
Models may be constructed to show buildings,compounds, or built-up areas. This type ofrehearsal requires good intel l igenceinformation on the area of operation and moretime to construct the model itself. This type ofrehearsal is normally used for specialoperations.
Map Rehearsal
This rehearsal may be conducted by using amap with the appropriate overlays. Thismethod may be used when time and rehearsalspace are limited. Using this method limits thenumber of participants to those who cangather around a single map unless individualmaps are used. Participants verbally describeactions to be taken.
Sand Table
The sand table method expands the area inwhich rehearsal participants may gather arounda single graphical representation of theoperation. Maneuver graphics may be depictedby using engineer tape, string, or spray paintor simply by carving out lines in the ground.Key terrain, topography, and objectives may bedepicted by the use of rocks, items ofequipment, or piles of earth. Preparing for thisrehearsal method requires more time;however, it generally permits more participantsand is a better visual aid.
Radio Rehearsaland/or Communications Exercise
This type of rehearsal is conducted on firesupport nets by using the brigade or battalionfire support plan or execution matrix whenavailable time and situation do not permitassembly of key personnel.
Fire PlanningPlan the minimum targets necessary to supportthe scheme of maneuver. The targetingprocess, a critical part of the fire planningprocess, is based on the friendly scheme ofmaneuver. It requires close interaction amongthe commander, S2, targeting officer, S3, FScell, and various combat support agencies. Itincludes an assessment of the terrain andenemy and an identification of those enemyformations, equipment, facilities, and terrain
2-7
FM 6-20-40
that must be attacked to ensure success. It alsoinvolves anticipating the requirement forSEAD fires in support of CAS assets.
Process
Fire planning begins with the commander’sguidance and/or intent. It continues throughthe development of a prioritized list specifyingwhat targets are to be attacked and when(decide), the acquisition of those high-payofftargets (detect), and the determination ofattack options to be used (fire support,maneuver, electronic warfare [EW], or acombination) to defeat the target (deliver). Theprocess ends with the assessment of the effectsof the attack.
Offensive Fire PlanningFor fire planning, offensive operations may bedivided into four phases: short of the line ofdeparture (LD) or line of contact (LC), fromthe LD or LC to the objective, on theobjective, and beyond the objective.
Defensive Fire Planning
In the defense, the FSO should considerplanning fires in front of, on, and behindthe position.
Analysis
After the FSO has collected the targetsavailable to him, he must analyze them todetermine which ones will be included in thefire plan. Having too many targets is as bad ashaving too few targets to support the schemeof maneuver. It is imperative that FS cells beable to reference targets quickly. The targetlist will be reduced by –
Ž Resolving duplication of targets.
Ž Deleting targets that do not fit thecommander’s intern or support the scheme ofmaneuver.
2-8
FM 6-20-40
OFFENSIVE FIRE PLANNING
PHASE ACTIONS TO BE TAKENShort of the LD or LC Consider planning fires –
Ž To support the unit movement to the LD or LC.Ž To support the unit if the attack falls and the enemy counterattacks.Ž To impede enemy patrols and early warning systems.
From the LC or LD to Provide priority of fires to lead elements.the Objective Consider planning –
Ž Fires to suppress enemy direct fire weapons,Ž Smoke to restrict enemy observation of friendly maneuver elements.Ž Smoke to screen friendly obstacle-breaching operations.Ž Fires on exposed flanks.
Consider placing an FO or a COLT In overwatch position.Consider recommending preparation fire if the advantages outweigh thedisadvantages:
Ž Will the enemy be forewarned of an attack?Ž Will the loss of surprise significantly affect the chance for success?Ž Are there enough significant targets to justify a preparation?Ž Is there enough fire support ammunition to fire an affective preparation?Ž Can the enemy recover before the effects can be explotted?
Determine when and how you will shift fires. Use one of the following methods:Ž Time – at a predetermined time, fires will shift.Ž Location –fires shift when the maneuver unit reaches a certain location, su
as a phase line.Ž On call – the maneuver commander directs when the fires shift.Ž Event – a predetermined event signals shifting of fires.
NOTE: Whatever method is used, all concerned must know what method isbeing used.
On the Objective Consider planning –Ž Fires to block enemy reinforcement and resupply by ground or air.Ž Fires to suppress enemy direct fire weapons.Ž Obscurants to screen friendly forces or obscure hostile ground observati
when consolidating on the objective with smoke and white phosphorus (W/P).Ž Signals for lifting and/or shifting fires.Ž Fires as you would for the defense when consolidating on the objective.
Beyond the Objective Consider planning fires –Ž To impede enemy reinforcements.Ž To block avenues of approach for counterattacking enemy forces.Ž To slow or block enemy retreat.
2-9
FM 6-20-40
FOCUSIn Front of the Positon
On the Position
DEFENSIVE FIRE PLANNING
ACTIONS TO BE TAKENOn avenues of approach –
Ž Target enemy avenues of approach and/or choke points.Ž If COLTs are available, position them to cover avenues of approach (where
high-value targets will appear).Ž If available, plan FASCAM to slow the enemy, (See Appendix H.)Ž Integrate fire support with direct fire weapons.Ž Plan trigger points for possible moving targets.
On key terrain –Ž Place an FO or a COLT on terrain where he can provide early warning, target
Iocation, and laser designation and/or overwatch of the battle.Ž Plan to obscure enemy observation of friendly movements.
On obstacles–ŽŽ
Ž
Ž
ŽŽŽŽ
Coordinate coverage of obstacles with the engineers.Plan fires behind, in front of, and adjacent to obstacles to hinder enemybreaching operations.Consider the use of smoke or riot control agents to hinder breachingoperations.If available and in conjunction with the engineer, plan FASCAM to reseedminefield that the enemy has breached.Plan fires to dose gaps and lanes in barrier or obstacle plans.Plan fires to help canalize the enemy.Integrate fire support with obstacles to complement direct fire weapons.Accurately locate obstacles and preplanned targets.
Consider–Ž Using groups or series to assist in withdrawal.Ž Using smoke to facilitate disengagement.Ž Planning fires on top of your battle position to help in the disengagement, to
deny the enemy access to the position, and to support a counterattack.Plan FPFs (a prearranged bawler of fire designed to protect friendly troops). Usethe following sequence in planning FPFs; but remember that the maneuvercommander selects FPF locations.
Ž Select the fire support asset to fire the FPF.Ž Adjust fire Onto the FPF to determine actual firing data to be used In firing the
FPF. (The tactical situation, the, or ammunition supply may not allow the FPFto be adjusted.)
Ž Determine the FPF time of flight.Ž Select the FPF reference point (a permanent visible point on terrain to the front
that is used to determine when the FPF will be requested).Ž Consider time of flight (TOF) and the estimated rate of enemy movement.Ž Integrate the FPF into the final protective lines of the company direct fire
weapons.Ž Determine how the FPF call for fire will be initiated.
NOTE: The length of an FPF is the number of elements (tubes) multiplied bythe projectile bursting diameter. The sizes of the FPFs for given systems aresown below.
2-10
FM 6-20-40
DEFENSIVE FIRE PLANNING (CONTINUED)
FOCUS ACTIONS TO BE TAKEN
System Elements Size of FPF60-mm mortar 2 tubes 70 by 35 meters81-mm mortar 4 tubes 140 by 35 meters81-mm mortar (improved) 4 tubes 140 by 35 meters107-mm mortar 3 tubes 120 by 40 meters105-mm howitzer 3 guns 105 by 35 meters105-mm howitzer 6 guns 210 by 35 meters155-mm howitzer 4 guns 200 by 50 meters155-mm howitzer 6 guns 300 by 50 meters155-mm howitzer 8 guns 400 by 50 meters203-mm howitzer 4 guns 320 by 80 meters203-mm howitzer 8 guns 840 by 80 meters
Behind the Position Consider planning fires –Ž To support alternate battle positions.Ž To support a counterattack.Ž To delay the enemy as the company withdraws.Ž To prevent reinforcement by the enemy.
Target Acquisition Assets Three COLTS are organic to each directin a Brigade support FA battalion. They are under the
The FSO has at his disposal not only the control of the brigade FSO to provide target
targeting assets of FA target acquisition acquisition capabilities critical to the operationbeyond those of the FIST.systems but also maneuver and military
intelligence (MI) assets.
Field Artillery Systems
The direct support FA battalion may haveaerial fire support observers (AFSOs) and/oran AN/TPQ-36 radar attached.
The direct support FA battalion S2 has accessto information on Threat FA assets.
Forward and aerial observers are available(Appendix K).
Fire Support Cell Systems
At division level, the FS cell has access totargeting information from the division G2 andthe all-source production section (ASPS).
The battalion FSOs should provide targetingand intelligence information from themaneuver battalion S2 and TA assets not onlyto the brigade FSO but also to the FIST andthe FA battalion.
Maneuver Systems
The brigade S2 can provide intelligenceinformation gained through maneuver and MIchannels.
The brigade headquarters does not haveorganic TA assets. Those available to themaneuver battalions are:
Ž Scouts from the battalion scout platoon.
Ž Patrols.
2-11
FM 6-20-40
Military Intelligence SystemsThe division MI battalion (CEWI) commandertask-organizes his assets to provide IEW supportto committed maneuver brigades.
IEWSE (Liaison Team). This element is headed byan EW officer from the MI battalion S3 and ishabitually placed in support of a forward brigade,It is designed to reinforce the brigade staff andcoordinate all MI operations in support of thebrigade.
IEW Company Team. The CEWI battalioncommander may form an IEW company team tocontrol the diverse MI assets, including assets notdirectly supporting the brigade, deployed in thebrigade area of operations. There is no standardstructure of the company, and it is assignedstandard tactical missions. Elements of the IEWcompany team may include those discussedbelow.
Counterintelligence Team. This team identifieshostile collection and rear operations threat;recommends the EEFI; nominates enemy TAsystems for suppression, neutralization, ordestruction; and screens enemy prisoners of war(EPW) and refugees for persons ofcounterintelligence (CI) interest (such aslow-level collection agents and provocationagents).
Ground Surveliance Radar and/or Remotely EmployedSensor Teams. Ground surveillance radar andremotely employed sensor (REMS) teams givethe brigade a highly mobile, near-all-weather,24-hour capability for battlefield surveillance.They may be employed on patrols and atobservation posts. Normally, most of the teamsprovided to the brigade are attached tosubordinate battalions and may be deployed tocompany level.
Electronic Warfare Platoon. This platoon providesvoice communications intercept andcommunications jamming support to the brigade.The platoon can interface with the MI battalion
tactical operations center (Toc) and IEWSE,scan and summarize voice interceptions, and jamenemy communications receivers.
Target List Work SheetThe FSO records targets on DA Form 4655-R(Target List Work Sheet). Instructions forcompleting DA Form 4655-R and an exampletarget list work sheet are in Appendix D, Areproducible copy of this form is in Appendix L.Essential data recorded on this form are thetarget number, target description target locationand specific guidance on the attack of the target.Specific information in the remarks column mayinclude the following:
Ž
Ž
Ž
Ž
Ž
Shell-fuze combinations (if other than highexplosive [HE] -point detonating [PD]).
Fire support system to engage the targets (ifother than FA).
Effects required by the commander.
Duration of fires.
Schedule into which the target is to beincluded, such as a group or series.
Deliberate Fire PlanningDeliberate fire planning is conducted through aformal top-down process, with bottom-uprefinement as time permits. However, deliberatefire planning at all levels also begins immediatelyon receipt of the mission. Company andbattalion FSOs should not wait for a target listfrom higher echelons before beginning their ownplanning. For the maneuver brigade, the processbegins with the receipt of targeting informationfrom the division. The division G2, inconjunction with the targeting officer of thedivision main FSE, performs a detailed IPB andtarget value analysis (TVA) for the entiredivision area of operation. Named areas ofinterest and target areas of interest are includedin the IPB for the brigade S2. High-payofftargets for the division and specific targets of
2-12
FM 6-20-40
interest and/or schedules of fire come from thetop down to the brigade FSE or targeting officer.The brigade S2 and FSO must refine thisdivision guidance for the brigade area andconcept of operation.
Brigade is normally the lowest level at whichformal fire planning is done. The brigade FSOreceives from the division targets that are inhis zone and in the brigade area of interestand that have been developed from thedivision IPB and/or acquired by division TAassets. The brigade FSO works with thetargeting team at brigade to develop targetswithin his zone. The targeting team includesthe commander, S3, S2, lEWSE, targetingofficer, and engineer officer. The brigade FSOadds division and brigade targets to his targetlist work sheet, posts the targets on his overlay,and passes those targets to subordinatemaneuver battalions and the DS artillerybattalion. He then receives target listmodifications from the battalion FSOs. Usingthe target list work sheet and overlay, heresolves duplications, prioritizes the list, andsends it to the DS battalion and appropriateagencies available to the maneuver brigadecommander for that operation. It is importantthat the brigade FSO allow enough planningtime for subordinate headquarters and that heestablish a cutoff time for their submission ofmodifications so that the plan can bedisseminated with adequate time for execution.
The battalion FSO, in conjunction with thecommander, operations officer, and primaryand special staffs, is responsible for identifyingthe fire support requirements of the battalion.To do this, he receives targets from thebrigade FSO, modifies them as necessary, andadds targets of concern to the battalioncommander. Using the target list work sheetand overlay as tools, he forwards his list oftargets to subordinate company FSOs.
The company FSO and maneuver companycommander plan targets to support the
company scheme of maneuver. The companyFSO receives targets from the battalion thatare within the company area of interest. Hemodifies them as necessary and adds any otherta rge ts accord ing to the maneuvercommander’s priorities. Modifications andadditions are submitted through the battalionto the brigade FSO for inclusion in the finalbrigade target list and fire plan.
At the lowest level, the company FSOnominates targets in his sector, records thistarget information on the target list worksheet, and forwards it to the battalion FSO.The battalion FSO considers the targetinformation he receives from each of thecompany FSOs, consolidates it (by eliminatingduplications), adds targets needed by thebattalion, and forwards a copy of the worksheet to the brigade FSO. The brigade FSOreceives target lists from the battalion FSOs.Using a target overlay, he resolvesduplications, adds targets developed by thebrigade TA assets, prioritizes the list, andsends it to the DS battalion. He informs thebattalion FSOs of any subsequent changes totheir plans and transmits the brigade targetlist. Once targets are received by battalionand/or brigade FSOs, they prepare their fireplans and schedules to support the maneuverand allocate targets to the appropriate firesupport agency or asset.
Quick Fire PlanningThe purpose of quick fire planning is toquickly prepare and execute fire support inanticipation of an impending operation. Thebrigade FSO must ensure that the DSbattalion S3, FDC, and battalion FS cellsunderstand the quick fire plan and how it isused. Quick fire planning techniques constitutean informal fire plan. Quick fire planningdiffers from deliberate fire planning in that abottom-up process rather than a top-downprocess is used. In the quick fire plan, theFSO is responsible for –
2-13
FM 6-20-40
Ž
Ž
Identifying targets in the target list to beengaged.
Allocating all fire support assets available toengage the targets in the plan.
Preparing the schedule of fires.
Disseminating the schedule to all appropriate
Ž
Ž Žfire support agencies for execution.
The following paragraphs delineate thequick fire planning sequence.
Receive the operation order, (Understandwhat the commander wants!) Get thefollowing decisions from the commander:
Ž Targets to be engaged.
Ž Desired effects on targets.
Ž Order and timing of target engagement.
Ž Duration of fires.
Ž H-hour.
Ž Priority of fires.
Ž Priority for targeting.
Ž Priority for execution.
Ž Time check from commmder.
Ž Estimated rate of movement.
Ž Need for target adjustment.
Ž Concept of the operation to include –
Objective and defensive positions.
Maneuver control measures.
Obstacles.
Find out what assets are available for theoperation, Concurrently, send a warning orderto all attack agencies. These include the FAbattalion S3, mortar platoon leader, ALO,NGLO or SALT officer, and brigade aviationliaison officer (LO) (if any are applicable). An
Ž
Ž
example warning order is given on page 2-15.Information to be obtained is as follows:
Ž From the FA direct support battalion — thefiring units that will be designated to fire inthe quick fire plan schedule.
From the maneuver commander–theavailability of the mortar platoon (companyFSO to battalion FSO for the mortars if acompany operation) for inclusion as firingunits into the schedule of fires.
From the FS cell–TACAIR missioninformation. Coordinate CAS requirementswith the ALO (for example, aircraft type,ordnance, time on station, laser codes, andcontrol procedures).
From the firepower control team (FCT),SALT officer, or NGLO -the availability ofnaval aircraft and/or naval gunfire.
Plan targets in accordance with (IAW) thescheme of maneuver, commander’s guidance,and allocated assets. Include–
Ž Asset to be used.
Ž Munitions mix.
Ž shell-fuze combinations.
Ž Duration of fire for each target.
Ž Time to fire.
After receiving the commander’s approval,disseminate the fire plan to attack systems,higher headquarters FS cells, and those whowill implement the plan (FOs and subordinateFS cells). Whenever possible, send DA Form5368-R (Quick Fire Plan) to the FA battalionCP and the mortar platoon leader. A repro-ducible copy of this form is in Appendix L.
Ensure that the subordinate FSOs and/orFISTS understand the fire plan. As aminimum, cover–
2-14
FM 6-20-40
Ž Positions or locations of FSOs and/or observersduring the conduct of the operation.
Ž Who is to initiate the fire plan or initiate the firerequest on specific on-call targets within the fireplan, Include the agency to be contacted, whenthe target is to be initiated, and thecommunications net to be used.
Ž Which unit has priority of fires or prioritytargets, if applicable.
Ž The use of methods of control in modifying theplan should it become necessary during theexecution of the plan.
Ž The agencies available when additional targetsof opportunity arise during the execution of theplan.
NOTE: If time allows, a rehearsal should be con-ducted to ensure comprehension of the plan.
Inform the commander when the fire supportplan is ready.
Review the fire support plan, and modify it asnecessary.
EXAMPLE QUICK FIRE PLAN
First transmission (warning order): (If shell-fuze combination other than standard isJ3B THIS IS D7T, QUICK FIRE PLAN, OVER. needed, report as part of target list: for example,
30 ROUNDS HE AND VT, OVER.)A2Y TO CONDUCT A HASTY ATTACK,OVER. Second transmission (target information):
J3B THIS IS D7T, TARGET LISTFIRE PLAN NICKNAME MARK. FOLLOWS:TIMINGS FROM H MINUS 6 TO H PLUS 7. (Read target information from appropriate lines inH-HOUR 0525, OVER. the quick fire plan.)
SAMPLE QUICK FIRE PLAN
LEGEND: plt = platoon POL = petroleum, oil and lubricants WP = white phosphorus
2-15
FM 6-20-40
Fire Support Execution MatrixThe fire support execution matrix is a concise,easy planning and execution tool that showsthe many factors of a complicated fire supportplan. This matrix may help the FSO and thecommander understand how the fire plansupports the scheme of maneuver. It is avaluable planning tool for both the offense andthe defense. It explains the aspects of the firesupport plan for which each FSO or FO isresponsible and the phase during the battle atwhich these aspects apply. When approved, thematrix becomes the primary execution tool,The matrix is set up with the maneuverelements shown along the left side anddifferent phases (phase lines, events, or times)of the mission along the top. Phases shouldcorrespond to phases established on maneuverexecution matrixes.
Company-Level MatrixAt company level, information to go in eachbox includes the following:
Ž priorities of indirect fire support to a platoon,indicated by an abbreviation of that firesupport asset, will appear in the upper leftcorner of the appropriate matrix box.
Ž The acronym FPF, preceded by the type ofindirect fire means responsible for firing thatFPF, will appear in the center of the box.
Ž priority targets allocated to a platoon willappear in the box as PRI TGT, preceded bythe means of fire support responsible forengaging the target and followed by thetarget number.
EXAMPLE COMPANY FIRE SUPPORT EXECUTION MATRIX
The illustration below shows an example of a On the objective, Serbs PIANO is to be fired bycompleted fire support execution matrix for a the artillery for 3d Platoon.company deliberate attack. In the assembly area(AA), a field artillery FPF is allocated for 1st and
The illustration shows a way to label the fire
2d Platoons. 2d Platoon has priority of mortarsupport execution matrix for easy reference.
(mort) fires from the LD/LC to Phase Line (PL)Columns are identified by letter, and lines areidentified by number. For example, the X is placed
WELLINGTON. From PL WELLINGTON to PL in block D2. This matrix reference system allowsJACKIE, 1st Platoon has been allocated a mortar the FSO to easily disseminate the original orpriority target designated AC1212. 3d Platoon has updated matrix data by radio or wire to allbeen allocated an artillery priority target, AC1234. appropriate agencies.
SAMPLE COMPANY FIRE SUPPORT EXECUTION MATRIX
2-16
FM 6-20-40
Ž
Ž
If FIST elements are responsible for initiatingspecific fires, the target number, group (gp),or series designation will be listed in the boxfor that FIST element. Specific guidelinesconcerning fires not included on the targetlist work sheet will be included in that box.
Each fire support coordinating measure to beplaced in ‘effect, followed by a worddesignated for that measure, will be shown inthe box. For airspace coordination areas(ACAs), the time the planned CAS or attackhelicopters are due on station is listed.
Ž Other factors that apply to a certain platoonduring a specific time frame may be includedin the appropriate box. General guidance isissued in the written portion of the OPORD.
Battalion-Level Matrix
At battalion level, the matrix is used asfollows:
Ž If priority of any indirect fire support means supportis allocated to a team, it is indicated by anabbreviation of that fire support asset in theupper left corner of the appropriate matrixbox.
Ž If an FPF has been allocated, the acronymFPF, preceded by the type of indirect fire
means responsible for firing that FPF, willappear in the center of the box.
Ž If a priority target is allocated to a team, itwill appear in the box as PRI TGT, precededby the means of fire support responsible forfiring on the target. Once a target isdetermined as the priority target, thecorresponding target number is placed in thebox.
Ž If a certain company FSO is responsible forinitiating specific fires, the target number,group, or series will be listed in the box forthat FSO. Specific guidelines concerning thefires not included on the target list work sheetwill be included in the box.
Ž If an ACA is to be put in effect by aparticular FSO, the acronym ACA, followedby the code word designated for that ACA,will be shown in the box. Also, the time theplanned CAS or attack helicopters are due inthe area (time on target [TOT]) is listed.
Ž Other factors that apply to a certain teamduring a specific time frame may also beincluded in the appropriate box. Generalguidance is issued in the written portion ofthe OPORD.
EXAMPLE BATTALION FIRE SUPPORT EXECUTION MATRIX
The illustration below shows an example of acompleted fire support execution matrix for adeliberate attack, in the assembly area, fieldartillery FPFs are allocated to Teams Tank andB, while Team C is allocated a mortar FPF.As the units depart the assembly area towardthe LD/LC, priority of FA fires is picked up bythe task force (TF) FSO. Group A4C and SeriesJOE are initiated in accordance with theguidance of the TF commander. Ifcommunication with the FSO is lost, unit SOPspecifies that the lead team may initiate thesefires. The allocation of priorities of fire from the
mortar sections remains the same (as shown inthe matrix).
As the TF crosses the LD/LC, Team Tank (stillIn the lead) assumes priority of FA fires and isresponsible for firing priority target Group A3C.Team B still has priority of Section B mortarswith a priority target, AC3008. Priority of firesfor Team C is from Section A mortars, with apriority target AC3010. Under TF control is theclose air support due in the area at 0800. TheTF FSO will place ACA ORANGE in effectbefore the aircraft attack on the target.
2-17
FM 6-20-40
EXAMPLE BATTALION FIRE SUPPORT EXECUTION MATRIX (CONTINUED)
When the lead element crosses Phase Line The TF FSO, with priority of FA fires, initiatesRED, Team B assumes priority of fires from Groups A7C, A8C and A9C, designed tomortar sections, with each mortar section suppress the objective. Also, CAS is due in atresponsible for a priority target. Priority for FA 0900 and the TF FSO will initiate ACA RAISINfires changes to Team C, and the field artillery as appropriate.is responsible for firing Group A6C. Onceagain, CAS is due in the area. This time, the Phase Line GREEN is the limit of advance;TOT is 0815 and the ACA is APPLE. however, at PL GREEN, priority of fires, FPFs,
and the responsibility to initiate certain firesAs the TF crosses PL BLUE and begins its final have been allocated (as shown on the matrix)assault on the objective, Team Tank, with to disrupt the enemy as he withdraws and topriority of mortar fires, initiates Series FINISH. protect the TF in case of a counterattack.
SAMPLE BATTALION FIRE SUPPORT EXECUTION MATRIX
Fire Support Coordination Ž Chemical officer.
Fire support coordination is the continuingprocess of implementing fire supportplanning and managing the fire supportassets that are available to a maneuverforce. The greatest fire support plan in theworld is worthless unless it is properlycoordinated with the appropriate personneland/or agencies. In short, coordinationmakes the plan happen. Key personnel withwhom coordination must be effected are asfollows:
Ž Higher FSE.
Ž Lower FSE.
Ž Direct support FA battalion TOC (usually doneat the brigade FS cell.)
Ž Adjacent unit FS cells
Ž Mortar platoon leader (battalion or company).
Ž Engineer representative.
Ž Air liaison officer.
Ž Naval gunfire liaison officer.
Ž Army aviation liaison officer.
Ž maneuver battalion S3 and S3 air.
Ž Air defense representative.
2-18
Ž MI representative.
Ž Military police (MP) representative.
Maneuver Commander Responsibilities
The maneuver commander sets the prioritiesfor positioning of units within his sector.Normally, the FA battalion S3 and the brigadeS3 coordinate positioning of an FA unit.However, the FSO may become involved byhelping the FA battalion S3. Coordination mayinclude –
• Locations of delivery units, radars, TOCs, and
Ž
trains.
• Movement routes
• Supply routes.
and times.
Priorities of positioning are as follows:
Ž
•
Ž
Ž
Direct support FA battalion.
Reinforcing battalions.
Divisional general support reinforcing (GSR)and general support (GS) units.
Corps units (GSR before GS).
Fire Support Officer Responsibilities
Specific FSO responsibilities for coordinationare as follows:
Ž Establish and maintain communications with
Ž
Ž
Ž
key personnel, to include adjacent units.
Prepare and disseminate fire supportdocuments, records, and reports.
Execute the fire support plan.
Supervise the target acquisition effort of theFS cell, and ensure that tje S2 is aware of theintelligence needs of the FS
Ž Keep higher and lower FSsupported forces situation.
cell.
cells informed of
FM 6-20-40
Ž Exchange battlefield information with thefield artillery and the supported force.
Ž Task the most effective fire support means toattack targets.
Coordinate all fire support in thecommander’s zone or sector.
Ž
Ž
Ž
Ensure the safeguarding of friendly elements.
Ensure continued flow of targetinginformation.
Anticipate changes dictated by the developingbattle, and recommend revision of the firesupport plan.
Ž Direct the fire support attack of targets in thepriority established by the commander.
Ž Generate fire support missions against targetsof interest.
Ž Override requests for fire, or direct thatanother system provide the requested firesupport as necessary.
Ž Coordinate with the ALO on the use ofTACAIR assets.
Clearance of Fires
The FSO at each echelon is vitally concernedthat all fire requests are quickly processed andthat all fires into his maneuver commander’szone are properly cleared.
Requests for Fire. Within brigades, requests forfire are approved by the FSO at each echelon.Usually, requests for FA fire are approved bythe task force (battalion) FSO. To expeditethese requests, silence by the monitoring FSOis considered consent. This consent essentiallyvalidates the use of the requested asset toengage the particular target. For fires withinthe zone of the requestor, no clearance orother coordination is necessary.
2-19
FM 6-20-40
C l e a r a n c e o f F i r e s . T h e m a n e u v e rcommander has the final authority toapprove (clear) fires and their effectswithin his zone. This is not the same asapproval of requests for fire support assetsas discussed above. Normally, a maneuvercommander de lega tes au thor i ty tocoordinate and clear fires within his zone(normally delineated by boundaries) to hisFSO. When fires or their effects will falloutside the zone of the requesting FSO,every effort must be made to coordinateand clear those fires with the commander
and/or FSO who owns the zone. Thisshould be done by the most expeditiousmeans available. This coordination may bebetween two adjacent company FSOs, or itmay be done by the battalion FSO. Thespirit of this coordination is to ensure thatall fires out of zone or across boundariesare properly cleared. However, if nopermissive coordinating measure exists, theinability to effect coordination should notprevent attack. This is especially true whenfriendly forces are under fire or when ahigh-payoff target is of fleeting nature.
EXAMPLES OF FIRE SUPPORT COORDINATION
Example 1. Request for fire by B/1-40 Inf onTarget AC0006 (monitored by 1-40 Inf FSO).
ŽŽ
Ž
Ž
In whose zone is the target? A/1-40 inf.Is coordination necessary? Yes, because it isoutside the B/1-40 Inf zone but stlill In thebattalion zone.Which FSE is responsible for the zone inwhich the target lies? 1-40 inf FSE.How may the 1-40 Inf FSO contact theA/1-40 Inf FIST? Options areas follows:
1-40 Inf FSO tails A/1-40 lnf FIST.
Use Iandline ((if Installed) from the battailonFSE to the A1 -40 Inf FIST.
Example 2. Request for fire by B/l-40 inf onTarget AC0001 (monitored by 1-40 Inf FSO).
Ž In whose zone is the target? 1st Bde.Ž Is coordination necessary? Yes, because it is
outside the zone of the requesting agency(B/1-40 Inf FIST).
Ž Which FSE is responsible for the zone inwhich the target lies? 1st Bde FSE.
Ž How may the 1-40 Inf FSO contact thebrigade FSE? Options areas follows:1-40 inf FSO calls 1st Bde FSO on thebrigade fire support net.1-40 lnf FSO calls 1st Bde FSO on the directsupport FA battalion fire net.
Use landline (if installed) from the battalionFSE to the brigade FSE.
Example 3. Request for fire by B/1-40 Inf onTarget AC0002 (monitored by 1-40 lnf FSO).
Ž In whose zone is the target? 2d Bale.Ž Is coordination necessary? Yes, because it is
outside the zone of the requesting agency(B/1-40 lnf).
Ž Which FSE is responsible for the zone inwhich the target lies? 2d Bde FSE.
Ž How may the 1-40 Inf FSO contact thebrigade FSE? Options are as fallows:
1-40 Inf FSO calls the 2d Bde FSO direct Onthe 2d Bde fire support net (if he has thefrequencies and call signs) (preferredmethod).1-40 Inf FSO calls the 1st Bde FSO on the 1stBde fire support net. The 1st Bde FSOcontacts the 2d Bde FSO by–- Calling the 1st Bde FSE on the 2d
Armored (armd) Division (div) fire supportnet.
- Calling the 2d Armd Div tactical FSE,which will in turn contact the 2d Bde FSE.
1-40 Inf FSO calls 2d Bde FSO by goingthrough the direct support FA battalion firenet, through 2d Armd Div Arty to the 2d Bdedirect support FA battalion, which contactsthe 2d Bde FSO.
2-20
FM 6-20-40
EXAMPLES OF FIRE SUPPORT COORDINATION (CONTINUED)
Example 4. Request for fire by 6/1-40 lnf onTarget AC0003 (monitored by 1-40 Inf FSO).
Ž In whose zone is the target? 2d Armd Div.Ž Is coordination necessary? Yes, because it is
outside the zone of the requesting agency(B/1-40 inf).
Ž Which FSE is responsible for the zone inwhich the target lies? 2d Armd Div tacticalFSE.
Ž How may the 1-40 Inf FSO contact the 2dArmd Div tactical FSE? Options are asfollows:
1-40 Iinf FSO calls the 2d Armd Div tacticalFSE (preferred method).1-40 Inf FSO calls the 1st Bde FSO on the 1stBde fire support net. The 1st Bde FSOcontacts the 2d Armd Div tactical FSE by–- Calling the 2d Armd Div tactical FSE direct
on the 2d Armd Div fire support net (if theFSO has the frequencies and call signs).
- Calling the adjacent FSO in the 2d ArmdDiv zone, who will call the 2d Armd Divtactical FSE (if the FSO has thefrequencies and call signs).
1-40 Inf FSO calls 2d Bde FSO (digitially) bygoing through the direct support FA battalionfire net, through 2d Armd Div Arty, through
SAMPLE SITUATION
the corps FA fire net, ultimately to the 2dArmd Div tactical FSE.
Example 5. Request for fire by B/l-40 Inf onTarget AC0004 (monitored by 1-40 Inf FSO).
Ž In whose zone is the target? 5th Corps.Ž Is coordination necessary? Yes, because it is
outside the zone of the requesting agency(B/1-40 Inf).
Ž Which FSE is responsible for the zone inwhich the target lies? 5th Corps FSE.
Ž How may the 1-40 Inf FSO contact the 5thCorps FSE? Options areas follows:
1-40 Inf FSO calls the 5th Corps tactical FSEdirect (preferred method).1-40 Inf FSO calls the 1st Bde FSO on the 1stBde fire support net. The 1st Bde FSO willcall the 2d Armd Div tactical FSE, which willcall the 5th Corps tactical FSE to getpermission to engage the target. The 1st BdeFSO contacts the 2d Armd Div tactical FSEby–- Calling the 2d Armd Div tactical FSE direct
on the 2d Armd Div fire support net (if theFSO has the frequencies and call signs).
- Calling the adjacent FSO in the 2d ArmdDiv zone, who will tail the 2d Armd Divtactical FSE (if the FSO has thefrequencies and call signs).
2-21
FM 6-20-40
Brigade Fire SupportCoordination Checklist
The brigade FSO must effect coordinationwith personnel as indicated below. He orthe FSCOORD may actually accomplish thecoordination.
COORDINATION REQUIRED BY THE BRIGADE FIRE SUPPORT OFFICER
POINT OFCOORDINATION
Brigade Commanderand S3
Brigade S2 andTargeting Officer
Division FS Cell
ACTION TO BE TAKEN
Determine –Ž Mission.Ž Scheme of maneuver.Ž Commander’s lntent.Ž Zone of action.Ž Future plans.Ž Which organizations have priorities of fire and when.Ž Established maneuver control measures.Ž Availability of fire support assets.
Recommend–Ž
ŽŽ
Ž
Ž
capabilities and limitations of fire support for the operation (can support versuscannot support the course of action).Fire support required beyond that currently available to the brigade.Employment of COLTs. Place COLTs forward in the area considered to be mostactive, on key terrain, and on avenues of approach. Consider employing COLTSwith scouts and reconnaissance elements.Preparation fires. Are they necessary or desired for the operation? Will series andgroups do the job?Fire support coordinating measures.
Determine the following from the IPB:Ž Known and suspected enemy locations.Ž Enemy order of battle.Ž Size, type, and strength of enemy force expected to be encountered.Ž Terrain analysis of mobility corridors.Ž Friendly reconnaissance and patrol activity.Ž All target acquistion and surveillance plans (organic and attached).
Provide–Ž Status of COLTs and AN/TPQ-36 radars.Ž List of priority targets.
Determine -Ž FA assets available and tactical missions.Ž CAS allocations.Ž Division-level fire support coordinating measures likely to be in effect.
Request additional assets as necessary to support the operation.Provide brigade-level fire support coordinating measures Iikely to be in effect.
2-22
FM 6-20-40
COORDINATION REQUIRED BY THE BRIGADE FIRE SUPPORT OFFICER(CONTINUED)
POINT OFCOORDINATION
Direct SupportBattalion S3
Battalion FSOs
ACTION TO BE TAKEN
Determine –Ž Locations of units.Ž Proposed locations.Ž Ammunition status.Ž FA commander's intent for support of the plan.Ž Unit weapons status.
Provide a thorough briefing on the operation to allow adequate planning.
Determine –Ž Final protective fires. Request additional support as necessary.Ž Fire support coordinating measures recommended.Ž Alternate radio nets to be used In case of jamming.Ž Fires requiring positive control. Normally, these include illumination and will vary
from mission to mission. Know who has control, the conditions under which thefires are employed, and how they are to be controlled.
Provide the target list, fire support execution matrix, and schedules that support theoperation.
In addition to coordination listed above, during this command group to execute fire support.the operation, the FSCOORD or brigade FSOmust do the following:
Ž Implement on-order fire support coordinatingmeasures.
Ž Monitor the status of the maneuver battalions.Be prepared to shift priorities of fire and/or torequest additional support from division.
Ž Ensure a timely flow of targeting and battlefieldinformation to battalion FS cells and the DSbattalion.
Ž Monitor COLTs as appropriate.
Ž Prepare for contingency operations.
Spilt Command PostOperations
The maneuver commander may temporarilycommand from a tactical (tac) command post.He will take key personnel forward to form acommand group. The FSO should be part of
The fire support sergeant and/or targetingofficer should remain at the main commandpost to plan, coordinate, and execute firesupport. Effective communications must beestablished to link fire support personnel whohave gone forward with those at the main CP.
Before moving forward with his command group,the FSO will ensure that the duties of the FSOand the FS cell are clearly understood by thosewho are to remain at the main CP. The FSOmust also ensure that the FS cell membersunderstand the maneuver unit scheme ofmaneuver and the current fire support plan.Communications nets and contingencies forbreaks in contact should also be determined andfully understood. In addition, the FSO willdetermine what information he wants the FS cellto forward to him and will issue instructions forhandling the data that he relays. If possible, theFSO informs the FS cell of the duration of thesplit CP (whether for a set period of time or forthe duration of the operation).
2-23
FM 6-20-40
The portion of the FS cell that remains at themain CP is primarily concerned with theplanning and coordination of fire plans. Inaddition, the FS cell keeps the FSO informed ofthe assets available, ammunition status (if it mayaffect the operation), guidance from higherheadquarters, and other pertinent information towhich the FSO does not have access.
From his forward position, the FSO willdictate to the FS cell instructions based on thecommander’s guidance and knowledge of thechanging tactical situation. For example,fragmentary (frag) orders and warning ordersissued by the commander may cause the FSOto direct reallocation of fire support or TAassets.
2-24
FM 6-20-40
CHAPTER 3
THE "HOW" OF FIRE SUPPORT PLANNING
Section I. INTRODUCTION
GeneralThe goal of fire support planning is to know themaneuver commander’s guidance, intent, andscheme of maneuver and to coordinate fire supportassets to support the operation. This chapter offersconsiderations to use in planning offensive anddefensive operations. It does not address thecommander’s intent or factors of METT-T.Therefore, each FSO from company throughbrigade must add those two items to theconsiderations to adequately plan and coordinatefire support for an operation. The product of firesupport planning is the fire support plan, a keycomponent of the commander’s operation plan. Theplan must be simple flexible, and descriptive. Itmust support the scheme of maneuver and thecommander’s intent.
Maneuver Tactics andFire Support
In the process of integrating fire support intoopperations, the most important considerations areadequacy, flexibility, and continuity. The FSOensures that these primary considerations areobserved by carefully weighing the fire support tasksrequired for each maneuver operation.
OffenseThe primary purpose of the offense is to destroythe enemy. The fire support tasks associated withoffensive operations are as follows:Ž Provide responsive fires to maneuver.
Ž Attack deep targets with massed indirect firesand TACAIR.
Ž Use aggressive counterfire.
Before the attack, soften enemy defenses byattacking–
Ž Indirect fire systems.Ž Reserves and commandŽ Logistical centers.
Ž Assembly areas.
and control facilities.
Ž Communication centers.Ž Frontline troops.
During the attack, provide support by using allavailable fire support (including TACAIR) todestroy, neutralize, or suppress high-payofftargets that could slow or react to the attack.
During consolidation, plan fires (includingTACAIR)–Ž To protect friendly units as they reorganize.Ž To break up enemy counterattacks.
Ž To prevent enemy reinforcement,disengagement, or resupply.
DefenseThe primary purpose of the defense is to defeat anenemy attack and destroy enemy forces. Otherobjectives may be to retain a piece of terrain, to gaintime, to concenrate elsewhere, and to wear the enemydown before offensive operations. The main firesupport tasks to support the defense are as follows:Ž Integrate indirect and direct fires in support of
the operation.Ž Disorganize, delay, and weaken the enemy
before the attack begins.Ž Strip away enemy AD and reconnaissance
(recon) elements.Ž Strike the enemy as he attacks.Ž Deny the enemy avenues of approach.Ž Canalize the enemy.Ž Suppress the enemy fire support system.
3-1
FM 6-20-40
Section II. FIRE SUPPORT PLANNING FOR THE OFFENSE
Offensive OperationsThe primary purpose of an offensive operation is todestroy the enemy. Critical to the success ofoffensive operations are gaining and retaining theinitiative and forcing the enemy to tight and react ata time and place not of his choosing. This sectiondescribes fire support considerations for thefollowing offensive operations and techniques:ŽŽŽŽŽ
Movement to contact.Hasty attack.Deliberate attack.Exploitation.Pursuit.
Movement to Contact
Descriptionmovement to contact is an offensive operationA
designed to gain initial ground contact with theenemy or to regain lost contact. It is used todevelop the situation early to provide an advantagebefore decisive engagement. The primaryconsideration in preparing for a movement tocontact is anticipating enemy actions during themovement. Such anticipation provides for friendlydeployment in a manner that affords the greatestpossible security to the main body while facilitatingquick strong reaction when the contact is made.
Fire Support ConsiderationsImmediately responsive fires are provided initially tothe lead element and then to the lead company ascontact develops. Responsive tires are providedby-Ž Assignment of priorities of fire.
Ž Allocation of priority targets to the companyand/or team performing a mission requiringresponsiveness.
Ž Responsive repositioning of firing batteries bythe artillery S3 as the movement to contactprogresses.
Ž Effective positioning by forward observersand/or COLTs.
Ž Integration of additional assets, such as theimmediate response of mortars on contactwith the enemy.
Responsive fires are also provided by effectiveassignment of forward observers to the availablecommunications nets. Assignment can give specificobservers priority of response. The quick fire netand the exclusive net are options. They do notprevent the firing unit from answering calls for firefrom other than the specific observer.Ž A quick fire net (voice) authorizes direct
association of an observer with a selectedweapon system (normally field artillery).Although the designated observer is not theonly observer on the net, he has the highestpriority for calls for fire. In a voice net, the netcontrol station (NCS) (normally the FDC) willrestrict all other net traffic immediately onreceiving a request for fire from the priorityobserver. In a quick fire net (digital), thedesignated observer maybe given priority in thetactical fire direction system (TACFIRE) or theobserver may be allowed to communicatedirectly with a designated battery computersystem (BCS). (See TC 6-40A.)
NOTE: In either digital case, the operators mustdiligently and continuously review input queues toensure immediate actioning of the priority call forfire.
Ž An exclusive net is a fire direction net to bedesignated (as a field expedient) for exclusiveuse for a limited period of time by the observerand the appropriate FDC. No other subscriberwill enter the net except in an emergency. Thisprocedure will be used only for specialsituations. The commander, considering thefactors of METT-T, must determine thatabsolute responsiveness to a specific unit ismandatory. This procedure requires frequencies
3-2
FM 6-20-40
and radio equipment that are normally notreadily available. For example, the FDC maynot be able to monitor a normally required netfor the limited period of time designated, but itwill always monitor its normal fire direction net.
On the basis of the commander’s guidance,schedule fires on deep targets with massed firesand TACAIR. Plan fires on and around reservesand logistics sites to hinder their movement ontothe battlefield. Plan fires on flanks to protect theflanks and to reduce the number of maneuverforces committed to the flanks.
Plan fires on the terrain to be traversed and on theflanks to protect the force. As maneuver forcesmove, fire immediate suppression missions to helpthe maneuver forces get within range of the enemydirect fire weapon systems. Fire immediate smoketo obscure OPs, screen friendly movement, and helpmaneuver forces breach obstacles. COLTs may bepositioned forward near the advance guard in anoverwatch position (pm) to provide responsive fireswhen contact is made. Once contact with the enemyis made, the FSO must be prepared for either ahasty attack or a defense.
Place coordinated fire lines (CFLs) well forwardof friendly maneuver forces. Plan on-order (O/O)CFLs on phase lines so that CFLs can be quicklylifted and shifted.
Hasty Attack
Description
The main goal of a hasty attack is to seize theinitiative. A hasty attack is usually conductedafter a movement to contact, during acounterattack, or when unexpected enemycontact is made. The commander attacks quicklyfrom his existing dispositions to gain the upperhand or to keep the enemy from organizingresistance. Planning time is extremely limited.
Fire Support ConsiderationsDevelop fire plans to concentrate fires onforward enemy elements. If time permits, use
quick fire planning techniques to plan fires. Firesshould be massed on the forward units and arecontinuous until the final coordination line iscrossed or as directed by the commander.
Suppress direct fire weapon systems to allow friendlymaneuver forces to get within range of the enemydirect fire weapon systems for engagement.
Use screening smoke to provide an artificialcamouflage for friendly forces moving to theenemy. Use obscuring smoke to obscureenemy OPs and direct fire weapon systems.
Isolate the enemy force being attacked by the use ofdeep fires. FASCAM may be used around enemyreinforcements and logistic sites and on approachesleading into the immediate battle area Dual-purposeimproved conventional munitions (DPICM) may beused to inflict damage on soft-skinned vehicles inassembly areas and logistic sites.
Deliberate Attack
Description
A deliberate attack is characterized by thoroughdetailed planning, rapid concentration of forces,timely exploitation of enemy weaknesses, violentexecution, and positive aggressive leadership atall echelons of command. It involves overcomingstrong enemy forces in established positions andis undertaken after thorough reconnaissanceacquisition and development of targets, andanalysis of all other factors affecting the situation.
Fire Support ConsiderationsDuring the attack, provide immediately responsivefires to the lead company by assigning priority of firesupport. COLTS may be placed forward onprominent terrain to engage targets early.
Throughout the operation, plan for the attackof deep targets to block movements ofreserves and follow-on forces into the close-inbattle area. Plan FASCAM to limit enemymovement but not to interfere with friendlymaneuver. As targets are acquired, forward
3-3
FM 6-20-40
them to the higher FS cell for engagement, ifnecessary. The brigade FSO will inform the FScell of the current FLOT and radiationexposure state (RES) status to expedite theemployment of a division nuclear subpackageto support deliberate attack. Additionalnuclear considerations are in Appendix H.
Plan fires to support maneuver phases of theoperation. When determining the number oftargets to be planned, balance the need forfires with the reality of time and resourcesavailable. Plan groups and series to supportthe movement. Plan fires –
Ž On the flanks to protect the force.
Ž On the way to the objective to engage enemyOPs, enemy direct fire systems, and enemyelements that might be bypassed.
Ž To screen friendly movement and supportminefield breaching.
Ž On the objective to suppress, neutralize, anddestroy targets.
Ž Beyond the objective to preventcounterattacks, help consolidate the objective,and prevent reinforcement of the objectivearea by the enemy.
Support consolidation on the objective. Planfires to prevent reinforcement of the enemyon the objective (obj) and to defeat enemycounterattacks (groups, series, designatedpriority targets, and FPFs). Plan for a hastyattack or defense.
Preparation fires may be planned anddelivered.
To deceive the enemy into thinking an attackis taking place elsewhere, plan and deliverfires in support of the deception plan. Thesemay be massed fires and smoke deliveredbefore the attack begins on forward enemyelements not in the main attack.
3-4
FM 6-20-40
Plan CFLs well forward to keep the maneuverforces from outrunning the CFLs and to givethe forces enough room in which to move.Additionally, the brigade FSO must useon-order CFLs to rapidly place new CFLs ineffect.
Plan suppressive fires on enemy overwatchingdirect fire systems to help maneuver direct firesystems engage the enemy systems. Plan smoketo screen movement, obscure enemy OPs, andhelp in breaching operations.
Plan massed fires at breakthrough points tocreate holes in enemy defenses. Also, planheavy suppressive fires on the other side of theintended breakthrough.
Plan for a hasty defense.
EXAMPLE OF PLANNING A DELlBERATE ATTACK
The 1st Bde commander received the mission toconduct a deliberate attack from the divisioncommander, While at the division CP, the brigadecommander and FSCOORD were briefed on firesupport for the operation. Fire support assetsallocated to the brigade are described below.
FA missions
2-78 FA (155, SP): DS 1st Bde
3-17 FA (155, SP): GSR 2-78 FA
Status
2-78 FA: 89 percent personnel strength, 16 howitzersoperational
3-17 FA: 92 percent personnel strength, 17 howitzersoperational
Required supply rate (RSR)
2-78 FA: 240 rounds per tube per day
3-17 FA: 230 rounds per tube per day
Controlled supply rate
The CSR for 1st Bde for the next 24 hours is asfollows:
Munitions
H E
DPICM
Smoke
Copperhead
Area denial artillerymunition (ADAM)
Remote antiarmor minesystem (RAAMS)
Illuminating (illum)
107 mm
6 0
20
15
155 mm
3 5
150
10
16
4
8
17
3-5
FM 6-20-40
EXAMPLE OF PLANNING A DELlBERATE ATTACK (CONTINUED)
TACAIR missions
Number
2
2
2
Type
A-10
F-16
A-7
The brigademissions:
Available
0530 to 1030
0830 to 1230
1030 to 1430
is allocated the following TACAIR
Mission Remarks
CAS Ground alert
CAS Ground alert
CAS Ground alert
No corps or division fire support coordinatingmeasures are in effect.
Short-duration FASCAM is under the control of thedivision commander. Long-duration FASCAM is keptunder the control of the corps commander. There areenough mine munitions for the DS battalion toprovide one 400- by 400-meter, short-duration,high-density RAAMS minefield, if approved by division.No division preparation (prep) fires are planned;brigades may plan their own, if required.
Target Iist
The division FS cell has complied the division targetlist. Targets (extracted from TACFIRE) located in thebrigade sector or affecting the brigade mission areas follows:
Line Number Target Number Description Agency Remarks
38 AA0072 Mortar position Air reconnaissance Counterfire program
39 AA0073 Howitzer battery Air reconnaissance Counterfire program
40 AA0076 Mortar position Air reconnaissance Counterfire program
The brigade commander’s initial planning guidance is "I want a prep to start the battle to surprise theas follows: enemy. I don't think he can recover in time to
a di f ference. As my battal ions move to"The brigade will attack at 0600 tomorrow (16 hours the objective, I want smoke. Because of thefrom now). Division has assigned intermediate and open terrain, I want to ensure that enemyfind objectives for us to take. As it looks, the 1-50 ant i tank weapons are k i l led or at leastMech zone is going to be the area of greatest suppressed as soon as possible by artillery andresistance. We’ve got to take those objectives quickly. mortars."
3-6
FM 6-20-40
EXAMPLE OF PLANNING A DELlBERATE ATTACK (CONTINUED)
3-7
FM 6-20-40
EXAMPLE OF PLANNING A DELlBERATE ATTACK (CONTINUED)
The brigade S2 makes his analysis and determinesthe enemy strength within the brigade sector to beapproximately 70 percent. He also determines thatthe most Iikely course of action is for the enemy todefend tenaclously in the brigade sector. The enemyhas had several days to prepare positions, and he isdug in with overhead cover in many places.
The weather is favorable for the attack. The groundis solid and provides good avenues of approach intothe area. The open terrain gives the enemy goodfields of fire.
The brigade S3 reviews the division OPORD andguidance given by the brigade commander. Afterreviewing the information provided by the S2, the S3recommends the boundaries as shown in thebrigade offensive diagram. The brigade wiII attackwith two battalions on Iine and a third battalion inreserve.
From the brigade commander’s briefing and firesupport planning guidance, the brigade FSOdetermines the following information:
Ž The brigade will be attacking with two battalions onIine. Available fire support assets will be spread thin.Therefore, the FSO must prepare to forward targetsto the division for engagement, if required.
Ž Priority of fire (POF) should be to the 1-50 Mach.
Ž Suppressive fires on antitank guided missiles(ATGMs) and counterfire are critical to the operation.
Ž A need for smoke, beyond that normally carried byFA battalions, exists. Currently the DS artillerybattalion can provide about 10 minutes of smoke.The FSO notifies the FA battalion of the additionalammunition requirement. Also, he notifies the S3and engineer representative of this shortage so thatother smoke sources can be used (such as smokepots, mortars, and tanks).
After evacuating the brigade commander’s guidanceand the resources available, the brigade FSO makesthe following recommendations to the brigadecommander:
“Sir, ammunition poses a problem in the support ofthe prep. With our Iimited CSR, I recommend thatwe do not fire a prep. Instead, I recommend that we
fire groups of targets and a counterfire program tosupport the operation. Also, I recommend that weonly suppress targets instead of destroying them,which would require considerably more ammunition.We just need to keep the enemy’s head down longenough for the battalions to get within direct firerange. Further, I recommend that we plan to usetwo of the allocated CAS missions, the F-16s andthe A-7s, on the final objectives to prevent theenemy from reinforcing the intermediate objectives.
"With our most difficult sector being that of the 1-50Mech, I recommend giving it priority of fire.
“I recommend that we have an initial CFL on PLDEBBIE with an on-order CFL on PL GREG.”
The brigade FSO also reviews the target list with thebrigade commander.
After being briefed by the rest of his staff, thebrigade commander approves the brigade S3’sscheme of maneuver. He calls his battalioncommanders together at his CP to issue theoperation order:
“The brigade will attack at 0600 with two battalions,1-50 Mech and 3-37 Mech, abreast to seizeIntermediate Objectives MARK and PETE and, onorder, continue the attack to seize Objectives BILLand JOHN. The 2-50 Mech will be the brigadereserve, On order, it will pass through 1-50 Mechand continue the attack.
“Within each battalion zone is a motorized riflebattalion. Each battalion has had several days toprepare its positions. The strength of the motorizedrifle regiment is much less than ours (70 percentcompared to our 92 percent). However, I expecttaking the positions to be difficult, as they are welldug in with obstacles. The strongest resistance willbe in the 1-50 Mech zone. I want the priority of firesupport to go to that battalion.
‘Terrain poses no significant problems, although it isconstricting in some places. Our movement is nothindered by weather, urban terrain, or soft ground.Throughout the sector, the enemy has open fields offire and can engage our systems before we get inrange. Therefore, I want to seize those objectivesquickly.
3-8
FM 6-20-40
EXAMPLE OF PLANNING A DELlBERATE ATTACK (CONTINUED)
"If all goes as planned, the operation should lastless than a day. Although we’re only a supportingattack for the division attack, our failure to securethose objectives could jeopardize the divisionmission."
After the brigade commander’s briefing, the brigadeFSO briefs the brigade fire support plan:
“When the attack starts, both battalions will have 100percent of their basic load. Direct support FA smokeis limited to 10 minutes total; therefore, other sourcesof smoke must be used.
“Neither the division nor the brigade will fire a prep.However, I have planned groups of targets (Al C andA2C on Objective MARK A3C and A4C on ObjectiveBILL) and a counterfire program to support theoperation.
"The 1-50 Mech is allocated two platoon prioritytargets as long as it has priority of fire. The 3-37Mech will have one platoon priority target.
“The brigade has been allocated three CASmissions (six sorties) for the day. The sorties will beon ground alert and available during these timeperiods: 0530 to 1030, 0830 to 1230, and 1030 to1430.
Line Number
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
41
42
Target Number Description
AC0016
AC0017
AC0018
AC0019
AC0020
AC0021
AC0022
AC0023
AC0024
AC0025
AC0026
Squad pos
Squad pos
Squad pos
Squad pos
Squad pos
Squad pos
Squad pos
Pit pos
Squad pos
suspected OP
Road junction
"The 1-50 Mech will receive two CAS missions foruse on Objective BILL. The other mission will remainunder brigade control. Remember to plan forengagement of planned CAS targets by alternatemeans if CAS is diverted or unavailable.
"Two COLTS will be allocated to the 1-50 Mech. Thethird COLT will go to the 3-37 Mech. The two COLTS,priority of fires, and two priority targets of the 1-50Mech will be given to the 2-50 Mech, if that unit Iscommitted.
“Fire support coordinating measures consist of abrigade CFL initiaily on PL DEBBIE and an on-orderCFL on PL GREG.”
The FSO then briefs the allocation of fire supportassets and the fire support plan for the 3-37 Mechattack.
The brigade FSO prepares his target list by initiallyreviewing the artillery target intelligence (ATI) file. Hethen tails the division FS cell and specifies the typesof targets he needs for his plan – enemy maneuverforces located on the objectives and any deeptargets within range of fire support assets available tothe brigade not already planned for engagement bythe division. Listed below is that part of the target listaffecting the 1-50 Mech (the focus of the example)with tentative schedules.
Agency Remarks
Air reconnaissance Group A1C
Air reconnaissance Group A1C
Air reconnaissance Group A2C
Air reconnaissance Group A2C
Air reconnaissance Group A3C
Air reconnaissance Group A3C
Air reconnaissance Group A4C
GSR Group A4C
GSR Group A4C
3-9
FM 6-20-40
EXAMPLE OF PLANNING A DELlBERATE ATTACK (CONTINUED)
The brigade FSO selects Targets AC0077,AC0078, and AC0080, located in the brigaderear area, for the purpose of supporting thebrigade support area. This target list issubmitted to the forward support battalioncommander. The target list is also submittedto the battalion FS cells, as combat trainsfrom the maneuver battalions will use theroads around the BSA.
After the briefing, the commander of the 1-50Mech returns to the battalion CP. The battalioncommander issues to the staff his initialplanning guidance, which is the mission hereceived from the brigade commander.
The 1-50 Mech S3 divides Objective MARKinto Objectives RUBY, EMERALD, and TOPAZ.He further divides the brigade Objective BILLinto Objectives DIAMOND, COOKE, andSTONE. The S3, FSO, and other members ofthe FS cell begin formulating their courses ofaction.
The 1-50 Mech commander gives the battalionFSO the following guidance:
“We need to be able to get to both theintermediate and final objectives quickly. Keepthe enemy heads down while we are out inthe open.
“We’re going to have some real problemstaking and retaining those intermediateobjectives if the enemy on the final objectivesmoves to support the intermediate objectives.You need to stop the reinforcement if thoseenemy forces try to move.”
The battalion FSO determines that fire supportmust do the following:
Ž it must at least suppress the enemy forces on thefinal objective.
Ž It must prevent these enemy forces fromreinforcing an intermediate objective if they try todo so.
The battalion FSO reviews the brigade firesupport plan and extracts the pertinentinformation (allocation of fire support assets,the CSR, fire support coordinating measures,and special instruct ions concerning theemployment of those assets). From that, theS3, FSO, and other members of the FS cellwork together to determine the requirementsfor fire support to support the operation.
The battalion FSO reviews the brigade targetlist by plotting the targets that support thebattalion operation. He also determines howmany battalion-generated targets will berequired.
3-10
FM 6-20-40
EXAMPLE OF PLANNING A DELlBERATE ATTACK (CONTINUED)
3-11
FM 6-20-40
EXAMPLE OF PLANNING A DELlBERATE ATTACK (CONTINUED)
3-12
FM 6-20-40
EXAMPLE OF PLANNING A DELlBERATE ATTACK (CONTINUED)
Using available target acquisition assets, the battalionFSO-plans the following targets:
Line Number Target Number Description Agency Remarks
29 AC2041 Pit pos GSR Group A1C
30 AC2042 Pit pos GSR Group A1C
All targets will be fired with DPICM. If possible, After being presented with possible courses of actionplanned CAS will be delivered simultaneously on by his staff, the battalion commander makes hisObjectives COOKE and STONE between 1030 and decision. He then briefs his company commanders1230. If the two missions are not used by 1230 and and FSOs on his concept of operation and intent.1430 respectively, they will be lost and alternate fires The battalion commander’s guidance to the companywill have to be used. commanders is as follows:
3-13
FM 6-20-40
EXAMPLE OF PLANNING A DELlBERATE ATTACK (CONTINUED)
"The battalion will attack at 0600 tomorrow (11 hoursfrom now) with three companies abreast to seizeIntermediate Objectives RUBY, EMERALD, andTOPAZ. On order, the battalion will attack to seizefinal Objectives DIAMOND, COOKE, and STONE. Iwant to move to those objectives quickly. Also, Iwant Company A to be prepared to help Company Bin taking Objective EMERALD by moving along AxisGRAVEL to flank Objective EMERALD after takingObjective RUBY.
“The objectives in the Company B sector are goingto be the most difficult to take. The largest enemyforce and best prepared defenses in the battalionsector are located around Objective EMERALD.Additionally, the enemy forces on the objectives canprovide mutual support, Objective RUBY is the onlyobjective we have that cannot be supported byenemy forces from other positions. I am concernedthat the forces on Objective COOKE will move tosupport either EMERALD or TOPAZ.
“Before the attack on the primary objectives, I wantsmoke fired in front of Objectives COOKE andSTONE. Without a screen, the enemy will be able toengage us long before we get in range. I want thepriority of fires to go to Company B. If we move tothe intermediate objectives slowly, the enemy is likelyto move forward to support the intermediateobjectives. There is a possibility that enemy forceswill be shifted to the Company A sector as we try totake Objective RUBY. Therefore, I want on-orderpriorities of fire to Company A.
"The 2-50 Mech is the brigade reserve. It has anon-order mission of passing through our sector andcontinuing the attack.”
The battalion FSO briefs the company FSOs on thebattalion fire support plan as follows:
“Company B will have the priority of fires. CompanyA will have on-order priority of fire. With the assetsavailable, company FSOs should develop fire plansthat provide suppressive fires to support theoperation. Field artillery smoke will be needed to helpthe maneuver forces get to the primary objectives.Since FA smoke is Iimited, plan on using mortarsmoke on the intermediate objectives. I have plannedtwo CAS missionsSTONE. The aircraft
3-14
on Objectives COOKE andare on ground alert and are
available 0830 to 1230 and 1030 to 1430,respectively. Plan an alternate engagement means onCOOKE and STONE if the CAS missions aren’t usedduring these periods or are otherwise unavailable.
“We are allocated two priority targets from brigade,These will go to Company B. A mortar priority targetgoes to Company A.
“I will position both COLTS throughout the operation.The COLTS will be behind the LD/LC initially. On myorder, one COLT will move to the first hill mass (justacross the LD/LC) in the middle of the Company Bzone. That COLT will provide observation of thehigh-speed avenue of approach and provideoverwatch while the second COLT and Company Bmove forward. When the first COLT is in position, thesecond COLT will move forward on my order behindCompany A to Objective RUBY and position toobserve the high-speed avenues into the battalionzone. When Company B consolidates on ObjectiveEMERALD, the first COLT will move forward to aposition on Objective EMERALD to complement theother COLT overwatch of the high-speed avenues ofapproach into our zone and support the attack of theprimary objectives. On brigade order, the COLTS willchop to the 2-50 Mech.
“If Company A attacks along Axis GRAVEL, I willclear all indirect fires into the Company B sector.
“Should either forward company FSO not be able tofire on a target or take a required action from the firesupport execution matrix, I will automatically do it. Itis critical that company FSOs coordinate early andcomprehensively for mutual support”
Fire support coordinating measures are disseminated,as are the organization for combat, fire support assetstatus, CSR, and target lists.
Each company FSO returns to his company CP andreviews the target list and schedules sent by thebattalion FSO.
Using acquisition assets available, the commanderdesignates targets for engagement on the objective(to suppress it as his forces move toward it). Toprotect his force from observation, the commanderdesires fires to suppress an OP and screen themovement of his force.
FM 6-20-40
EXAMPLE OF PLANNING A DELlBERATE ATTACK (CONTINUED)
Company A forwards the following additional targetsto the battalion:
Line Number Target Number Description
02 AC2201 Pit pos
03 AC2202 OP
04 AC2203 Road
The Company B commander and FSO formulatetheir plan for the operation. They review targetlists and determine that Groups A2C and A4Csupport the operation. The commander and FSOplan fires on the OP and smoke targets tofacilitate the movement to the Intermediate andfinal objectives.
Company B forwards the following additional targetsto the battalion:
Line Number Target Number Description
01 AC2300 Squad pos
30 AC2301 Pit pos
31 AC2302 OP
32 AC2303 Suspected OP
33 AC2304 Forward pos
40 AC2311 Pit pos
The Company C commander and FSO formulatetheir plan for the operation. They review targetlists and determine that Group AlC supports theoperation. They add only three targets – twotargets to screen the company movement withsmoke and one target on the OP. Company Cforwards these addit ional targets to thebattalion:
Line Number Target Number Description
01 AC2441 OP
02 AC2444 Road
03 AC2445 Pit pos
Agency
Scouts
3d Pit
Company FSO
Agency
Scouts
Scouts
FO
Company FSO
Company FSO
Scouts
Agency
1st Pit FO
Company FSO
Company FSO
Remarks
DPICM
DPICM
Smoke
Remarks
Group A2C
Group A2C
Smoke
Smoke
Group A2C
Remarks
DPICM
Smoke
Smoke
3-15
FM 6-20-40
EXAMPLE OF PLANNING A DELlBERATE ATTACK (CONTINUED)
The battalion FSO plots all targets, resolves target approves the schedules. He resolves any targetduplications, and notifies affected company FSOs, duplications, ensures the affected battalion FSOsThe battalion FSO notifies the brigade FSO that the are notified of changes, and identifies possiblefire plan is complete. conflicts over the use of the Iimited fire support
assets. He checks the status of the fire supportThe brigade FSO reviews the target lists to assets to see if ammunition and deliveryensure they support the brigade mission and systems are available to support the operation.
Exploitation
Description
Exploitation is an offensive operation thatfollows a successful attack to take advantage ofweakened or collapsed enemy defenses. Itspurpose is to prevent reconstitution of enemydefenses, to prevent enemy withdrawal, to securedeep objectives and to destroy enemy forces. Anexploitation is conducted with two forces, thedirect pressure force and the follow-and-supportforce.
The follow-and-support units clear the overrunarea of pockets of resistance and expand thezone of exploitation. Follow-and-support unitsare assigned missions to help exploiting forces byrelieving them of tasks that would slow theiradvance, such as preventing the enemy fromclosing a gap in a penetration and securing keyterrain gained during a penetration orenvelopment. As the exploiting brigade advancesfarther into the enemy rear areas, thefollow-and-support units secure lines ofcommunication and supply, support theexploiting elements of the brigade, destroypockets of bypassed enemy, and expand the areaof exploitation from the brigade axis.
Depending on the situation and its taskorganization, the brigade can exploit its ownsuccess. It can be used as an exploiting force fora higher echelon or it can follow and supportanother exploiting force. Subordinate battalionsnormally maneuver as in a movement to contact.
Fire Support ConsiderationsThe FSO must be prepared to provide flexiblefire support to both the direct pressure force andthe follow-and-support force. On-order prioritiesof fire must be designated to rapidly shiftpriorities to units within the direct pressure forceand/or to the follow-and-support force ifnecessary. Fire planning must be flexible. It mustencompass fires not only in front of the force(on choke points and to canalize the enemy) butalso to the flanks and rear. COLTS must beemployed to support the force as a whole. Quickfire planning techniques may be necessary toprovide responsive support planning. As theenemy force retreats, it will be necessary to slowit down for the encircling force to catch up. Also,it will be necessary to prevent the enemy fromreinforcing the retreating force either logisticallyor with combat personnel. Plan massed fires onenemy choke points and key terrain to canalize,slow, and block the enemy movement. Multiplelaunch rocket system (MLRS) fires and DPICMare suitable for slowing down targets. FASCAMmay be employed on escape routes. TACAIR onground alert and attack helicopters employed ina fire support role can provide rapid engagementof hard or mobile targets and can providemassed fires for area targets. Smoke may beused to slow and disrupt the retreat. Fixbypassed pockets of resistance until follow-onforces can engage. Use suppressive fires. DPICMis suitable for slowing down vehicles and fixingthe force.
Plan for hasty attack.
3-16
FM 6-20-40
Plan CFLsso they can
well forward, Use on-order CFLsbe quickly emplaced and moved.
Pursuit
Description
If i t becomes apparent that enemyresistance has broken down entirely, eitheran attack or an exploitation may give wayto pursuit. The pursuit is ordered when theenemy can no longer maintain his positionand tries to escape. The commander exertsunrelenting pressure to keep the enemyfrom reorganizing and preparing defenses.A direct pressure force places pressure onthe enemy while another highly mobileencircling force cuts the enemy retreat tointercept and destroy him. Hasty attacksm a y t a k e p l a c e w i t h l i t t l e o r n opreparation.
The mission of a direct pressure force is toprevent enemy d isengagement andsubsequent reconstitution of the defenseand to inflict maximum casualties. Leadelements move rapidly along all availableroads to contain or bypass small enemyp o c k e t s , w h i c h a r e r e d u c e d b yfollow-and-support forces. At everyopportunity, the direct pressure forceenvelops, cuts off, and destroys enemyelements if such actions do not interferewith its primary mission. The enemy is notallowed to break contact.
The mission of the encircling force is toget behind the enemy and block his escapeso that he can be destroyed between thedirect pressure and encircling forces.
Fire Support ConsiderationsResponsive fire support must be providedto both the directforces. Priorities offor both forces.
pressure and encirclingfires may be designatedBecause of distance
considerations, the encircling force may getpriority of field artillery, while the directpressure force gets priority of the mortars.The decision to assign priorities of fire toone force or both forces at the same timewill depend on the tactical situation.COLTS may be positioned to support bothforces. As the enemy retreats, it will benecessary to slow him down for theencircling force to catch up. Also, it will benecessary to keep the enemy fromreinforcing the retreating force, eitherlogistically or with combat personnel. Planmassed fires on enemy choke points andkey terrain to canalize, slow, and block theenemy movement. MLRS fires and DPICMare suitable for slowing targets. FASCAMmay be employed on escape routes and toslow the retreat and prevent reinforcement.TACAIR and attack helicopters employedin a fire support role can attack hardtargets. Smoke may be used to slow anddisrupt the retreat.
Air support must be responsive to theneeds of the force to effectively slow theretreat of the enemy. Air or ground alertmay be necessary to provide the degree ofresponsiveness required. Also, ALOs,E T A C s , a n d / o r A F A C s s h o u l d b epositioned forward to respond in a timelymanner.
Fix bypassed pockets of resistance untilfollow-on forces can engage. DPICMdelivered on vehicles may significantlyreduce the enemy movement. Suppressivefires may be delivered to hinder themovement of bypassed forces.
Both direct pressure and encircling forces mustplan for hasty attack.
Place CFLs well forward. Use on-order CFLsso they can be quickly shifted and lifted, Plana restrictive fire line (RFL) betweenconverging forces.
3-17
FM 6-20-40
Section III. FIRE SUPPORT PLANNING FOR THE DEFENSE
Purpose of Defensive OperationsThe purpose of any defense is to destroy theenemy, gain time, concentrate forces, or slow orweaken the enemy before the conduct ofoffensive operations. Friendly forces must retainthe initiative to keep the enemy off-balance. Thekey to this type of defense is depth. Fire supportconsiderations discussed in this section apply toany type of defensive operation.
Fire Support Considerations
Attack the Enemy Deep
Fires will always be planned to attack theenemy before he reaches the main battle area(MBA), These fires are planned–
Ž To disorganize, delay, and weaken the enemy.
Ž To strip away the enemy reconnaissanceelements.
Ž TO impair the enemy vision by causing him tobutton up. Use of variable time (VT) andtime (ti) fuzes will also destroy some of thevehicle optics and antennas.
Plan Fires to Support ScoutsFires also must be planned to support thescouts deployed forward to provideintelligence. These fires are planned –Ž To screen scout movements with smoke.
Ž To suppress enemy units engaging the scouts.
Ž Along avenues of approach.
The purpose of the scouts is to report theenemy size, configuration, and direction ofattack. Therefore, the scouts can provide muchvaluable information. This includes thefollowing:
Ž Speed of enemy formations to trigger pointsand selection of trigger points.
3-18
Ž Dispersal of enemy formations.
Ž Amount and location of artillery and mortarassets.
Ž Locations of command, control, andcommunications (C3) cells.
Because the scouts belong to the task forcecommander and may have other informationrequirements, consider attaching forwardobservers with the scouts. Besides reportingspecific information wanted by the FSO, the FOscan control indirect fires against the enemy force.Also, under emergency combat conditions theFOs can control fires delivered by CAS assets ifthe ALO, ETAC, or AFAC is not available.
Consider emplacing COLTS forward onprominent terrain to acquire specific high-valuetargets the commander wants destroyed. Thesehigh-value targets are normally determined by atarget value analysis and included in thecommander’s guidance. High-value targets mayinclude C3 cells, armored vehicles, combatsupport (CS) elements, and combat servicesupport (CSS) elements.
Separate the Enemy InfantryFrom Armor
Plan fires where friendly units engage theenemy with direct fires. As the enemy deployshis infantry, the indirect fires will slow theinfantry and cause the armor to outdistancethe infantry support.
Airburst munitions, such as those deliveredwith VT and time fuzes, will be most effectiveagainst deployed troops in the open.
Support the Obstacle PlanPlan fires in front of, on top of, to the sidesof, and behind obstacles to maximize theireffect as combat multipliers.
FM 6-20-40
Plan fires far forward of obstacles to disruptenemy formations, to separate attackingechelons, and to force enemy deployment intoforward engagement areas. As the enemyapproaches an obstacle, massed fires and prioritytargets maximize casualties on enemy elementshalted or bunched by the obstacle.
Plan fires 0n top of obstacles to hinder breachingattempts by destroying breaching teams or equipment,including lane markers. When deciding to fire on topof an obstacle, the commander must consider theeffects of these fires on the obstacle itself.
Plan fires to the sides of obstacles to hinderenemy attempts to bypass obstacles.
Plan fires behind the obstacle to destroy the enemypiecemeal as he passes through the obstacle, tosupport the withdrawal of friendly elements, and toforce the enemy into another engagement area.
Consider using smoke to support the obstacleplan. Fired in front of the obstacle, smokeobscures the obstacle from the enemy. Smokefired on top and to the sides of the obstaclehinders breaching or bypassing efforts andsilhouettes the enemy for overmatching elementsif the enemy succeeds in breaching or bypassing.
The exact location of each obstacle must bedetermined after the obstacle is emplaced. COLTs canbe used to provide exact location if time permits
Consider using FASCAM if available. (Use ofFASCAM must be coordinated with the engineers.)
Devise an observation plan that provides forcontinuous observation (to include periods oflimited visibility) from multiple vantage points.Designate redundant responsibilities for executingfires in support of obstacles. Also designate primaryand alternate communications means.
Support Disengagements
The commander’s concept of the operation maystate that friendly units are to disengage at a certain
time to move to successive positions. Therefore, thefire plan must include fires to support thedisengagement. The FSO must plan–
Ž On-call suppressive fires at the point wherethe unit will disengage.
Ž Smoke to screen the movement of friendlyelements and obscure the enemy vision.
Ž Targets along the route to the next position.
Plan Smoke and IlluminationBecause the enemy has the advantage ofchoosing when to fight, the FSO must beprepared to implement the fire plan both dayand night, Smoke and illuminating munitionscan be used to silhouette the enemy and thusprovide more visible targets to direct firesystems. The commander must decide if andhow he wants to employ smoke andilluminating munitions, Considerations foremploying these munitions are as follows:
Ž Smoke used to screen friendly movements andobscure the enemy vision may also obscurethe vision of adjacent friendly elements.
Ž Illuminating munition burning on the groundbehind the enemy at night is also effective.Illumination will ruin the night vision offriendly units and, if not properly coordinated,can injure friendly observers looking throughnight vision devices.
Ž Units in the defense normally have theadvantage of knowing the terrain better thanthe attacking force, The use of illuminationmay negate this advantage.
Ž Smoke deployed on the ground behind theenemy is effective during daylight.
Ž To create these silhouettes, the terrain mustbe either level or gently sloping with no crestsbetween the munitions and the enemy.
3-19
FM 6-20-40
SMOKE USED TO SILHOUETTE
Use trigger points to determine when to engage literature, or from scout reports or enemymoving targets with indirect fires. Trigger points speed. The best way is from scout reports.are identifiable points (natural or man-made) onthe ground. The enemy arrival at a trigger point Ž Determine the time of flight of the roundssignals the FOs to initiate a call for fire. The from the weapon system firing the mission.sequence for determining when to intiate a callfor fire is as follows:
Ž Determine the position on the ground thatyou want fires to impact on the enemy or tosilhouette the enemy.
Ž Determine processing time (transmission timeplus FDC time equals total processing time[TPT]).
Ž Determine total mission time (TOF plus TPTequals total mission time [TMT]).
Ž Determine the enemy rate of movement Ž Back up the trigger point the required distance(speed). This may be done by estimation, on on the basis of computations based on totalthe basis of past experience, from doctrinal mission time and rate of speed as shown.
3-20
FM 6-20-40
TRIGGER POINT DETERMINATION
Plan Fire Support Coordinating Measures from one unit may not cross boundaries into
Fire support coordinating measures must be another unit sector without coordination.
flexible to facilitate a changing situation andmust not be too restrictive. To emplace fire support coordinating
measures, consider wartime minimum safeŽ A coordinated fire line may be employed to
allow the attack of the enemy by allsurface-to-surface systems. The CFL should beplaced close to the front of the main battle area.
Ž Restricted fires areas (RFAs) may beemployed around scout positions in forwardareas.
Ž Remember that unit boundaries are also firesupport coordinating measures in that fires
distances of the munitions to be fired.
Plan Final Protective FiresPlan final protective fires as they would beplanned for any defensive operation. Finalprotective fires must be planned at blockingpositions (if any) selected by the commander.
Ž Place FPFs along the most likely approach bythe enemy into a friendly position.
3-21
FM 6-20-40
Ž
Ž
Place FPFs close enough to the friendlyposition to augment the direct fireweapons – normally no more than 300 metersin front of the position.
Fire FPFs only when needed and end themonly on order. The FPF may be initiated by acode word or target number or by callingspecifically for the FPF. However, when this isdone, such initiation should be a matter ofSOP and should be coordinated carefully.
Allocate MortarsThe battalion FSO must recommend whichcompany will receive priority of mortarfires. The priority of fires can changeaccording to time, event, or threat so thatduring an operation, each company isprovided priority of fires. The followingconsiderations can be used to determinepriority of fires.
Ž Priority is usually assigned to a forwardsecurity force initially.
Ž
Ž
Ž
Priority may be subsequently assigned toweight a critical sector or battle position. Thecommander may state that a specific position,terrain feature, or event is vital to thesuccess of the defense.
Priority is changed as required to meet thethreat. The enemy may not always attackwhere expected.
Priority may be assigned to increase the
Ž
effectiveness of the unit direct fires. Forexample, the effectiveness of ATGMs can beincreased by forcing armor to button up andby canalizing the enemy.
The allocation of priority fires must –
Ž Provide fires to support the scheme ofmaneuver and/or commander’s intent.
Ž Enhance response to anticipated on-call fires.
3-22
Ž Provide continuous indirect fire support.
The cavalry troop FSO recommendspriority of fires for the troop mortarssimilarly. In certain circumstances andterrain, those mortars may not be able tosupport the entire troop front. Thecommander must decide to whom priorityof fires will be provided. The commandermust determine –
Ž Where the enemy will most probably deployhis infantry and attack.
Ž Likely enemy avenues of approach.
Ž What position or positions must be held toensure the success of the defense.
Allocate Field Artillery FiresThe brigade FSO must allocate priority of FAfires from the supporting FA direct supportbattalion. Like the mortar allocation of fires,the FA priority of fires –
Is usually assigned initially to a forwardsecurity force.
Ž IS subsequently assigned to weight a criticalsector or battle position.
Ž Is changed as required to meet the threat.
Ž Can increase the effectiveness of direct firesof a unit.
Plan Close Air SupportThe FSO (in coordination with the S3 air,S2, and ALO) recommends targets forengagement wi th prep lanned CAS.Preplanning permits the most effective andefficient use o f T A C A I R a s s e t s .Preplanned requests permit ordnance to beprecisely matched to the target. Missionplanning can be more complete. CASmissions can be integrated into the
FM 6-20-40
operations to ensure timely missionaccomplishment. Preplanned missionsfacilitate the ALO, ETAC, and/or AFACcontrol of aircraft; the planning andemployment of airspace control procedures;and SEAD planning.
A s t h e y b e c o m e a v a i l a b l e , t a r g e tinformation updates or changes in targetstatus should be forwarded to the airsupport operations center (ASOC) throughthe TACP. If the target has moved or hasbeen destroyed or if the commander nolonger wants the target to be engaged byTACAIR, the ALO must be notified so themission can be retargeted, diverted to ahigher priority mission, or otherwise usedin a more effective manner.
Plan for Nuclear OperationsWhen the division uses a division nuclearsubpackage in the defense, the brigadeFSO will ensure that the division FS cellknows the latest FLOT location. The FSOwill inform the brigade commander of thelocation of the minimum safe distance(MSD) lines and will ensure that anySTRIKEWARN message is disseminated.Further information is in Appendix H.
Security Area
Description
The security area extends from the FLOTor a l ine des igna ted by the forcecommander back to the forward edge ofthe battle area (FEBA). The mission of thecovering force is –
Ž To gain and maintain contact with attackingenemy forces,
Ž To develop the situation.
Ž To delay or defeat the enemy leading fightingforces.
ControlCorps and division commanders mayestablish a covering force as the firstechelon of a two-echelon defense. Whenthis is done, the covering force, normallycomposed of tank-heavy task forces andregimental cavalry, fights a major action todestroy leading enemy formations, to causethe commitment of follow-on forces, and toforce the enemy to disclose his main effort.The covering force must be prepared toconduct counterattacks or drive betweenechelons to isolate leading units. The corpsor division will normally control thecovering force.
Fire Support ConsiderationsEngage the enemy before he moves intothe covering force area. Target enemycombat units to force the enemy to deploy,to inflict casualties, and to strip awayreconnaissance elements. Isolate theattacking force by engaging second-echelonforces, C3 facilities, and logistic sites. Planfires deep to slow and canalize the enemy.
Target enemy reconnaissance and intelli-gence-gathering elements (the combatrecon patrol and forward security element)to lessen the capability of the enemy togain information on friendly forces statusand disposition. Laser-guided munitionsdirected by COLTS placed forward may beused to accomplish this task.
Counterpreparation fires should be plannedand may be fired (at the commander’sdirection) when the threat of enemy attack isdiscovered.
Deceive the enemy as to the location ofthe MBA. Cause the enemy to deploy earlyand reveal his main attack. Mass fires atcritical points. Have observers in positionto call for those fires. Mass fires to slowand canalize the enemy to provide better
3-23
FM 6-20-40
targets for maneuver direct fire systemsand to cause the enemy to deploy earlyand thus reveal his main attack.
Support the withdrawal of the covering force.Suppress enemy direct and indirect fireweapons. Assist maneuver in moving anddisengaging. Plan smoke, FPFs, prioritytargets, suppression fires on direct and indirectfire systems, and groups and series alongwithdrawal routes. Support barrier and/orobstacle plans.
Plan for hasty attack.
Keep FS cells in the MBA informed of thecurrent tactical situation. Among the itemsto be forwarded to FS cells in the MBAare –
Ž Fire support coordinating measures in effect.
Ž The tactical situation.
Ž Target lists and fire plans in effect.
Place CFLs close to friendly maneuver forcesand plan on-order CFLs.
Main Battle Area
DescriptionThe main battle area extends from theFEBA back to the rear limit of the brigadearea of operation. The bulk of thedefending force normally is deployed inthe main battle area to defeat the enemymain thrust. Fire support in the MBA isused to slow, stop, or destroy attackingforces and to enhance the use of massedfires to inflict the greatest damage.
Fire Support ConsiderationsBefore the enemy enters the main battlearea, plan deep fires to disrupt, delay,
canalize, and cause casualties. TACAIRmissions may be planned on known,suspected, and likely enemy locations.Also, plan fires on choke points to inflictmaximum casualties. If a covering force isd e p l o y e d f o r w a r d o f t h e M B A ,coordination must be made to fire on thetargets.
Plan fires to deny the enemy informationabout friendly forces and to strip away hisreconnaissance and intelligence-gatheringelements (the combat recon patrol andforward security element). Laser-guidedmunitions directed by COLTS placedforward may be used to do this.
As the enemy moves into the main battlearea, use fire support to canalize him, denyhim use of chosen terrain, and cause himto deploy early and thus reveal his mainattack. Mass fires to delay, disrupt, anddestroy the enemy throughout the sector.Counterpreparation fires may be plannedand executed. Observers (to includeCOLTS) may be placed in key positionsovermatching avenues of approach. Also,fires should be planned to support thebarrier and/or obstacle plan.
Plan fires to isolate front echelons fromthe follow-on forces, making it easier forfriendly maneuver forces to defeat theenemy. Observers must be in forwardpositions to call for fire, Consider usingsmoke and FASCAM behind forwardenemy elements and in front of enemyfollow-on forces. Engage high-payofftargets in the follow-on forces early todisrupt their operations.
Help maneuver forces in moving anddisengaging from enemy forces as they fallback through the MBA. Suppress enemydirect and indirect fire weapons. Plansmoke, priority targets, and fires alongwithdrawal routes.
3-24
FM 6-20-40
Make contingency plans to reallocate firesupport assets once the main attack isi d e n t i f i e d t o s t r e n g t h e n t h e m o s tvulnerable area. Fires must be plannedalong all viable avenues of approach, andon-order priori t ies of f ire must bedesignated. TACAIR missions must beplanned to support the contingencies.
Plan fires on obstacles to hinder breachingattempts with the use of massed fires andpriority targets. FASCAM may be used toreseed breached minefield.
Plan for hasty attack. The opportunity mayappear to conduct counterattacks. The FSOmust be prepared to support a hasty attackusing quick fire planning techniques, asplanning time will be limited. Place CFLsclose to forward units to open up the areafor rapid engagement of the enemy.
EXAMPLE OF PLANNING A DEFENSE
The 7th Combined Arms Army, consisting ofthree motorized rifle divisions and two tankdivisions is expected to launch an attack within48 hours to seize the industrial complex ofCache. The 10th US Corps will defend in sectorw i th two d iv i s ions abreas t and one inreserve –the 40th Armd Div in the west, the 52dMech Div in the east, and the 53d Mech Div inreserve.
The 52d Mech Div will deploy with threebrigades on Iine and the combat aviationbrigade (CAB) in reserve. The division cavalry(cav) squadron will screen forward of PL BUICK.The division commander intends to have the 1stBde and 2d Bde defend in sector to destroy theenemy first-echelon divisions and then to holdthe second-echelon division forward of PL FORDuntil the 3d Bde attacks the enemy flank todestroy his combat support and combat service
support. The cavalry wiII withdraw through the2d Bde and take up positions on the divisioneastern frank.
The CAB is in reserve and on order attacks intothe flanks of the second-echelon division.
The 2d Bde commander and his FSCOORDreturn to the brigade CP, where the commanderissues his initial planning guidance. (See the 2dBde defensive diagram.) From the division FScell, the brigade FSO receives the followinginformation:
FA missions
6-14 FA (155, SP): DS 2d Bde
3-5 FA (203, SP): Reinforcing (R) 6-14 FA
C/1-12 FA (MLRS): GS
3-25
FM 6-20-40
EXAMPLE OF PLANNING A DEFENSE (CONTINUED)
Status
6-14 FA: 97 percent strength, 22 howitzersoperational
3-5 FA: 95 percent strength, 17 howitzers operational
C/1-12 FA: 98 percent strength, 8 launchersoperational
2d Bde CSR
Munitions 107 mm
HE 80
DPICM
Smoke 20
Copperhead
ADAM
RAAMS
Illum 15
155 mm
35
150
20
1
4
16
15
203 mm
20
75
TACAIR missions
Two CAS missions (four sorties) are allocated to the2d Bale. The first mission Is two F-16 aircraft availablebetween 0600 and 1100. The second mission is twoA-10s available between 0900 and 1400.
FASCAM
The FA 155-mm battalion can deliver two 400- by400-meter, medium-density, short-duration RAAMSminefieids. The division commander is executingauthority for long-duration FASCAM. The brigadecommander is the executing authority forshort-duration FASCAM.
Fire support coordinating measures in effect are asfollows:
Ž CFL (PL BUICK) is the initial CFL.
Line Number Target Number Description
Ž CFL (PL PLYMOUTH) is on order.
Ž CFL (PL FORD) is on order.
The brigade FSO requests from the division FS cellthe division target list and schedules as they apply tothe 2d Bale. These are as follows:
Ž The division has planned counterpreparation fires.They will last for 10 minutes, Direct support andreinforcing units will not take part in thecounterpreparation. Targets for thecounterpreparation will be provided by corps anddivision. No other schedules affecting the brigadeoperation have been planned.
Ž The part of the division target list affecting thebrigade is as follows:
Agency Remarks
81 AN1052 First-echelon arty Q-37 Counterpreparation
82 AN1053 First-echelon arty Q-37 Counterpreparation
3-26
FM 6-20-40
EXAMPLE OF PLANNING A DEFENSE (CONTINUED)
3-27
FM 6-20-40
EXAMPLE OF PLANNING A DEFENSE (CONTINUED)
3 - 2 8
FM 6-20-40
EXAMPLE OF PLANNING A DEFENSE (CONTINUED)
The brigade FSO recommends to the commanderthat priority of fires be given to the 2-6 Mechbecause Intelligence shows that the enemy mainattack will be focused on that unit. Also, herecommends that an observer be positioned witheach battalion scout platoon to target enemycommand vehicles. Finally, after consulting with theALO, the FSO recommends that the CAS be usedagainst the enemy second-echelon regiment as itapproaches the FLOT. The commander agrees toall the recommendations.
After the brigade S2 and the targeting officerIdentify the probable enemy forces and their Iikelycourses of action, they use target value analysis toIdentify high-value targets. The targeting officer thendetermines which of those high-value targets canbe located by acquisition sources available to thebrigade. The S2 then requests that the divisionlocate those targets the brigade doesn’t have themeans to acquire. The FSO and the S3 evaluatethe ability of the brigade to attack the targets Iisted,After determining which targets will most effectfriendly operations if successfully attacked, the S2and the targeting officer consolidate them into ahigh-payoff target list. The refined high-payoff targetIist is given to the commander for his approval.
The brigade staff develops the courses of action andbriefs the commander on these. He approves thefollowing course of action:
"Initially, a cav troop from the division cav squadronwill screen forward of PL BUICK and withdrawthrough our brigade, At PL BUICK, I want eachbattalion to establish its own screen to determine theenemy’s main effort. The scouts will require an FOand/or a COLT; but I don’t want the scouts to getdecisively engaged. The FEBA is PL PLYMOUTH.Battalions will defend in sector to hold the enemyforward of PL FORD, I want two FASCAM minefieldsemplaced. Engineer and FSO, get back with me onthe most effective and efficient way to do this. The2-6 Mech will have priority of fires with on-orderpriority of fires to 3-8 Mech. If the enemy getsthrough the obstacles and forces us back to PLFORD, the 1-6 Mech will counterattack into theenemy flank. The emphasis must be on massed firesand the use of trigger points to properly engagemoving targets. Battalions are to conduct limitedcounterattacks to restore PL PLYMOUTH in theirsectors. We must keep the enemy from reaching PLFORD.”
3-29
FM 6-20-40
Line Number93949596
EXAMPLE OF PLANNING A DEFENSE (CONTINUED)
Detailed planning continues. The brigade FSO plansmore targets, which are added to those that camefrom division. He then briefs the S3 and the thecommander on how these targets support themission, the scheme of maneuver, and thecommander’s intent. The targets that affect the 2-6Mech are as follows:
Target Number Description Agency Remarks
AR0001 Minefield Bde FSO FASCAM
AR0002 Road junction Bde FSO DPICM
AR0003 Minefield Bde FSO FASCAM
AR0004 Road junction Bde FSO DPICM
Targets AR0002 and AR0004 are planned along likelyenemy avenues of approach in the sector. TargetsAR0001 and AR0003 are planned FASCAM minefieldsto slow the enemy forward of PL FORD.
The battalion commanders and their FSOs arrive atthe brigade CP and receive the OPORD. The brigadeFSO passes the following Information to the battalionFSO.
Ž Target list (to include indication of some as prioritytargets) and target overlay.
Ž Schedules of fire.
Ž Fire support coordinating measures.
Ž Fire support assets and their Status.
Ž Allocation of priority of fires and FPFs
Ž Intelligence on the enemy.
“All COLTS are operational. COLT 1 initially wiII belocated with the brigade commander at the brigadeCP set up between the battalion sectors. COLTS 2and 3 will be positioned by the 2-6 Mech FSO.COLT 1 will join the 1-6 Mech when it is committedfor the counterattack. Positioning will be by the 1-6Mech FSO. A/6-14 FA has been tasked to providethe Copperhead firing unit. Try to use Copperheadagainst command vehicles (especially artillerycommand and reconnaissance vehicles) andmine-dearlng vehicles.”
When the 2-6 Mech commander returns to thebattalion CP, he issues his staff planning guidance.
3-30
FM 6-20-40
EXAMPLE OF PLANNING A DEFENSE (CONTINUED)
3-31
FM 6-20-40
EXAMPLE OF PLANNING A DEFENSE (CONTINUED)
3-32
FM 6-20-40
EXAMPLE OF PLANNING A DEFENSE (CONTINUED)
“I want the scouts forward to report enemy locationand strength and to try to destroy enemy leadand/or recon elements, but not to become decisivelyengaged. Company C will provide an FO to thescouts during their screening mission. I want toengage the enemy at the maximum range of ourweapons, so we’ll have to coordinate with thedivisional cav troop in our sector. I want to establishbarriers and minefields that will slow the enemyenough to destroy him in front of PL PLYMOUTH. Ienvision two engagement areas in our sector– onebeyond PL PLYMOUTH and the other in front of PLFORD. To hit the enemy at long range, we’ll have toconcentrate on indirect fires initially, with scoutsproviding the coverage of the initial obstacle at PLBUICK. When the scout positions become untenableafter the initial engagement, the scouts are towithdraw through Company A and establish a screen
between the forest and PL FORD. However, if wecan’t defeat the enemy at PLYMOUTH, we willcontinue to defend in depth.”
The commander then identifies battle positions for allthe companies. Company A will occupy BP 11;Company B, BP 12; Company C, BP 21; andCompany D, BP 22. The commander continues hisguidance.
“If the enemy penetrates either BP 11 or BP 12, thenan on-order battle position will be established at 31,BP 31 will be occupied on order by Company C orD, depending on which sector is penetrated. If theenemy penetrates both BP 11 and BP 12,Companies C and D will defend from theirestablished Positions."
3-33
FM 6-20-40
Line Number
1 4
15
1 6
1 7
EXAMPLE OF PLANNING A DEFENSE (CONTINUED)
The staff then continues the planning process. Thebattalion FSO develops the following target list:
Target Number Description Agency Remarks
AR3003 Armor company Bn FSO DPICM
AR3004 Armor company Bn FSO DPICM
AR3005 Armor company Bn FSO DPICM
AR3006 Armor company Bn FSO DPICM
Targets AR3003, AR3004, and AR3005 support thebarriers and obstacles. Target AR0004 (brigade target)wilI be used to provide fires on BP 11 as the companydelays. Target AR3006 is planned on top of BP 12.
The battalion staff develops the maneuver plan inaccordance with the commander’s guidance. The FSOdevelops the fire support execution matrix in supportof the plan. Company commanders and their FSOsare briefed on the maneuver plan at the battalion CP.
The FSO then briefs the company FSOs on the firesupport plan. He provides them with –
The battalion target list, which includes divisionbrigade, and battalion targets, it also indicates whichtargets have been designated as priority targets.
Ž Priority of fires.
Ž Fire support assets available and their status.
Ž Fire support coordinating measures.
Ž Available intelligence on the enemy.
Ž Call signs and frequencies.
The FSO continues the briefing as fallows:
"Brigade COLTs 2 and 3 are OPCON to us. I willposition COLT 2 forward of PL PLYMOUTH on theprominent terrian in the west of the brigade sectoroverlooking and observing beyond the initial obstacleat PL BUICK COLT 3 will position in the hill mass onthe company boundary to cover the initial andsubsequent obstacles and to provide continuouscoverage when COLT 2 has to displace. Uponwithdrawal of the scouts, COLT 2 will reposition in BP21 and cover the obstacle at PL FORD.
"lndirect fires covering the critical initial obstacle at PLBUCK will be initiated by COLT 2 or, if it is unable, bythe FO with the scouts and the scout platoon leader,
in that order. Most of our fires planned in the securityarea in some way support the obstacle. OurIong-range fires in front of the obstacle are designednot only to slow the enemy and provide our forceswith additional warning of the attack but also to helpcanalize him into our obstacle. We've planned fires ontop of and to the sides of the obstacle to hinderbreaching and bypassing by the enemy. We’ve alsoplanned fires behind the obstacle to attack breachingelements as they present themselves piecemeal and tohelp the withdrawal of our forward elements. TheCOLTS will aid In obtaining accurate target obstaclelocations by using target area survey and theirground/vehicular laser locator designator.
"The battalion commander has directed Company C togive up a platoon FO to work with the scouts untilthey withdraw behind PL PLYMOUTH."
The FSO also reminded the company FSOs of thefollowing:
Ž Plan smoke to separate enemy elements thatencounter our obstacles from their follow-on forces.
Ž Plan fires to supporti the counterattack.
Ž Use laser range finders to accurately locate andtarget obstacles.
Ž Plan fire to the franks-the enemy may dismountinfantry to cross terrain not passable with vehicles.
When the company commanders and their FSOsdepart, the battalion FSO consults with the ALO andS3 concerning CAS. He believes that a CAS strikeagainst the enemy main force is essential. The S3 andALO agree and present their case to the battalioncommander. The battalion commander agrees andtells the battalion S3 air to get approval for a CASstrike from the brigade.
3-34
FM 6-20-40
Section IV. SPECIAL TECHNIQUES
This section implements STANAG 2082, Edition 5.
Delay
Description
The delay trades space for time while inflictingmaximum punishment on the enemy withoutbecoming decisively engaged. The delayingforce selects positions that provide long-rangeobservation and fields of fire. Thus, friendlyforces can engage the enemy at long rangesand bring him under increasingly heavy fires ashe maneuvers toward friendly positions. Thedelaying force seeks concealment and coverfor delaying positions, assembly areas, androutes of movement. It occupies battlepositions long enough to cause the enemy todeploy, allowing the delaying force to developthe situation and maneuver to an attackposition. The delaying force normally deploysto the next delay position before becomingdecisively engaged.
Fire Support Considerations
Fires are planned to engage the enemy early,before he gets to the battle positions, to inflictcasualties and disrupt his approach to thepositions. Massed fires are planned onhigh-payoff targets and canalizing terrain.Enemy reserves and logistic sites are engagedto reduce the ability of the enemy to supportthe attacking force.
All fire support assets must be used to supportthe delaying force as it proceeds to the rear.Priority targets are planned and designated, asare fires along the route from the old positionto the next position. Observers are placed inposition to support the displacing force.COLTS may be needed to provide the degreeof support necessary. All assets are used tosupport the movement. Smoke may be used toscreen the movement.
Fires must be planned in front of, on top of,and to the sides of the battle position toengage the enemy immediately before hisattack of that position. Also, FPFs should beplanned.
Fires must be planned for the disengagement.Specifically, massed fires on likely and knownenemy positions and smoke should be planned.Use of the COLT can help in this.
At some time during the battle, the enemymay become particularly vulnerable. Thecommander may decide to conduct acounterattack. There may be enough planningtime to use quick fire planning procedures.Otherwise, the FSO must be prepared to shiftand mass fires. He must plan continuously. Ifthe counterattack is to be more than a limitedone, the FSO must be prepared to reallocateassets in support of it.
Withdrawal
Description
During a withdrawal, all or a part of a forcedisengages from the enemy and moves away inan organized manner. A withdrawal may occurunder enemy pressure or not under pressure. Itmay be executed in daylight or darkness. Inwithdrawing from the enemy, the disengagingforce must put distance between the it and theenemy as quickly as possible, preferably withoutthe enemy’s knowledge. Withdrawal is best doneunder the cover of darkness or limited visibility,even though command and control is moredifficult. Smoke helps conceal the operation. Inthe case of the withdrawal under enemypressure, the commander will leave anovermatching force, a covering force, or adetachment left in contact (DLIC) to maintaincontact with the enemy and keep him fromspoiling the withdrawal. The DLIC may have toperform a delay to keep enemy forces fromengaging friendly forces at this critical time.
3-35
FM 6-20-40
Fire Support ConsiderationsWithdrawal Without Enemy Pressure. Ideally, themaneuver force will be able to withdraw withoutenemy pressure. In such a case, the commander willwant to use a deception plan to make it look asthough the force is still in contact with the enemy.The withdrawal may be detected by the enemy.Therefore, the FSCOORD must be prepared tosupport a withdrawal under enemy pressure.
Withdrawal Under Enemy Pressure. If the forcemust withdraw under enemy pressure, the DLICmust be given maximum fire support to help inthe disengagement. Suppression of enemy directfire systems and the use of smoke to obscureenemy OPs must be planned. Because of terrainconsiderations, smoke may be required to screenfriendly movement. TACAIR and attackhelicopters employed in a fire support role maybe used to provide effective support.
Barriers and obstacles become critical to thesuccess ofsupport ofof smokeSmoke can
the operation. Massed fires inbarriers and obstacles and the usecan restrict enemy movement.hinder enemy breaching attempts.
Passage of Lines
Description
A passage of lines is conducted to allow a movingunit to pass through a stationary unit. It can beconducted in offensive or defensive operations,During this passage, both units are temporarilyconcentrated in the same area and are, therefore,vulnerable to enemy action. The normal confusionof combat is increased by having two units in anarea where only one was before. Therefore,extremely detailed planning and coordination arerequired. A passage of lines is rarely a specifiedmission; rather, it is usually an implied task.
Planning
Extremely detailed planning is required forpassage of lines to avoid unnecessary casualties
and damage to equipment and to deceive theenemy. The aspects of planning with whichFSCOORDs of the stationary and passingforces must be concerned are discussed below.
Control Measures. The following data must bepassed between two forces involved:
Ž Location of passage lanes.
Ž Location of passage points.
Ž Location of contact points.
Ž Recognition signals.
Ž Attack positions or assembly area (in a forwardpassage).
Ž Routes (start points [SPs] and release points[RPs]).
Ž Location of CS and CSS units (in a rearwardpassage).
Transfer of Control. The commanders of the twoforces decide when transfer of control will beeffected. Most often, it will be determined byevent; however, the commanders may select atime (H-hour) to effect transfer of control.This transfer of control impacts on fire support(that is, the mission changes from DS to GS,GSR, or reinforcing or from GS, GSR, or Rto DS). Also, responsibility for fire supportcoordination passes from the FSCOORD ofthe force in contact to the FSCOORD of thepassing force at H-hour (or event). In a fluidsituation, which will be the norm, this transferof control will probably not occur at the sametime across the front. Therefore, it must beplanned for and procedures, such ascollocation of DS battalion CPs, must beestablished to ensure smooth transition.
Targeting. Targeting is similar for forward andrearward passages of lines.
For a forward passage of lines –
Ž Screen enemy forward observation of passage.
3-36
FM 6-20-40
Ž
Ž
Ž
Ž
Ž
Ž
Ž
Ž
Ž
Ž
Ž
Plan groups and/or series of targets on enemydirect fire systems, command and control,indirect fire systems, TA systems, and airdefense.
Plan fires to support the deception plan.
Plan smoke to screen friendly movementthrough passage points.
Plan fires to interdict enemy counterattacks inthe area of passage and reinforcements.
Emphasize massing indirect fires.
Ensure the stationary force supports the closebattle while the passing force indirect fire assetsmove through.
Ensure countefire is planned and controlled bythe stationary force.
Position COLTS of both forces to designatetargets for precision guided munitions.
Plan fire support coordinating measures.
Use AFSOs to cover dead space and flanks.
Ensure the passing force plans fires to supportoperations after the passage of lines.
For a rearward passage of lines –
Ž Plan smoke to conceal movement throughpassage points.
Ž Plan fires to disengage forces.
Ž Plan fires to support the obstacle and barrierplans.
Ž Plan fires to support the deception plain
Ž Plan fire support coordinating measures.
Ž Ensure the stationary force supports the closebattle while the passing force indirect fire assetsmove through.
Ž Ensure counterfire is planned and controlled bythe stationary force.
Ž Plan fires on the passage points to be fired afterfriendly units have passed through.
Ž Ensure the stationary force plans fires tosupport operations after the passage of lines.
Positioning of Field ArtilleryPositioning is a critical task in the support of apassage of lines.
Forward Passage. The field artillery of thepassing force should be infiltrated from therear assembly area to the designated primarypositions to support the operation. Thesepositions should be near the passage lanes butnot so close that they interfere with themaneuver force movement. On a forwardpassage, position priority goes to the passingforce. During the passage of lines, the passingforce FS cell and/or CPs collocate with thestationary force FS cell and/or CPs. TheFSCOORD must coordinate FA position areaswith the maneuver commander. Position areasforward of the passage points are away fromthe passage points. Their selection is based onthe anticipated rate of movement of themaneuver forces and terrain availability.
Rearward passage. The field artillery of thestationary force should be positioned wellforward to provide deep fires to support thewithdrawal of the passing force. Again, thesepositions should be away from passage lanes.In the rearward passage, the stationary forcehas positioning priority. As the passing forceartillery moves through, it should positionbehind the stationary artillery and movelaterally away from the passage lanes.
CoordinationClose cooperation and coordination of plansbetween the commanders and staffs of theinvolved forces are mandatory. Once thepassage of lines is ordered, the FSCOORD ofthe passing force in a forward passage of linesneeds to send a liaison section to the
3-37
FM 6-20-40
FSCOORD of the force in contact. In arearward passage, the FSCOORD of thestationary force needs to send a liaison sectionto the FSCOORD of the passing force. TheFSCOORDs define and assign mutuallyagreed upon fire support responsibilities tofacilitate the passage. It is important toremember that each unit will be in the area ofresponsibility of another unit for a period oftime and that detailed coordination is vital toensure that each unit understands how theother operates. The two FSCOORDs need toshare information and coordinate as follows:Ž
Ž
Ž
Ž
Ž
Ž
Exchange unit SOPS, and resolve differencesin operating procedures.
Exchange existing targets and fire plans.
Describe unit target acquisition assets.
Exchange high-payoff target list, attackguidance, and casualty criteria.
Exchange control measures in effect; forexample, passage points, passage lanes, andcontact points.
Exchange fire support coordinating measurescurrently in effect and those that-will be ineffect.
Ž Coordinate recognition signals.
Ž Provide information on obstacles and barriers,
Ž Coordinate position areas.
Ž Provide met information to passing force.
Ž Provide available survey control to passingforce.
Ž Exchange SOIs, and resolve communicationsdifferences; for example, frequencies, callsigns, and challenge and password.
Ž Coordinate security measures in effect.
3-38
Ž Exchange intelligence.
Deliberate River Crossing
Maneuver Tasks and EventsIn the deliberate river crossing, maneuvertasks are as follows:
In the advance to the river–
Ž The crossing site must be secured.
Ž Control measures must be established.
Ž Control must be transferred from the assaultforce to the crossing area commander, whocontrols the movement within the crossingarea.
In an assault crossing of the river–
Ž
Ž
Ž
Support forces develop crossing sites, emplacecrossing means, and control unit movementinto and away from the crossing sites.
Defensible terrain on the exit bank is secured,The area must be large enough toaccommodate the assault force and essentialelements.
Follow-up forces provide overmatching directand indirect fire support, crossing site security,and follow-and-support assistance to theassault force.
In the advance from the exit bank–
Ž Assault forces lead, making the initial assaultof the river and continuing to attack from theexit bank.
Ž Support forces help the assault forces to theobjective.
Ž An assault force may make a hasty or adeliberate attack from the exit bank.
FM 6-20-40
In securing the bridgehead, CSS elementssustain the assault and subsequent advance tothe bridgehead. When the bridgehead issecured, the river crossing is complete.
Fire Support ConsiderationsFire Support Tasks. The following are firesupport tasks in the deliberate river crossing:
Ž
Ž
Ž
Ž
Ž
Ž
Ž
Ž
Ž
Ž
Make fires immediately available toforces.
Assign priority of fires to assault forces.
crossing
Plan smoke and suppression fires in greaterthan normal amounts if necessary.
Use smoke to screen both actual and dummycrossing sites.
Use smoke to obscure enemy direct firepositions in the bridgehead area until thecrossing forces can engage them.
Suppress enemy forces in the bridgehead areauntil the assault force can provide its ownsuppressive fires.
Follow river-crossing SOP in planning firesupport.
Use all available targeting assets to developtargets in the bridgehead area. A direct linkbetween TA assets and supporting artilleryshould be considered.
Use target value analysis to help develophigh-value targets and facilitate effectiveengagement of high-payoff targets.
Ensure that DS and reinforcing units move intothe bridgehead area as soon as feasible behindthe assault force. This maximizes rangecapability of the weapon system and enhancescoordination.
NOTE: Movement by battalion is appropriate ifreinforcing FA is available.
Command and Control. Maneuver forces maymove into temporary defensive positionspending the crossing. The massed units at thecrossing site are vulnerable to counterfire andcounterattack. Fire support must be plannedaccordingly. Procedures to request, control,and coordinate fires must be designated toprovide continuous fire support when DSartillery battalions cross the river. Thefollowing considerations apply:
Ž Designate and disseminate on-order firesupport coordinating measures.
Ž Ensure that advance coordination betweenGS and DS units addresses C3 considerationsto facilitate a smooth transition.
Ž Include all FS cells in the planning process.
Fire Support Planning and Coordination. Planswill be commensurate with visibility conditionsthat prevail during the crossing. The width ofthe crossing area will affect the planning. Theamount of time necessary to cross ariver – hence, the vulnerability of the crossingforce –will affect the types and volume of firesrequested.
Prepare fire plans to soften enemy defenses atcrossing sites and to seal off far bank positions.Fire planning should include the following:
Ž Fires to facilitate the assault force in securingthe exit bank.
Ž preparations, groups, and series to support theoperation as the assault force secures thebridgehead.
Ž On-order fire support coordinating measures.
Ž Interdiction fires to isolate the bridgeheadarea from enemy reinforcement.
Plan smoke to obscure actual and decoycrossing sites and to screen friendlymovements. Mortars and artillery may be usedto establish a smoke screen on the enemy sideof the river. Smoke pots and generators will berequired to establish large-area screens and to
3-39
FM 6-20-40
sustain a smoke screen to support theoperation.
NOTE: Smoke created by almost any means willpinpoint the area and draw the enemy’s attention;therefore, it is important that the smoke screenextends over enough of the area so that the ac-tual point of crossing is not obvious to theenemy.
Relief in Place
Description
Supported maneuver forces conduct a relief inplace to remove units from combat. Adeployed force is replaced by another unit,which assumes the mission and the assignedsector or zone of action of the outgoing unit.
The relief in place is executed in stages, fromfront to rear or rear to front. The incomingunit assumes the general defense plans of therelieved unit.
Secrecy is vital to success, as the operationmust be conducted without weakening security.Normal patterns of activity must bemaintained to deceive the enemy. The relief inplace must be executed expeditiously, and it isnormally conducted at night or during periodsof limited visibility.
The following principles apply to all reliefoperations:Ž The relief sector remains under the control of
the outgoing commander until all his forwardelements are relieved (or as mutually agreedupon or directed).
Ž Normally, the CP of the incoming commanderis collocated with that of the outgoingcommander.
Ž Liaison and communication are establishedbetween outgoing and incoming FS cells.
Ž Outgoing and incoming units exchange SOPs.
Ž Existing fire plans are passed to the incomingFSCOORD.
Ž Routes and times for withdrawal of theoutgoing field artillery are established.
Fire Support ConsiderationsFire Support Tasks. The following are firesupport tasks in a relief in place:
Ž Arrange for an exchange of outgoing andincoming FS cell liaison personnel.
Ž Provide incoming field artillery with existing fireplans.
Ž Determine needs for smoke and other types ofammunition.
Ž Establish how the outgoing field artillery will berelieved.
Ž Establish how the outgoing field artillery willcontribute.
Command and Control. Normally, the fieldartillery units will not be relieved at the sametime as the maneuver forces. The change offire support responsibilities is as agreed uponby the two FSCOORDs unless otherwisedirected.
Fire Support Planning and Coordination. Theoutgoing force passes fire plans to theincoming force so that plans can be continued.The following are specific tasks in fire supportplanning and coordination:
Ž
Ž
Ž
Ž
Prepare and disseminate plans to support theincoming force.
Make available to all concerned fire planningSOP items of the incoming force.
Make arrangements for the incoming force touse the targeting list and means of theoutgoing force.
Ensure that fires have been planned tosupport or emplace a barrier or an obstacle toslow advancing enemy.
3-40
FM 6-20-40
Ž Plan smoke to screen friendly movements.
Ž Support the deception plan.
Breakout by Encircled Forces
Description
A force is considered encircled when allground routes of evacuation and reinforcementhave been cut by enemy action. A force maybe ordered to remain in a strong position onkey terrain to deny the enemy passage througha vital choke point after an enemybreakthrough, or it may be left to hold theshoulder of a penetration. In either case, itmay become encircled.
When the encirclement occurs, the seniormaneuver commander within the encirclementassumes control of all forces. He must quicklyestablish a viable defense, and fire supportmust be centralized.
If there is to be a breakout, it will beattempted as soon as possible. The longer theencircled force takes to reorganize and breakout, the more organized the enemy becomes.The breakout is normally conducted duringperiods of darkness or limited visibility.Overwhelming combat power is focused at thebreakout point. Tank-heavy forces lead theattack, when terrain permits. The rest of theforces fight a delaying action or defend theperimeter during the initial stages. FA unitsare integrated into the formations.
Fire Support ConsiderationsFire Support Tasks. Following are fire supporttasks in an encirclement:
Ž Reorganize available fire support.
Ž With the force commander, determine themost critical areas in defense, future breakoutplans, and the amount of outside helpavailable.
Ž prepare for the breakout.
Command and Control. Field artillery andmortars are centralized and positionedthroughout the encirclement to limitvulnerability and mass fires. Communicationsare reestablished with FA units and higher andlower FS cells.
Fire Support Planning and Coordination. Thefollowing are fire support and coordinationtasks in the encirclement:
Ž Plan fires for both the defense and thesubsequent breakout.
Ž Effect fire support coordination with FS cellsoutside the encircled area.
Ž Use fire support for deception, if necessary.
Ž Establish fire support coordinating measures(an RFL if necessary).
Ž Use TACAIR and precision guided munitionsduring the breakout.
Ž Plan massed fires at breakout points toenhance momentum.
Linkup Operations
Description
Linkup operations join two friendly forces. Theforces may be moving toward one another, orone may be stationary. It is a complexoperation that requires detailed planning andcoordination. Linkup operations often requirea passage of lines. When the linkup is made,the linkup force may join the stationary forceor it may pass through or around and continuethe attack.
The controlling headquarters of both forcesestablishes the command relationship betweenthe two forces and the responsibilities foreach. It also establishes the control measuresto be used.
3-41
FM 6-20-40
Forces that are linking up exchange as muchinformation as is practical before an operation.Considerations may include –
Ž Fire support needed before, during, and afterthe linkup.
Ž Recognition signals and communications needsfrom both forces.
Ž Future operations after the Linkup.
Fire Support Considerations
Fire Support Tasks. The following are firesupport tasks in the linkup:
Ž Ensure that all fire support personnel know thefire control measures and recognition signals forthe linkup.
Ž Ensure that fire support personnel arecontinuously aware of the progress of the l.inkupforces.
Command and Control. Centralized control isdesirable.
Fire Support Planning and Coordination. Thefollowing are fire support planning andcoordination considerations in the linkupoperation:
Ž Most planned fries are short of the RFL.
Ž Targets beyond the RFL must be cleared by thecontrolling headquarters.
Ž Smoke and illuminating fries must not causeadverse effects on the other friendly forces.
Ž
Ž
Ž
Fires must ensure that the enemy forcebetween the two friendly forces cannot escape.Use of FASCAM should be considered toblock enemy withdrawal.
Indirect fire weapons are positioned to allowthem to mass fires at linkup points.
Positions should afford easy access to routes tobe used after the linkup.
3-42
Security Operations
Description
Security missions prevent observation,harassment, surprise, or sabotage by enemyforces. Units conducting security operationsprovide information about size, composition,location, and direction of movement of enemyforces. Reaction time and maneuver spacegained by this information allow the mainbody to prepare and to deploy to engage theenemy. Security operations include –
Ž Screening.
Ž Guarding.
Ž Covering (discussed with defensive operations).
Ž Providing rear area protection.
A screening force maintains surveillance andgives early warning by maintaining contactwith enemy forces without becoming decisivelyengaged. It will destroy or repel enemyreconnaissance units.
Guard operations protect the main body bypreventing enemy ground observation, directfire, and surprise attack. A guard forcereconnoiters, attacks, defends, and delays asnecessary to give the main body time to reactor to continue its mission. It can be conductedto the front, rear, or flanks of the main body.It is normally done within friendly fieldartillery range.
Providing rear area protection protects units,installations, facilities, and lines ofcommunication from enemy attack or sabotageand reestablishes support capabilities.
Fire Support ConsiderationsFire Support Tasks. Fire support must be highlyresponsive to the security forces. The followingare fire support considerations in a securityoperation:
FM 6-20-40
Ž Fire support means must be as mobile as theforce being supported.
Ž Fire Support communications means must beflexible.
Ž Secrecy will often dictate the nature ofoperations.
Command and Control. As security forces mayoperate some distance beyond the main body,field artillery may be attached to the supportedsecurity forces.
Fire Support Planning and Coordination. Firesshould be planned to cover the securityoperations of the force. The following areplanning and coordination considerations:
Ž
Ž
Ž
Ž
Ž
Ž
Ž
Fires may be used to screen movements orareas.
Illuminating fires may be neededoperations.
AFSOs and sensors maybe used.
during night
Tactical aircraft of all types can assist in mostoperations by providing current visualreconnaissance information. Requests forTACAIR reconnaissance support from the AirForce are made by the S2 or S3 through normalrequest channels.
Indirect fire weapons are positioned to allowmassing of fires in the target areas of interest.
COLTS in overwatch positions should be usedas designators for laser-guided munitions.
Reconnaissance Operations
Description
Reconnaissance operations are used to gatherinformation. There are three types ofeconnaissance operations:
Route reconnaissance missions are assigned togather detailed information about a specificroute and all adjacent terrain or about anenemy force moving along a route.
Ž Zone reconnaissance is a thoroughreconnaissance of all routes and terrain withinspecified boundaries. It is made to report thelocations of all enemy forces within the unitzone.
Ž Area reconnaissance is conducted when acommander needs information about a specificarea, such as a town, proposed assembly area, orother feature that may be critical to anoperation.
Fire Support Considerations
Fire support contributes to the reconnaissanceefforts by using aerial and ground observers,sensors, and radars to gather combatinformation and intelligence,
Fire Support Tasks. Fire support helps areconnaissance force by –
Ž Orienting on the location or movement of therecon objective.
Ž Reporting all information quickly andaccurately.
Ž Helping the force retain freedom to maneuver.
Ž Gaining and maintaining enemy contact.
Ž Developing the situation quickly.
Command and Control. Attachment of fieldartillery may be considered.
Fire Support Planning and Coordination. Theplanning and coordination parallel those forsecurity operations.
Mobility. Fire support must be as mobile as thesupported force.
3-43
FM 6-20-40
Ž
Ž
Ž
Ž
CHAPTER 4
EXECUTION
Purpose Ž Use of planned TACAIR missions.
This chapter focuses on execution. The intentis to portray for the FSO how a fire support The chapter includes two examples – one forplan could be executed. This chapter addresses the offense and one for the defense. The planthe following key items: for each scenario was developed in Chapter 3.
The example solutions are not to beUse of a fire support rehearsal. considered the best or only ways to execute
Fire support coordinating measures. the plans. Instead, they are examples thatdemonstrate how to effectively employ and
Schedules of fire. manage various fire support- assets. Onlybrigade, battalion, and Company B targets are
COLT employment. plotted.
EXAMPLE OF FIRE SUPPORT EXECUTION FOR DELlBERATE ATTACK
The night before the attack, the battalioncommander conducted a map rehearsal of theOPORD with all commanders and FSOs and thebattalion staff. Since the OPORD had beenbriefed earlier in the day, commanders had hadtime to get back to their units with their FSOsand make initial plans for the upcomingoperation. Before the rehearsal started, themaneuver battalion S2 updated the intelligencesituation, which included a refined location for themortar posi t ion (Target AA0072). Thiswalk-through was a back-brief to the battalioncommander, updated with new intelligence, onhow prepared the units were for the attack andhow well they understood his intent. As therehearsal progressed through the phases of theoperation, each commander discussed how hewould execute his part of the attack. At the sametime, each FSO using his fire support executionmatrix explained how the fire support would beexecuted as the battle unfolds. The ALOinterjected that the CAS will take 20 minutes toget on station once alerted. The battalion
commander directed the CAS to scramble assoon as the companies begin to move towardtheir final objectives. The commander estimated itwill take 30 minutes to reach those objectives. Asthe rehearsal progressed, the battal ioncommander realized that from his position hecould not observe any enemy movement beyondthe intermediate objectives to trigger interdictionof enemy moving to reinforce the intermediateobjectives. The FSO suggested requesting anAFSO for that observation. Also, the battalioncommander determined that alternate attackmeans other than CAS had not been planned onCAS targets. Therefore, he told the FSO torequest the AFSO and to ensure that alternateattack methods were planned. Satisfied that thebattalion at all levels had developed a cohesiveplan that fully incorporated and synchronized firesupport assets into the scheme of maneuver, thecommander ended the rehearsal. He wasconf iden t tha t , w i th minor las t -m inu tepreparations, the battalion was prepared for theupcoming battle.
4-1
FM 6-20-40
EXAMPLE OF FIRE SUPPORT EXECUTION FOR DELlBERATE ATTACK (CONTINUED)
4-2
FM 6-20-40
EXAMPLE OF FIRE SUPPORT EXECUTION FOR DELlBERATE ATTACK (CONTINUED)
4 - 3
FM 6-20-40
EXAMPLE OF FIRE SUPPORT EXECUTION FOR DELlBERATE ATTACK (CONTINUED)
At 0600 the next day, the 1-50 Mech crossed theLD/LC to attack and seize battalion intermediateand final objectives as shown in the offensivediagram. With three companies abreast, thebattalion was moving as fast as possible in thehaze of early morning. As each platoon andcompany reported its progress and position, noindication was given that the enemy was aware ofthe attack. Suddenly, heavy mortar and artilleryfires impacted across Company C forwardelements, causing Company C to slow down andbutton up. The battalion FSO traveling with thebattalion commander behind Company Bimmediately requested that the counterfireprogram be fired.
As the counterfire program was fired, the firesimpact ing on Company C became lessintense; however, intense direct fires are nowbeing received by all companies. Vehicles ofeach company began generating smoke fromtheir smoke generators to better screen theirmovements. The FSOs request that GroupsA1C and A2C be fired. Company A FSOrequests smoke on Target AC2202, CompanyC wants smoke on Target AC2441, andCompany B wants smoke short of theintermediate objective. The battalion FSObegins sorting out the calls for fire andapproves the Company B request using thebattalion mortars.
4-4
FM 6-20-40
EXAMPLE OF FIRE SUPPORT EXECUTION FOR DELlBERATE ATTACK (CONTINUED)
Company B is now meeting very heavy resistanceand has lost several vehicles and personnel. TheFSO for Company B is constantly requesting FAfires to suppress the enemy and smoke to screenthe company. The battalion FSO directs thatGroup A2C be fired again to suppress activeenemy positions on Objective EMERALD.
Company A is making good progress. The FSOfor Company A is keeping the battalion mortarsbusy suppressing the enemy antitank positionsand firing targets. The Company A FSO thenreports that the company lead elements are aboutto reach PL DEBBIE. At this time, all indirect firesare shifted beyond Objective RUBY as thecompany makes the final assault onto thatobjective. Also, the CFL on PL DEBBIE iscancelled and the CFL on PL GREG is put intoeffect.
The battalion commander is concerned that thebattalion is taking too long to seize EMERALDand TOPAZ. He’s worried that the enemy(possible motorized rifle company) at ObjectiveCOOKE will move forward to reinforce. Thebattalion FSO suggests firing Group A4C to try tohold the enemy in place at Objective COOKE orat least to slow his movement. The commanderagrees and Group A4C is fired. Company A hasseized Objective RUBY. The battalion FSOcontacts the COLT with Company A, and hedetermines the COLT can observe ObjectiveCOOKE and cannot see any movement.Therefore, the FSO tails the commander there isno need to fire Group A4C yet.
Meanwhile, Company C is crossing PL DEBBIE inthe final assault on Objective TOPAZ, andCompany B is stalled in the vicinity of AC2042.The Company B fire support sergeant, who tookover for the wounded FSO, continues to direct FAfires against the enemy bunkers and mortarsmoke to screen friendly movement.
The battalion commander issues frag orders toCompany A to attack Objective EMERALD fromthe flank along Axis GRAVEL to relieve pressureon Company B. An RFL is not establishedbecause of the lack of identifiable terrain and thefluid enemy situation. The battalion FSO contactsthe FSOs of Companies A and B to tell them thatall requests for fire must be cleared through himto preclude fratricide.
in the meantime, the battalion FSO has receiveda report from the mortar platoon leader thatmortar smoke is critically low. The commanderand FSO must decide whether to expend all thesmoke to screen the Company B assault onObjective EMERALD or to save some smoke toscreen the battalion assault on the finalobjectives. The commander decides to save thesmoke. The battalion FSO contacts the companyFSOs and the mortars to tail them to fire no moresmoke until the battalion attacks the finalobjectives.
The Company B fire support sergeant reports tothe battalion FSO that suppressive fires areineffective because the enemy is well dug in andthat his company is making little progress withoutthe smoke. The battalion FSO directs thatHE-delay be fired against the fortifications.
The Company A flank assault against ObjectiveEMERALD is also meeting stiff resistance.Company C has consolidated on ObjectiveTOPAZ. The battalion commander directsCompany C to monitor the enemy situation in thevicinity of Objectives COOKE and STONE and beprepared to move out. Forty-five seconds later,one bunker is completely destroyed withHE-delay. Five minutes later, two more bunkersare destroyed and Company B is now able tocontinue the advance.
4-5
FM 6-20-40
EXAMPLE OF FIRE SUPPORT EXECUTION FOR DELlBERATE ATTACK (CONTINUED)
Minutes later, Companies A and B haveconsolidated on Objective EMERALD. Thebattalion commander tells them to be prepared toassault their final objectives within 30 minutes.
Before the final assault, the battalion FSOcontacts the brigade FSO, the DS battalion, thebattalion mortars, and each company FSO –
Ž To get an update on the status of fire
support assets and ammunition availability.
Ž To receive any new Intelligence and targets.
Ž To update his target list.
Ž To revise the fire support plan, if necessary.
Ž TO request a replacement from the brigadeFSO for the wounded FSO of Company B.
Before the assault begins on Objective STONE,the AFSO reports three BMPs moving southtoward Objective TOPAZ. Behind these BMPs, healso sees another BMP with several antennas.The AFSO fires a Copperhead mission on the lastBMP. At the same time, Company C FSO firesDPICM against the three lead BMPs. The AFSOreports the suspected command vehicle has beendestroyed and one of the three BMPs is disabled.The other two are withdrawing back to the north.
The commander orders the battalion to move outto seize their final objectives. The battalion FSOtells the ALO to scramble the CAS.
The battalion is moving quickly now, meetingsporadic light resistance. The battalion FSOrequests that Groups A3C and A4C be fired tokeep the enemy down and in place. Before the
rounds impact, the enemy opens up with directand indirect fires. Suddenly, the rounds impact onGroups A3C and A4C, and the enemy direct firesare temporarily suppressed. The companiesquickly get into position to assault theirobjectives. The battalion FSO cancels the CFL onPL GREG and puts into effect another preplannedCFL beyond the final objectives. He also informsthe company FSOs, the mortars, and the FA unitsthat the smoke restriction is now Iifted. AlmostImmediately, the battalion mortars and the FAbegin shooting smoke rounds to screen friendlymovement.
Before the CAS arrives, the battalion FSO andALO agree on the IP to be used and the egressinstructions. They confirm a 30-second timeseparation. The battalion FSO contacts the FDCto reinitiate Group A4C and Target AC0025. Hedirects that the last round fired on AC0025 bewhite phosphorus. He establishes and initiates a3-minute series with the last valleys to impact 5minutes from his time hack. The FSO coordinatesthe time sequence with the ALO. Thirty secondsafter the impact of the WP, the F-16s and A-7sstrike Objectives COOKE and STONE. CompaniesB and C cross PL GREG. Companies B and Care now able to very quickly consolidate on bothobjectives. Company A had more trouble with Itsobjective but is eventually successful. TheCompany A FSO engages the enemy with indirectfire as the enemy forces withdraw north along theroad.
The FSOs now analyze the terrain around them,discuss possible targets with their respectivecommanders, refine their target Iists, and plan oradjust FPFs to support the battalion againstcounterattacks. Also, they continue planning forthe next operation.
4-6
FM 6-20-40
EXAMPLE OF FIRE SUPPORT EXECUTION FOR DEFENSE IN SECTOR
The night before the expected enemy attack, thebattalion commander conducted a rehearsal onthe actual terrain to be defended the next day. Inattendance were all commanders and FSOs andthe battalion staff. Since the OPORD had beenbriefed earlier in the day, commanders had hadtime to get back to their units and make initialplans for the upcoming defense. This rehearsal onthe terrain showed the battalion commander howwell prepared his units were for the next day’sevents and how well they understood his intent. Italso allowed personnel to check communicationsby using alternate frequencies. The S2 gave anIntelligence update. As the walk-throughprogressed, each commander (using themaneuver execut ion matr ix as a guide)demonstrated his execution of the plan anddescribed how he would react if everything didn’tgo according to the plan. At the same time eachFSO (using his fire support execution matrix)explained how the fire support would be executedas the battle unfolds. Trigger points, Copperheadand/or COLTs, and priority targets were discussedIn detail. During this review, it was discovered thatCOLT 2 would need retransmission (retrans)capability to be effective. Also, to meet observerand firing unit positioning considerations, BatteryC was designated as the Copperhead firing unit.The backup plan for executing priority targets wasalso reviewed. FASCAM emplacement on targetsAR0001 and AR0003 was coordinated with theengineer representative. Satisfied that the battalionat all levels had developed a cohesive plan thatfully incorporated and synchronized fire supportassets into the scheme of maneuver, thecommander ended the rehearsal. He wasconf ident that, w i th m inor las t -m inu tepreparations, the battalion was prepared for thenext battle.
The battalion is now in the initial positions asshown in the battalion defensive diagram. Thebattalion scouts are deployed in a screen alongPL BUICK. The division covering force has
already passed through the 2d Brigade. The twominefields and tank ditches have been completedand plotted on the obstacle overlay by theengineer representative in the battalion FS cell.The COLTs are deployed.
At 0420, the ground surveillance radar detectsenemy movement to the front. At 0515, thescouts detect what they believe is an enemypatrol from a motorized rifle battalion approachingthe forward obstacle at PL BUICK. The scouts, inwell-concealed positions, allow this force tobypass the obstacle. The scouts can now seewhat is probably the enemy forward securityelement approaching the obstacle. This elementconsists of approximately a rifle company inBMPs and four medium tanks.
The position, strength, and rate of movement ofthe enemy forward security element are reportedto the battalion command group forward. Thebattalion commander instructs the scouts toengage this enemy force when it comes intorange. The scout platoon leader instructs theCOLT to locate and engage the enemy companycommander’s vehicle.
The COLT locates the command vehicle,computes its rate of advance, and establishes atr igger point . The COLT completes thepreformatted message, transmits it, and waits forthe target to come into the Copperhead footprintbefore lasing it.
The COLT has also requested DPICM to buttonup the other vehicles. As the Copperhead roundand DPICM impact, the scouts open fire withtube-launched, optically tracked, wire guidedmissiles (TOWs) against the enemy tanks andwith their 25-mm guns against the BMPs. Thesurviving enemy vehicles immediately begin togenerate smoke to conceal theirmove toward defilade positions.
positions and
4-7
FM 6-20-40
EXAMPLE OF FIRE SUPPORT EXECUTION FOR DEFENSE IN SECTOR (CONTINUED)
4 - 8
FM 6-20-40
EXAMPLE OF FIRE SUPPORT EXECUTION FOR DEFENSE IN SECTOR (CONTINUED)
4-9
FM 6-20-40
EXAMPLE OF FIRE SUPPORT EXECUTION FOR DEFENSE IN SECTOR (CONTINUED)
The COLT uses a series of predeterminedIocations (trigger points) on likely avenues ofapproach to engage the fast-moving enemy. TheCOLT calls for fire as the enemy crosses thetrigger points to ensure massed fires strike theenemy as he enters the engagement area.
The COLT sees a type 1 artillery command andreconnaissance vehicle (ACRV) moving towardthe remaining BMPs in the engagement area. TheCOLT locates the ACRV, processes the mission,and directs a Copperhead round onto the enemyvehicle.
Enemy artillery is now impacting around the scoutpositions. The COLT reports this information to
the battalion FSO, who relays it to the brigadeFSO. The brigade FSO requests counterfire.Three minutes later, BATTALION 4 ROUNDS isfired at the enemy artillery, temporarily silencing it.
The advance guard (battalion [-]) of the enemyforce can now be seen approaching from thenorth in preassault formation. The enemy patrolthat was allowed to bypass the scouts has nowrun into the obstacles in front of BPs 11 and 12,and one vehicle is disabled. The enemy engineersquad marks the obstacles while the otherelements try to find gaps in the barriers.Companies A and B open fire and destroy theentire patrol.
4-10
FM 6-20-40
EXAMPLE OF FIRE SUPPORT EXECUTION FOR DEFENSE IN SECTOR (CONTINUED)
Suddenly, extremely heavy artillery concentrationsImpact on Companies A and B and the forwardelements. The battalion FSO, believing this is thestart of the main attack, contacts the brigadeFSO and requests that the counterpreparation befired. The brigade commander approves therequest, and the brigade FSO forwards themission to the division FS cell. The request isapproved, and soon the 10-minute divisioncounterpreparation begins. Under the cover of theheavy artillery concentrations, the advance guardbreaches and bypasses the forward obstacle,making the forward positions untenable. Thebattalion commander directs that the scoutswithdraw to their position along the west flank ofCompany A. COLT 2 withdraws with the scouts.The CFL on PL BUICK is cancelled, and the CFLon PL PLYMOUTH is put into effect. COLT 2positions itself on the hill mass in the vicinity ofBP 21 observing to the northeast.
As soon as the lead company of the advanceguard is within sight, the FOs of Companies Aand B begin requesting fires to slow down andbutton up the enemy with DPICM. The leadenemy company now moves from prebattleformation to a wedge attack formation. The leadcompany also has two T-72s with the KMT-4mine-clearing plows attached. The enemy attackseems to be heavier in front of Company A.
As enemy forces encounter the obstacles, theyput the T-72s with mine-clearing plows in the frontto try to force their way through. Both companiesfire on the enemy while the company FSOsrequest fire on Targets AR3003, AR3004, andAR3005 to halt the enemy breaching attempt.TOWs fired at the mine-clearing vehicles disableone of the T-72s.
As the enemy force begins probing along theobstacles to find gaps, the Company Acommander and FSO can see the enemy main
force moving up very quickly in prebattleformation. The FSO immediately requests allavailable fires to slow and canalize the mainbody. Four minutes later, fires from two battalionsand two MLRS launchers impact along the lengthof the enemy main body. The battalion S3 airalso requests the battalion CAS mission to attackthe enemy main force. The battalion FSO willcoordinate the FA WP marking rounds.
The enemy lead company at the obstacles hasnow dismounted its infantry, and forces havebegun to move into the hills on the right flank ofCompany B. The enemy tanks and BMPs try tosuppress Companies A and B to allow enemyInfantry to advance more quickly. However, thecompany FSOs request and receive battalionmortar fires against the dismounted infantry,causing the enemy forces to halt and take cover.
Enemy engineer vehicles are identified trying toclear the minefield to the front of Company Awhile a T-54 carrying an MT-55 bridge is seenmoving toward the antitank ditch. The enemybegins building a heavy smoke screen to obscurethe obstacle-breaching efforts. The Company AFSO requests a shift from Target AR3004 withDPICM to better engage the enemy whileCompany A tries to halt the breach with directfires. Meanwhile, Company B is receivingsporadically intense fires from the dismountedenemy in the hills to the right of the Company Bposition.
The main body of the motorized rifle regiment(MRR), now 1 kilometer behind the lead battalion,moves behind the forest to the left frank ofCompany A and dismounts its infantry. The flankplatoon FO requests VT on those dismountedenemy troops in the open. The rounds impact,causing approximately 30 casualties, but theenemy infantry troops are still able to get into theforest.
4-11
FM 6-20-40
EXAMPLE OF FIRE SUPPORT EXECUTION FOR DEFENSE IN SECTOR (CONTINUED)
As the enemy armor forces move toward theCompany A position, they are acquired by COLT3. The COLT initiates a Copperhead mission. Atthe same time, the FSO receives word from theALO that the aircraft is at the IP. The FSOcancels the Copperhead mission and directs theCOLT to Iase for the TACAIR. The FSO verifiesthe PRF codes and frequencies with the ALO andpasses them to the COLT. The CAS mission thenattacks the enemy formations, using acombination of Maverick and 30-mm cannon. Themission destroys three vehicles and disables fiveothers.
As the smoke clears around the obstacles, theenemy can be seen driving across the emplacedbridge and through a lane in the mine-field to thefront of Company A. Battalion mortars areemployed against the enemy dismounted troopsin the forest, who are beginning to put heavypressure on the flank of Company A.
The battalion commander directs Company D tomove to BP 31. The company FSO requestssuppressive fires to slow the enemy advance untilCompany D reaches its next position. TargetAR3004 is fired with DPICM and the FA-deliveredFASCAM (Target AR0001 ) is also fired.
The enemy, in approximately battalion (-) strength,is now driving toward BP 21. COLT 2 to the rearof Company C detects, engages, and destroysanother suspected command vehicle.
The battalion FSO requests all available fires (shellDPICM) from the brigade FSO. The brigade FSOcontacts the division FS cell, requesting as muchsupport as possible for the mission. The requestis approved and the fires of four FA battalionsimpact on the lead enemy formation, destroying
or disabling seven vehicles and temporarilybringing the enemy advance to a halt.
The main enemy force is now within range ofCompany C in BP 21 and Company D in BP 31and is within antitank weapon range. The battalioncommander directs the FSO to reseed thebreached minefield in front of BP 11. The FSOadjusts the FASCAM in from Target AR3004. Asthe enemy attack on BP 21 withers from heavydirect and indirect fires, Company A reestablishesBP 11.
All companies consolidate and begin to improvetheir positions in preparation for the enemysecond echelon to attack. Company D reoccupiesBP 22. The battalion is now at about 60 percentstrength. Company A destroys the bridgeemplaced over the antitank ditch. EngineerFASCAM is emplaced to close the gaps createdby the enemy.
Before the next attack, the battalion FSOcontinues planning and coordinating fire support.He talks to the S2 and the targeting officer to findout what the enemy is likely to do next and howthat impacts on the fire support plan and targetlist. He contacts the brigade FSO to getinformation on the status of fire support assets,their positions, and ammunition status. He alsoasks about changes to the priority of fires, if any,and changes to target lists. He must alsodetermine the status of the battalion mortars. Ashe gathers all this information, he constantlyupdates the company FSOs.
Most importantly, he maintains constant contactwith the battalion commander and S3 to provideinput and make changes to the fire support planon the basis of the commander’s modifications tothe scheme of maneuver.
4-12
FM 6-20-40
APPENDIX A
FIRE SUPPORT ASSETS
Section I. FIELD ARTILLERY
This section Implements STANAG 2887, Edition 3, and QSTAG 217, Edition 2.
Missions its massive firepower. It can deliver nuclear,chemical, and massed conventional fires
The mission of the field artillery is to destroy, rapidly within a large area and on a wideneutralize, or suppress the enemy by cannon, front, under all conditions of visibility, weather,rocket, and missile fire and to help integrate and terrain. The four tactical missions andall fire support into combined arms operations. seven inherent responsibilities of the fieldThe primary characteristic of field artillery is artillery are outlined in the first table below.
SEVEN INHERENT RESPONSIBILITIES OF FIELD ARTILLERYSTANDARD TACTICAL MISSIONS
AN FA UNIT WITH GENERAL SUPPORTA MISSION OF- DIRECT SUPPORT REINFORCING REINFORCING GENERAL SUPPORT
Answers calls for 1. Supported unit. 1. Reinforced FA. 1, Force FA HQ. 1. Force FA HQ.ire in priority 2. Own observers.1 2. Own observers. 1 2. Reinforced unit. 2. Own observers.1
rom – 3. Force FA HQ. 3. Force FA HQ. 3. Own observers.1
Has as its zone Zone of action of Zone of fire of Zone of action of Zone of action ofof fire- supported unit. reinforced FA. supported unit to supported unit.
include zone of fireof reinforced FA unit.
Furnishes FIST or Provides temporary No requirement. No requirement. No requirement,FSE2- replacements for
casualty losses asrequired.
Furnishes liaison No requirement. To reinforced FA To reinforced FA unit No requirement,officer- unit HQ. HQ.
Establishes FSOs and Reinforced FA unit Reinforced FA unit No requirement.communications supported HQ. HQ.with- maneuver unit HQ.
Is positioned by – DS FA unit Reinforced FA unit Force FA HQ or Force FA HQ.commander or as or as ordered by reinforced FA unit ifordered by force force FA HQ, approved by forceFA HQ. FA HQ.
Has its fires Develops own fire Reinforced FA unit Force FA HQ. Force FA HQ.planned by- plans. HQ.
1Includes all target acquisition means not deployed with supported unit (radar, aerial observers, survey parties,and so forth.)2An FSE for each maneuver brigade, battalion, or cavalry squadron and one FIST with each naneuvercompany or ground cavalry troop are trained and deployed by the FA unit authorized these assets by TOE.After deployment, FISTs and FSEs remain with the supported maneuver unit throughout the conflict.
A-1 A-2 FOLDOUT
FM 6-20-40
The second table shows the tasks andresponsibilities for control of artillery in anABCA (Australia, Britain, Canada, America)operation.
TACTICAL TASKS AND RESPONSIBILITIES FOR CONTROL OF ARTILLERY (ABCA)
ARTILLERYWITH A ANSWERS CALLS ESTABLISHES FURNISHES WEAPONS MOVED NATIONS TO WHICH
TACTICAL FOR FIRE IN ESTABLISHES COMMUNICATION FORWARD AND DEPLOYED BY HAS AS ITS ZONE HAS ITS FIRES TERMINOLOGYTASK OF PRIORITY FROM LIAISON WITH WITH OBSERVERS TO1 (POSITIONED BY) OF FIRE PLANNED BY APPLIES
Direct Directly supported Directly supported Directly supported Each maneuver Direct support artillery Zone of action of the Develops own firesupport
usformation or unit. maneuver formation or formation or unit company of the unit commander or as directly supportedOwn observers.
plans in coordinationunit. (battalion, regiment, or directly supported ordered by force field formation or unit. with directly supported
Force field artillery.2 brigade). formation or unit. artillery HQ. formation or unit.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Directly supported
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Directly supported Directly supported
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..Directly supported Next higher artillery HQ. Zone of action of the Artillery formation or
formation or unit. formation or unit.UK
formation or unit. formation or unit. directly supportedAny other formation or
unit in direct support in CAformation or unit or as conjunction with AS
unit as authorized by ordered by higher directly supportedthe controlling HQ. artillery HQ. formation or unit.
In Support Supported formation or No inherent No inherent No inherent Next higher artillery HQ. Zone of action of the Next higher artillery HQ. U Kunit. requirement. requirement. requirement. supported formation orAny other formation or unit or as ordered by CAunit as authorized by higher artillery HQ. ASthe controlling HQ.
At Priority Formation or unit to No inherent No inherent No inherent Next higher artillery HQ. Zone of action of the Formation or unit to U KCall which placed at priority requirement. requirement. requirement. formation or unit to which placed at priority CA
call. which placed at priority call. ASAny other supported ceil or as ordered byformation or unit. higher artillery HQ.Any other formation orunit as authorized bythe controlling HQ.
General Force field artillery HQ2 No inherent No inherent No inherent Force field artillery HQ.2 Zone of action of the Force field artillery HQ.2
Supportus
and target acquisition requirement. requirement. requirement. supported formation orartillery. unit or zone prescribed.Own observers.
General Force field artillery HQ Reinforced artillery unit. Reinforced artillery unit. Reinforced artillery unit Force field artillery HQ2 Zone of action of the Force field artillery HQ2
supportus
Reinforced artillery unit. if approved by force or reinforced artilleryReinforcing Own observers.
supported formation or or as otherwise ASfield artillery HQ. 1,2 unit if approved by unit to include zone of specified.Applies also to the pro- force field artillery HQ.2 fire of the reinforcedvision of liaison officers. artillery unit.
Reinforcing Reinforced artillery unit. Reinforced artillery unit. Reinforced artillery HQ Reinforced field artillery Reinforced artillery unit Zone of fire of the Reinforced artillery unit.Own observers.
usunit. Applies also to or as ordered by force reinforced artillery unit
Force field artillery HQ.2 the provision of liaison field artillery HQ. or zone prescribed.officers.
LEGEND: AS = Australia CA = Canada1The US will not furnish forward observers but will furnish fire support teams (on request).2Force artillery headquarters or higher artillery headquarters. UK = United Kingdom u s = United States
A-2 FOLDIN A-2
FM 6-20-40
EmploymentAn FA battalion is normally placed in directsupport of a maneuver brigade. The directsupport FA battalion may have one or moreFA battalions reinforcing it. Generally, thebrigade FSO coordinates field artillerypositioning within the brigade zone; however,the battalion FSO may be required tocoordinate positioning in the battalion zonewith the battalion commander and/or S3. In abrigade zone, priorities for positioning are asfollows:
• Direct support units.
• Reinforcing units.
• Divisional GSR, then GS units.
• Corps GSR, then GS units.
ConsiderationsAn FSO must consider the following inplanning FA support:
• Assigned tactical mission.
• Number and caliber of artillery units insupport.
• Range capabilities, including specialmunitions and rocket-assisted projectiles(RAPs).
Ž Effects of munitions available and quantity onhand.
• Position location to include primary,alternate, supplementary, and futurepositions.
• Size of the final protective fire.
• Radius of burst.
• Maximum and sustained rates of fire.
Multiple Launch Rocket SystemThe MLRS is a highly mobile, rapid-fire,free-flight rocket delivery means designed tocomplement cannon artillery in all fire supportroles. The MLRS provides potential forinterdiction fires against high-payoff targets 15to 30 kilometers (km) from the front line oftroops.
Organization
MLRS battalions are assigned to corps, andMLRS batteries are organic to the armoredand mechanized infantry divisions. Eachbattalion will have three firing batteries withnine launchers in each battery. All MLRSfiring batteries are organized identically andare capable of operating independently fromtheir parent headquarters. MLRS units, like allFA units, are organized for combat by thedesignation of a command relationship and theassignment of a tactical mission.
Mission
Unlike most other FA units, MLRS batteriesoperating independently of battalions may beassigned tactical missions. The mostappropriate standard tactical mission for anMLRS unit is general support. An MLRS unitcan perform only nonstandard versions ofgeneral support reinforcing and reinforcingmissions, because it lacks the personnel andequipment to establish liaison with thereinforced unit. An MLRS unit should not beassigned a mission of direct support. The needfor moving after firing, ammunition constraints,and lack of communications prevent theMLRS unit from effectively performing a DSmission.
MunitionsThe central component of the MLRS is theself-propelled launcher-loader (SPLL). Thelauncher can fire 12 rockets per minute. Eachrocket can be loaded with dual-purpose(antipersonnel and/or antimateriel) bomblets.
A-3
FM 6-20-40
The bomblets of one rocket cover an arearoughly equivalent to three football fields.The launcher can be reloaded in 10 minutes.
Section II.
MissionMortars are the only organic indirect firesupport asset in the maneuver arms arsenal.Mortars provide responsive high-angle firesthat can kill the enemy, suppress enemy fires,and conceal the movement of friendly forces.Therefore, it is extremely important to includemortar fires in the fire support plan. TheFSO’s doctrinal responsibility is limited torecommending the integration of mortars intothe fire support plan. For considerations ofmortar employment, refer to FM 7-90. Someof the areas with which the FSO must beconcerned are as follows:
• Characteristics and capabilities.
• Support and command relationships.
Ž Employment.
MORTARS
• Displacement.
Characteristics and CapabilitiesThe maneuver battalion mortar platoonconsists of six 107-mm (4.2-inch) mortars(three sections with two mortars each). Eachmortar is track-mounted in an M106A1 (anM113 chassis), which can carry 88 rounds ofammunition. Listed below are specificcharacteristics that the FSO must considerwhen including mortars in the fire supportp lan .
When planning mortar fires, the FSO mustconsider the high rate of fire and theammunition availability. A mortar platoon canfire over 300 rounds in less than 5 minutes.As a result, the ammunition supply may beexhausted very quickly.
A - 4
FM 6-20-40
Support and CommandRelationships
Support and command relationships are meansby which the commander can designatepriorities for mortar fires or establishcommand relationships. Previously, mortarsand other battalion organic assets were givenmissions of direct or general support. Becausemortars are organic to the battalion, theassignment of such missions is not necessary.However, the commander must clearlyestablish priorities of fire as required.
Priorities
The commander may specify support byassigning priority of fires and/or prioritytarget(s) to a subordinate unit.
Command Relationships
There may be situations in which the mortarplatoon cannot support all of the battalionwhile remaining under battalion control. Thismay occur when a maneuver unit is given amission that separates it from its parent unit.In those situations, a platoon or a section maybe placed under operational control of or beattached to the supported unit.
Operational Control. This gives a commander theauthority to direct forces provided him to dospecific missions, usually limited by function,time, or location. The commander controls thetactical employment, movement, and missionsof the mortars. He is not responsible forlogistical or administrative support.
Attachment. This temporary relationship givesthe commander receiving the attachment thesame degree of command and control (C2) ashe has over units organic to his command.The commander selects the general location ofthe attached mortar element and controls itsdeployment as well as its fires. He is alsoresponsible for logistical support and securityof the mortars. Attachment is appropriatewhen units are assigned independent missions.
EmploymentThe commander has three options inconsidering how to employ the battalionmortar platoon. It can be employed byplatoon, by section, or by squad. Each squadconsists of one mortar and its crew. Squadscan be grouped together into sections. Finally,the entire platoon may be employed together.Selected options are based on commander’sguidance, METT-T, and priority of fires. TheFSO must be prepared to advise thecommander on which option to use. (See thetable of tactical tasks and responsibilties forcontrol of artillery.) When employing mortars,the FSO must consider the following:
• Mortars can provide responsive smoke andillumination fires.
Ž Mortars are most effective againstsoft-skinned targets.
Ž Their high-angle trajectories make mortarseffective against targets masked or indefilade.
• High-angle fires are easily detected by enemyradars.
• High-angle fires are adversely affected bystrong winds.
• Mortar positions are seldom surveyed;therefore, more adjustments are needed andsurprise may be lost when targets areattacked. (Overcome this by requesting FAsurvey support.)
• Mortars are effective in military operationson urban terrain (MOUT).
• METT-T must be considered when mortarsare employed. General positioning guidelinesare as follows:
Ž In the offense, one-half to two-thirds of themaximum range should be in front of leadelements.
A-5
FM 6-20-40
In the defense, one-third to one-half of themaximum range should be in front of theforward elements.
Positions should be selected to minimizethe number of moves required.
The mortars must be able to displacequickly and provide continuous support.
Platoon Employment
The platoon operates from one or two firingpositions and fires as one unit. The best wayto position a platoon with four or moremortars is to place the platoon sections in twoseparate locations, at least 300 meters apart.However, this distance must be based on theterrain, the ability to cover the sector, andlimits in command and control. A platoonlocated in a single area enhances commandand control and local security but is morevulnerable to enemy counterfire. The FDCsare trained to mass fires from separatelocations onto a single target.
Section Employment
This places each section as a separate firingunit. The mortar platoon is normally employedby section to cover wider frontages. Eachsection is positioned so it can provide fireswithin the zone of action of the supportedmaneuver element. When the platoon isemployed by section, each section has an FDCor a computer. Depending on the range totarget and separation of sections, more thanone section may be able to mass fires on thesame target.
Squad EmploymentThis places one or more mortar squads on thebattlefield as separate firing units. This isusually done to support special requirements,such as—
• One-mortar illumination mission(s).
• Roving mortar adjustments.
• Antiarmor ambushes.
• Support of a very wide front.
• Coverage of a large front by the maneuverelement.
• Support for critical installations during rearcombat operations.
DisplacementIt is essential that the mortars displace quicklyand remain flexible to provide continuous firesupport. On the basis of the scheme ofmaneuver, the mortar platoon leader forms adisplacement plan in support of the fire plan.The displacement plan is a map overlayshowing initial positions, subsequent positions,routes between the positions, and any controlmeasures in effect.
Considerations for selecting displacementtechniques are described below.
Displacement Techniques
By Platoon. Displacement by platoon may beused when contact with the enemy is unlikely.In this method of displacement—
• The need for speed outweighs the need forimmediately available fires.
• Accurate and timely response to calls for fireis sacrificed; therefore, greater reliance isplaced on hip shoots.
• Command and control problems are minimal.
By Section. Displacement by section is slowerthan displacement by platoon. In displacementby section—
Ž Continuous accurate fires are required.
A-6
FM 6-20-40
• Speed is essential. Generally, the alternate bounds method is
Ž Command and control is more difficult.
By Individual Squad. Displacement by individualsquad is the slowest technique. In thismethod—
Ž The need for continuous fire outweighs theneed for speed.
• Command and control is extremely difficult.
Movement Options
Two movement options are available—successive bounds and alternate bounds.
used to keep up with supported elementswhen displacement is rapid. The successivebounds method is used when the maneuverelement movements are not so rapid.
Successive Bounds. In this technique, part ofthe platoon is moved to the next position.After that subelement is in position and readyto fire, the rest of the platoon moves to thesame position.
Alternate Bounds. In this technique, part of theplatoon is moved to the next position. Afterthat subelement is in position and ready tofire, the rest of the platoon moves to adifferent position. This method of movementapplies to both the offense and the defense.
A-7
FM 6-20-40
Section III. TACTICAL AIR SUPPORT
MissionsTACAIR supports the AirLand Battle byproviding interdiction (air interdiction [AI] andbattlefield air interdiction [BAI]) and close airsupport missions. At the brigade and battalionlevels, CAS will be the primary supportmission. CAS involves air actions againsthostile targets that are in close proximity tofriendly forces and require detailed integrationof each air mission with the fire andmovement of friendly forces. CAS includes thedelivery of munitions by Air Force, Navy, andMarine Corps aircraft. The missions aredistributed to each corps by the landcomponent commander (cdr). The corpscommander then further distributes the CASmissions down the Army chain of command.Usually, CAS missions are distributed nolower than brigade. CAS targets are eitherpreplanned or immediate.
Preplanned Close Air SupportPreplanned CAS may be categorized asfollows:
• Scheduled mission— CAS strike on a plannedtarget at a planned time (TOT).
Ž Alert mission— CAS strike on a plannedtarget or target area executed whenrequested by the supported unit. Usually, thismission is launched from a ground alert(scramble), but it may be flown from anairborne alert status. Alert (on-call) CASallows the ground commander to designate ageneral target area within which targets mayneed to be attacked. The ground commanderdesignates a conditional period within whichhe will later determine specific times forattacking the targets.
To plan CAS, the S3 air must work closelywith the S3, FSO, and ALO.
Requirements that can be foreseen in time tobe included in the tactical air control center(TACC) air tasking order (ATO) areforwarded as preplanned air requests. Groundunit planners must forward CAS requests assoon as they can be forecast. These requestsfor CAS normally do not include detailedtiming information because of the lead timeinvolved. Preplanned CAS requests involveany information, even general informationabout planned schemes of maneuver, that canbe used in the apportionment, allocation, anddistribution cycle. Estimates of weapons effectsneeded by percentage (for example, 60 percentantiarmor and 40 percent antipersonnel),sortie time flows, peak need times, andanticipated distribution patterns are vital topreplanning the air tasking order. The ALOsand S3s at all planning echelons must ensurethat such information is forwarded through thebattlefield control element (BCE) as soon as itis foreseen by the echelon planners, Do notwait to plan all details of individual CAS missions before forwarding preplanning data tohigher echelons.
There are specific request channels forpreplanned CAS. Requests for preplannedtactical air support missions are submitted tothe FS cell. The commander, ALO, and S3 ateach echelon evaluate the request; coordinatesuch requirements as airspace, fires, andintelligence; consolidate; and if approved,assign a priority or precedence to the request.The S3 air then forwards approved requests byArmy communications nets to the next higherechelon. The FS cell of the corps main CPmakes the final consolidation and approvespreplanned requests for TACAIR support.After approval, the requests become theground force request that is passed throughthe BCE to the TACC for execution. Therequestor is notified of the approval. Therequestor is also notified if requests aredisapproved at any echlon. The TACC doesthe necessary planning and includes the
A-8
FM 6-20-40
mission in the ATO for execution. Requestsfor CAS that do not reach the TACC in timeto be included in the ATO are treated by theair support operations center the same asimmediate requests.
The CAS aircraft assigned to attackpreplanned targets may be diverted to higherpriority targets; therefore, the FSO should planfor the engagement of CAS targets byalternate fire support assets. Specific planningconsiderations are as follows:
• Unit mission.
• Enemy air defenses. What are the enemy airdefense capabilities?
• Terrain. Does the terrain restrict the use ofany type of munition or aircraft?
• Weather. Does the weather favor the use ofaircraft? What is the weather forecast for theimmediate future?
• Time available for planning.
Ž Weapons effects. What types of targets are tobe engaged and what are the desired weaponseffects?
• Command control, and communications.
• Mission response time.
• Close air support and artillery integration.
A-9
FM 6-20-40
Immediate Close Air SupportImmediate requests are used for air supportmission requirements that were identified toolate to be included in the current air taskingorder. They are sent through specific requestchannels.
Those requests initiated below battalion levelare forwarded to the battalion command postby the most rapid means available. Atbattalion level, the commander, ALO, and S3consider each request. Approved requests aretransmitted by the TACP over the Air Forceair request net directly to the ASOCcollocated with the corps tactical operationscenter (CTOC) or separate division TOC. TheTACP at each intermediate headquartersmonitors and acknowledges receipt of therequest. Silence by an intermediate TACPindicates approval by the associatedheadquarters unless, within a specified period,a disapproval is transmitted. The ASOC
coordinates the request with the corps G3 airfor all air support requests initiated by thecorps. Meanwhile, intermediate TACPs passthe request to the associated headquarters G3or S3 for action and coordination. Allechelons coordinate simultaneously. If anyArmy echelon above the initiating leveldisapproves a request or substitutes anothersupport means (for example, Army aviation orfield artillery), the TACP at that headquartersnotifies the ASOC at corps and the originatingTACP, which notifies the requestor. When thecorps commander or his representativeapproves the request, the ASOC initiates thenecessary action to satisfy the request. If alldistributed sorties are committed, the corpscommander can request additional sortiesfrom the next higher echelon, whenappropriate. If the ASOC has no CASmissions available, it can, with Armyconcurrence, divert sorties from lower prioritytargets or request support from lateral orhigher commands.
A-1O
FM 6-20-40
OrganizationAt brigade and battalion levels, a TACPadvises the maneuver commander on thecapabilities and proper use of air support,requests immediate CAS through the AirForce request net, helps with planning ifrequired, and provides final control of CASmissions. At brigade, the TACP is composedof two Air Force ALOs who are trained tocontrol air strikes and two noncommissionedofficers (NCOs) called tactical air commandand control specialists (TACCSs). At battalion,the TACP is composed of one ALO and twoenlisted specialists. At least one TACCS perbattalion TACP is qualified as an ETAC(qualified to control CAS sorties).
The person who has final control of CASmissions, formerly referred to as the forwardair controller (FAC), will vary from mission tomission according to the situation. Threatpermitting, the AFAC is best able to controlCAS because of his mobility, wide field ofobservation, and improved line-of-sightcommunications. If an AFAC is not available,the ALO and ETAC members of the TACPare qualified to control CAS from the ground.In this manual, the term FAC has been usedto refer to the particular individual – ALO,ETAC, or AFAC – who performs the finalcoordination and control of CAS missions.
Attack CoordinationAfter submitting a CAS request, the TACPand FIST must take a number of actionsbefore munitions can hit the target.
Communications
Radio frequencies (primary and alternate) andlaser designation settings used by FISTs,TACPs, AFACs, tactical aircontrollers-airborne (TAC-As), and tacticalfighters should be predetermined andforwarded to all parties. Not all CAS aircrafthave frequency modulated (FM) radios. The
TACP may have to relay FIST FMtransmissions to the fighters by ultrahighfrequency (UHF) (Have Quick) or very highfrequency (VHF) if available. The Army SOPis to operate FM-secure. Most Air Force FMis not secure-capable. Even if it issecure-capable, Air Force FM is notcompatible with the Army secure FM becauseof encoding procedures.
Authentication
Proper authentication procedures must beused during CAS missions. Becausei n t r a s e r v i c e A i r F o r c e a n d A r m yauthentication tables differ, each air andground element must obtain the jointauthenticator, AKAC-1553, through unitcommunications security (COMSEC)custodians. This joint authenticator, which hasbeen developed for crisis or contingency andexercise use only, is called the dryad numeralauthentication system. This system is used forjoint interoperability worldwide and is part ofthe intertheater COMSEC package.
Tactical Air Control Party Functions
The battalion TACP directs contact between aFAC and a FIST on a common frequency.The FAC moves to where he can observe thetarget. When the FAC arrives, the FISTorients him to the target, friendly positions,and known enemy air defense artillery (ADA)positions. If no FAC is available, the TACPcontacts the FIST. The FIST becomes the eyesfor the TACP in the target area. These actionstake place while higher echelons process theair request.
After approval of the air request, either theTACP or the TAC-A or both receive fightermission data from the ASOC. Data include —
• Mission number.
Ž Fighter call sign.
A-11
FM 6-20-40
Ž Number and type of aircraft.
Ž Ordnance.
• Time on target.
While the air request is being processed, theFAC, battalion ALO, or TACP determinesadditional mission-essential information. Suchinformation includes, but is not limited to —
• Updated target location and identificationmeans.
• Availability of fires for SEAD.
• Fighter communications capability.
Ž Attack restrictions.
• Friendly AD considerations.
• Time factors for the attack.
If the aircraft have airborne laser spot trackers(LSTs), the laser setting must be passed to theattack aircraft. If the aircraft have laser-guidedweapons (LGWs), the laser setting to be used(Army setting for LSTs, Air Force setting forLGWs) and the laser target line must bepassed to the TACP.
When the aircraft arrive in the target area, theTACP gives them current target information,navigation data, and a verbal picture of thespecific target. The FAC must pass enoughinformation to enable the pilots to positivelyidentify the targets. If required, he callscorrections from target marks or the flightleader’s bombs. He is prepared to abort theattack if the safety of friendly troops isthreatened. During the entire attack, the FACwatches for enemy surface-to-air fires andwarns the aircraft accordingly.
After the attack, the FAC or FIST or bothsend their bomb damage assessment (BDA) tothe TACP. The TACP relays the BDA to theappropriate headquarters.
Airborne Forward Air ControllerFunctions
The airborne FAC, when available, usuallyoperates in a fixed-wing aircraft. With hisexcellent mobility and improved line-of-sightcommunications, he is better able to observeand describe the target. His functions are—
• To coordinate with the TACP and groundcommander.
Ž To relay CAS requests if required.
• To observe the target.
Ž To provide or relay the mission briefing tothe flight leader.
Ž To provide final attack control when thethreat permits.
Ž To mark the target with WP rockets.
• To observe (if possible) and report BDA.
Fire Support Team Functions
As new targets appear, the company FIST maybe in the best observation position. The FISTcan help in CAS by orienting the FAC to thetarget, friendly positions, and enemy ADA.The FIST should also prepare to initiateon-call SEAD and to mark the target.
If no FAC is available, the FIST becomes theeyes of the battalion TACP. Target data fromthe FIST are relayed to the fighters by theTACP. Should troop safety so require, theFIST calls for a mission-abort through theTACP. He also passes munitions correctionsand assesses mission results. Regardless of thetype of munitions used, Air Force missionresults are referred to as BDA.
If no AFAC or battalion TACP is available inan emergency, the FIST will direct tacticalfighters that are equipped with compatible
A-12
FM 6-20-40
radios. In this case, the brigade TACPprepares the CAS mission briefing.
Laser Target Designation ProceduresThe TACP coordinates with the FIST on usinglasers to accurately mark targets for aircraftwith airborne LSTs. A FIST can mark a targetby placing a laser spot on or near the target.The LST-equipped aircraft receives thereflected laser energy, locks onto it, anddisplays an aiming cue in the pilot’s head-updisplay (HUD). The pilot uses the aiming cueto locate the target and aim the aircraftweapons.
The LST on the A-7 is called a targetidentifier set, laser (TISL) and on the A-10aircraft, a Pave Penny. The Air Force usesFIST laser settings with Pave Penny or TISL,while the FIST uses the Air Force laser settingfor Air Force LGWs. When Air Force settingsare required, the TACP passes them to theFIST. The USAF laser code is a four-digitnumber; the first digit is always 1. The Armylaser code uses the last three digits of theUSAF code. The laser code setting of threedigits is passed in the CAS briefing.
Even when using laser designations, TACPsand FISTs should also consider marking withsmoke. Marking smoke allows a pilot to pointhis LST accurately enough to acquire the laserspot. Caution should be used to avoidlaser-to-target visibility problems orattenuation problems caused by the smoke.However, without marking rounds, aircraft maybe pointed too far away from the target areafor the LST to acquire the laser spot.
Effective employment of laser designationdepends on timely and correct radio callsbetween the FAC or FIST and the CASaircraft. When using a laser, the pilot willmake the following radio calls:
Ž 10 SECONDS (time until LASER ON callexpected).
• LASER ON.
• SPOT.
•TERMINATE.
Saying 10 SECONDS means the pilot wantsthe laser on in approximately 10 seconds. TheFAC relays the call to the laser designatoroperator (LDO).
LASER ON directs the FAC or FIST toensure that the LDO designates the targetimmediately. Maximum laser designation timeis usually 20 seconds. The pilot may request alonger laser-on time by saying LASER ON andthe time; for example, LASER ON, 30SECONDS. The FAC should acknowledge thiscall.
The pilot calls SPOT when he acquires thelaser spot. This confirms to the FAC and thepilot’s wingman that the pilot sees thedesignated target.
The last call in the sequence is TERMINATE.The pilot makes this call to turn the laser off.Minimizing laser-on time is important in alaser countermeasures environment and whenbattery-operated laser designators are used.The LDO will turn the designator off—
• When the LDO hears TERMINATE.
Ž When the weapon hits the target.
• After 20 seconds (or longer, if requested).
Detailed information on CAS laser proceduresis in TRADOC Pamphlet 34-3.
After a request for immediate CAS isapproved, the TACP and FIST perform thefunctions shown on the next page.
A-13
FM 6-20-40
LASER TARGET DESIGNATION FUNCTIONS OF TACTICAL AIR CONTROL PARTYAND FIRE SUPPORT TEAM
WHEN FAC CAN OBSERVE TARGET WHEN FAC CANNOT OBSERVE TARGET
The FAC locates— The TACP passes the following target Informationfrom the FIST to the TAC-A or flight leader
• The target.
• Friendly forces. Ž Target location.
Ž Enemy air defense. Ž Description.
• Location of friendly forces.
The FAC passes the mission briefing. • FIST frequencies and call signs.
• Laser code.
The FAC requests, as required—
Ž AD suppression. The TACP requests, as required—
• Target marking. Ž AD suppression.
• Abort code (from fighters). • Target marking.
Ž Abort code (from fighters).
The FAC —
• Considers troop safely. The TACP is prepared to relay the followinginstructions to the flight leader
• Warns flight leader of enemy AD fires.
Ž Orients flight leader to target.• Orientation to the target.
• Abort calls• Calls corrections.
Ž AD warnings.• Provides BDA.
• Corrections.
• Troop safety.The FIST helps the FCA—
• Locate the target. The TACP relays bomb assessment from the FIST.
• Locate friendly forces.
• Locate enemy air defense.The FIST passes target information to the TAC-A
Ž Initiate and control on-call SEAD. and is prepared—• Mark with smoke, or laser-designate the target. • To initiate and control on-call SEAD.Ž Integrate fire support with CAS. • To mark with smoke or laser-designate the
target.
• To pick up fighters visually, if possible.
Ž To orient fighters to the target.
• To call corrections, if appropriate.
• To call ABORT (danger to friendly ground or airforces or wrong target), if required.
• To provide BDA.
A-14
FM 6-20-40
Planning ConsiderationsCAS mission success is directly related tothorough mission planning. Planners mustconsider weather, target acquisition, targetidentification, identification of friendly forces,general ordnance characteristics, final attackheading, troop safety, SEAD, and CAS andartillery integration.
Weather
Weather is one of the most importantconsiderations in visual employment ofweapons. Poor light, limited visibility (rain,snow, fog, smoke, or night), low clouds, orattack into a low sun all hinder targetidentification. Gusty winds can degrade theaccuracy of weapons employment.
Target Acquisition
Well-camouflaged or small stationary targetsare difficult to acquire from fast-movingaircraft, as are targets masked by hills or othernatural cover. On the other hand, movingvehicles may highlight themselves by their dusttrails, exhaust smoke, and relative movementagainst their background. The use of markingrounds can key the attacking pilot’s eyes to theright target area, enhance target identificationand help ensure first-pass success.
Target Identification
A precise description of the target in relationto terrain features easily visible from the air,smoke or laser target marking, or other meansis critical to avoid attacking friendly forces bymistake. Target identification is always difficultat the ranges at which fighter aircraft must lineup on the target. This task becomes even moredifficult when both sides use similar vehicles.
Radar beacons are an alternate means oftarget identification. USREDCOM Manual525-5 provides a single-source document forplanning and executing beacon procedures.
Identification of Friendly ForcesPilots of fighter aircraft must know theposition of friendly forces before attacking.Several safe means of friendly identificationmay be used. These include a mirror flash, amarker panel, and the direction and distancefrom prominent land features or target marks.
General Ordnance CharacteristicsTactical fighter aircraft can employ a widevariety of general- or specific-use weapons.Newer weapons are designed to producespecific effects against specific targets. Someweapons require restrictions when used withtroops in contact. Modifications to existingaircraft, such as improved weapons deliverycomputers and sight systems, also improvetheir capability to use existing general-purpose(GP) weapons more effectively.
Final Attack Heading
Choice of the final attack heading depends onconsiderations of troop safety, aircraftsurvivability, and optimum weapons effects.For example, overflying a ZSU-23-4 on anotherwise perfect final attack heading wouldbe foolish. In general, linear targets should beattacked at a small angle off the long axis toensure target coverage and to increase theprobability of multiple hits. Missiles or bombsare effective from any angle; cannons,however, are more effective against the sidesand rears of armored vehicles.
Troop Safety
Troop safety is a key consideration in usingCAS. The primary cause of friendly air attackson friendly troops is misidentification offriendly forces as enemy forces.
Suppression of Enemy Air Defenses
SEAD may be required, depending on thecapabilities of the tactical aircraft and thepresence of enemy air defense systems in thetarget area.
A-15
FM 6-20-40
Close Air Support-Artillery Integration
Army artillery and tactical air power arecomplementary. Because artillery supportavailable to ground forces is more continuousand faster to respond than CAS, groundelements depend heavily on artillery and arereluctant to impose firing restrictions. CASmissions, therefore, must integrate withartillery so that only limited firing restrictionsare required. The ACA is the fire supportcoordinating measure that accomplishes thisintegration.
Airspace Coordination Area Development. Thefollowing criteria will be considered indeveloping an ACA for an operation:
Ž The ACA should be easily identifiable fromthe air.
Ž It must allow the particular aircraft involvedenough room for maneuver.
Ž It must allow access to and egress from the initial point to the target area. Establish an IPthat is deconflicted with the mortars, AD, andFA.
• It must consider the ordnance andcapabilities of the aircraft. (Will the aircraftuse the standoff technique, or must it overflythe target?)
Ž When possible, it should include terrain thatmasks aircraft from hostile air defensesystems.
Ž It should separate the aircraft from friendlyfires and their effects by either time or space.
• It should allow surface systems to provideSEAD and to mark targets if necessary.
• It should be simple so that dissemination toboth pilots and surface systems is easy.
A-16
FM 6-20-40
Separation Plans. FACs learn four standardseparation plans and coordination proceduresat the Air-Ground Operations School andbasic FAC flight school.
Ž Lateral separation.
• Altitude separation.
• Time separation.
• Altitude and lateral separation.
The degree to which these plans are practicedvaries greatly. It is based on the theater, theavailability and restrictions of ranges, and unitsafety restrictions. Air Force FACs understand
the importance of not restricting Army artilleryunnecessarily during CAS.
Lateral Separation (Adjacent Targets). Lateralseparation plans are for coordinating attacksagainst two targets that are close together.The FAC needs to know the gun-target (GT)line so he can restrict any fighter attack runfrom crossing this line. Establishing atemporary ACA is one way to do this. It willkeep the fighters and airborne FAC away fromindirect supporting fires. The ACA should bebig enough that fighters can operate over thetarget yet small enough that supporting firesare not too restricted. The ACA can bedefined by grid coordinates, geographicalfeatures, or time.
A-17
FM 6-20-40
Altitude Separation (Same Target). Alti tude Ž No overflight of the GT line by the fighters,separation plans apply when both CAS and except at the impact point.artillery attack the same target and theartillery fires at a low angle. Lateral separation Ž Restricted final attack heading.and recovery altitude restrictions ensureclearance from the artillery trajectory and frag When fighter pilots cannot adhere to thesepattern. Other restrictions normally include— restrictions, the FAC must instruct them to
• NO change in artillery trajectories. recover above the maximum ordinate altitudeor frag pattern, whichever is higher.
A-18
FM 6-20-40
Time Separation (Same Target). Time separationplans specify the intervals during whichartillery and/or mortars fire. The FACdetermines these intervals in conjunction withthe FSO. The artillery and/or mortar fires arecontrolled by the call for fire. The aircraft iscontrolled by appropriate instructions includedin the CAS briefing, sometimes called thenine-line brief. These controls ensure a timeseparation of aircraft and artillery and/ormortar fires on the same target or target area.
A-19
FM 6-20-40
Altitude and Lateral Separation (Closely Ad]acent gun line. This restriction provides bothTargets). Altitude and lateral separation plans horizontal and vertical clearance. The fightersare the most restrictive. They provide for need to know the minimum ordinate over theSEAD when the CAS target is between the target. To avoid artillery, they must remainartillery and enemy antiaircraft positions. As well below this altitude when near theshown in the graphic on the next page, the gun-target line. Normally, the fighters willvertical restriction is a maximum altitude restrict their attack headings to within + 45° ofdirectly over the CAS target and under the a line perpendicular to the gun line.
A-20
FM 6-20-40
Attack Execution
Close Air Support Mission Briefing
The CAS mission briefing format variesslightly from theater to theater; however, theinformation is the same. Target informationmay be passed to a TACP, an airborne FAC,or a TAC-A. It will be properly formatted andpassed to the flight leader.
A-21
FM 6-20-40
The following brief would be transmitted as ŽHazards (weather or high terrain, forfollows: X RAY (pause), 075 (pause), 10.2 example).(pause), 1,200 (pause), TANK COMPANYATTACKING WEST (pause), QA044092 •Attack restrictions (assume none unless
(pause), LASER 372 (pause), 2,000 METERS specified).SOUTH ON HIGH GROUND (pause), • Attack frequency and FAC call sign.EGRESS WEST TO AVOID ARTILLERYSUPPRESSION. • Fire support integration.
The mission briefing format may include the • Threat update.
following additional information: • Detailed description of target area.
A-22
FM 6-20-40
• Abort code (obtained from the attackaircraft).
• Clearance (for example, CLEARED TODEPART, CALL DEPARTING).
Additional data may be passed if the situationpermits. The FAC will assume that a jammingenvironment exists and transmit theFAC-to-fighter briefing by using short, concisetransmissions. When the FAC gets to theadditional information step, he may try toexpand on his briefing. The fighters should usethis time to ask for repeats or to ask questionscritical to the attack. Some information can bepassed only after the fighters see the targeta r e a .
Final Attack Control
At the contact point, the TAC-A, TACP, orFAC updates the flight leader as he fliestoward his initial point. When cleared toattack, the flight leader switches to the attackfrequency, checks in with the FAC or FIST,and calls as his flight departs the IP. This radiocall is used to coordinate SEAD and/ormarking rounds. Whenever tactically possible,the FAC will try to pick up the fightersvisually and give them final directions to helpthe pilots acquire the target.
Direction and Distance Reference
If the tactical situation permits, a direction anddistance reference can be used to aid in targetacquisition. The FAC should provide acommon reference for orientation, Forexample, THE MAIN ROAD (or river, treeline, and so forth) RUNS EAST-WEST. Next,the FAC must select some discernible groundfeature to establish a common distancereference. A river, road, or field can be used;and distances are given in meters. Forexample, THE MAIN FIELD (or drop zone,assault strip, and so forth) IS 100 METERSLONG. Use definite statements in this and allother briefing items. The fighters expect the
EXAMPLES OF DIRECTION ANDDISTANCE REFERENCE
STAR 11, THIS IS ALFA 53.
THE RIVER RUNS NORTH-SOUTH.
THE FIELD IS 100 METERS LONG.
OFF YOUR RIGHT WING, NOTE SANDBAR INRIVER.
TARGET IS 400 METERS EAST OF SANDBAR.
and
STAR 11, THIS IS ALFA 53.
THE TREE LINE RUNS EAST-WEST.
FROM X INTERSECTION TO Y INTERSECTIONIS 100 METERS.
HALFWAY BETWEEN X AND Y, TARGET ISNORTH 25 METERS.
FAC to give them the best availablemeasurements and estimates. Words likeabout, approximately, let‘s, and please wasteradio transmission time. Specific andauthoritative instructions are needed toaccomplish a mission.
Call to Abort Attack
If the fighters are not aligned with the correcttarget or if it appears that friendly troops maybe endangered, the attack must be aborted.The authentication abort code is obtainedfrom the attack aircraft during the CASbriefing. To abort a CAS attack, the FAC andFIST must have the same authenticationsystem as the aircraft.
The CAS abort procedure uses thechallenge-reply response. The flight leadergives the FAC the two-letter challenge code.The reply letter is the abort-call code word.The reply letter will be given to the fightersonly when an abort is desired. The lettershould be transmitted after the words ABORT,ABORT, ABORT.
A-23
FM 6-20-40
EXAMPLE ABORT CALL
STAR 11, ALFA 53.
ABORT, ABORT, ABORT.
DELTA (authentication of the abort code receivedfrom the attack aircraft).
Reattacks
The FAC or FIST coordinates reattacks withthe fighters. This may require additionalcoordination such as SEAD, fire supportcoordination, and re-marking the target. In amedium- to high-threat environment, reattacksdegrade aircraft survivability.
Bomb Damage Assessment
The BDA provides the same information asmortar or artillery fire mission surveillance.The TACP relays the BDA through USAFchannels, while the FIST uses Army channels.
Night Close Air Support
The capability of TACAIR to attack movingtargets or provide CAS at night is limited tolow-threat situations. In a night high-threatscenario, current capability is very limited. Toenhance execution of night CAS in the future,the Air Force is acquiring additionalnight-capable systems, such as the low-altitudenavigation and targeting infrared for nightsystem (LANTIRN).
Advantages. For tactical fighters engaged inCAS, the most important advantage of night isthe limitation it imposes on all enemyoptically-sighted antiaircraft artillery (AAA)and infrared (IR) surface-to-air missiles(SAMs). This is particularly true if operatorsdo not have night vision devices. Also airborneand ground illumination may degrade enemynight vision capabilities.
Disadvantages. Darkness imposes limitations onthe use of tactical fighters for CAS. During
night and twilight, pilots have more difficultyvisually pinpointing targets and accuratelylocating enemy and friendly forces.
Levels of Threat Air Defense. Enemy muzzleflash, tracer, and missile burn are easier toidentify at night. However, radar-guided SAMsand AAA and enemy air-to-air operations mayhinder night CAS operations.
Low-Threat Close Air Support. The Air Forceconsiders small arms, optically-sighted AAA,possible SA-7, and limited enemy counterairoperations as low-threat defenses. In such anenvironment, expect the Air Force to fly morenight CAS missions.
High-Threat Close Air Support. Radar-guidedSAMs and AAA and enemy air-to-airoperations pose a high threat to CAS aircraft.Such defenses may cause high losses andrequire limiting CAS to tactical emergencies.SEAD operations greatly increase the chancesof success.
Planning. Close air support missions at nightrequire extensive planning. The TACPs andFISTs must emphasize—
Ž Target and friendly force identification.
Ž The availability of mortars or artillery fortarget illumination and SEAD.
The maneuver commander, his chain ofcommand, and the ALO must plan andcoordinate as early as possible. The ALO, inturn, coordinates with the ASOC to ensurethat they have addressed all the necessaryplanning considerations. In this regard,planning for night CAS should include all dayCAS considerations, plus those discussed inthis appendix.
In general, two to four aircraft will performnight CAS. They will fly at low, medium, orhigh altitude, depending on the threat,offensive tactics, and avionics capabilities.
A-24
FM 6-20-40
Targets. The first priority for a successful nightCAS mission is identifying the target. Thesecond is accurately marking the friendlyforces whose safety is important. Oncesupporting aircraft have identified the targetand friendly positions, enemy defenses can bereferenced from the target location. Theground commander should rely first on Armyassets to mark and/or illuminate the target.The Air Force ground or airborne FAC mayalso request Air Force illumination.
Airborne and Artillery Illumination. Artillery ormortar illumination is preferable becauseArmy units can provide continuousillumination within their resources.
Flares released from AFAC aircraft, fighters,or flare aircraft can effectively illuminate anarea. The A-10, A-7, F-4, OV-10, OA-37, andAC- 130 can carry target-marking flares. Foreffective lighting, the flares must be closeenough to the target and at the proper height.Then fighters will be able to respond to adetailed target description. The Air Forcefighters capable of night CAS missions underbattlefield illumination are the A-10, A-7,F-16, F-4, and F-111.
Flare aircraft or AFAC aircraft can droplong-burning illumination markers (LOGs) tomark targets for use as a common referencefor fighter employment. After being dropped,the LOGs burn on the ground for 30 minutes.Ground fires from any source may also servethe same purpose. Once there is a referenceon the ground, fighters can use the referencemark to attack the marked position or otherlocations.
Enemy Ground Fire. Enemy ground fire, AAA,tracer rounds, and surface-to-air missile firingscan disclose targets.
Laser Designators. Laser designators canenhance night target acquisition. CAS aircraftmay be equipped with laser energy receivers
known as laser spot trackers. They can acquiretargets without using conventional illumination.The LST receives laser energy and providescockpit head-up steering to the source. WhenLSTs are used, coordination is paramountbetween the ground unit, the FAC, and thefighters.
Radar, The F-4, F-16, F-1 11, and A-7 can useradar-significant terrain points, radar reflectors,or portable radar beacons to provide referenceinformation for blind or beacon bombing.
Friendly Positions. Friendly marks improve CASsafety and can provide target area references.Tracers and radar beacons can serve bothpurposes. Whenever possible, friendly positionsshould be marked if safe separation is a factor.
Flares. Fired in the air, flares such as trip flaresand 40-mm illuminating grenades are effectivemarks. However, they are usually visible to theenemy as well.
Both wind and cloud cover are importantfactors in using flares successfully at night.Planners and flare aircraft should calculate thetime of delivery and the wind drift to makesure that the target is illuminated during theattack. Flares used during limited visibility cancreate a milk bowl effect, making it moredifficult for an aircraft to find the target. Whenused under a cloud deck, the flares mighthighlight the fighters against the clouds. Underthese conditions, LOGs will be better thanflares to mark the target.
Lights. Strobe lights are often excellent fornight marking. They are commonly used withblue or infrared filters. They can be madedirectional by using any opaque tube. Inovercast conditions, strobe lights can beespecially useful.
Bright directional lights are useful marks,especially in overcast conditions. They arehighly directional and can easily be coveredwith colored filters. Vehicle lights are useful
A-25
FM 6-20-40
nighttime marks; but for security, it is best tocover headlights and use tail or brake lights.Any light source that can be readily coveredand uncovered can be used for codedsignaling.
Combinations of Marks. Combinations or arraysof two or more signaling devices improvechances of acquisition and security of thesignal.
Additional Night Close Air Support Capabilities.Other CAS capabilities for night operationsare discussed below.
Laser Target Designation Systems. Pave Tack is apod-contained laser target designating, ranging,and tracking system. Pave Tack usesforward-looking infrared (FLIR). It can beinstalled on the RF-4C, F-111F, and certainmodified F-4E aircraft. The pod provides lasertracking of ground targets for attack withconventional ordnance or laser-guidedweapons.
AC- 130A/H Spectre Gunshlps. The primarymissions of the AC- 130s are special operationsand conventional CAS for troops in contact.They also conduct armed reconnaissance,convoy escort, and perimeter defense,AC-130s normally remain rear-area CASassets and will not cross the FLOT unless thethreat is low and friendly air superiorityprevails. An AC-130 carries the followingguns:
• 7.62 mm (AC-130A only) for use againstpersonnel under light cover.
General Mission
The general mission of naval gunfire support isto assist the ground force by destroying,
• 20 mm for use against personnel under lightcover.
• 40 mm for use against trucks and personnelunder medium cover.
Ž 105 mm (AC-130H only) for use againsttrucks, tanks, and personnel under anycondition.
Using one sensor or a combination of them, AC-130s can locate enemy and friendlypositions as follows:
• The radar can locate beacons and groundreflectors.
• The television (TV) or laser platformprovides low-light-level TV (LLLTV) duringdarkness and during day or night laserdesignation.
• The IR detection set provides visualpresentations of the temperature differentialsbetween objects. IR strobes, reflective panels,or reflective tape can help locate friendlypositions.
Ž Xenon arc lamps and infrared lamps provideairborne illumination.
• The Black Crow direction finder searches forelectromagnetic energy in subradarfrequencies. Detectable signatures includethose from generators, alternators, and someradios and condensers.
Section IV. NAVAL GUNFIRE
Organization
Naval gunfire is coordinated by the brigade airand naval gunfire platoon, a part of the air
neutralizing, or suppressing targets that oppose and naval gunfire l iaison companythat force. (ANGLICO). The ANGLICO is a Marine
A-26
FM 6-20-40
organization. The brigade air and naval gunfireplatoon is organized and equipped to plan,request, coordinate, and control naval gunfireand naval air at the brigade level. Eachbrigade platoon is organized with a team tosupport the brigade and two battalionsupporting arms liaison teams. Under normalconditions, each of two maneuver battalions isprovided a SALT. The SALT is composed oftwo SALT officers and six personnel, whobecome part of the FS cell. Two firepowercontrol teams are available to be sent to themaneuver companies to request, observe, andadjust navel fire support. The SALT officers
coordinate all naval gunfire and supervise theactivities of the FCTs. In addition, they advisethe FSCOORD on all matters pertaining tonaval gunfire employment, to includecapabilities, limitations, and targets suitable fornaval gunfire engagement.
Tactical MissionsNaval gunfire ships are assigned one of twomissions—direct support or generalsupport—in much the same way that fieldartillery is organized for combat.
A-27
FM 6-20-40
Direct Support
A ship in direct support usually supports abattalion. This ship can deliver both plannedand on-call fires. Call (on-call) fires arenormally requested and adjusted by thefirepower control team of the supported unitor by an air spotter.
General support
A ship is usually placed in general support ofcommitted brigades and divisions. The fires fora GS ship are conducted as directed by thenaval gunfire officer of the unit beingsupported. The primary purpose of a GS shipis to allow the supported commander to adddepth to the fires of the DS ships without thenecessity for requests to higher echelons. Anunderstanding of the capabilities andlimitations of the naval gun facilitates its usein the ground support role. In considering thecharacteristics of naval gunfire, it should beremembered that the naval gun was designedfor ship-to-ship combat.
Capabilities
Ammunition Variety
The variety of projectiles, powder charges, andfuzes permits selection of optimumcombinations for the attack of targets.
Muzzle Velocity
The high muzzle velocity and relatively flattrajectory make the naval gun suitable fordirect fire or assault fire, particularly againstreinforced targets such as bunkers andhardened positions.
Rates of Fire
Some naval guns have a very rapid rate of fire.
Dispersion Pattern
The normal dispersion pattern is narrow indeflection and long in range. It permits
effective coverage of such targets as roads andrunways when the GT line coincides with thelong axis of the target. Very close supportingfire can be delivered when the GT line isparallel to the front line of troops.
MobilityWithin the limits imposed by hydrographicconditions, the naval gunfire ship may bepositioned for the best support of the groundforce. The ability of the ship to maneuver isan important factor in planning for support ofseparated forces. It also allows selection of themost favorable gun-target line.
Fire Control EquipmentPrecision fire control equipment permitsaccurate direct and indirect fires while the shipis under way or at anchor.
Limitations
Range Probable Error
The relatively flat trajectory results in a largerange probable error. Therefore, thedispersion pattern of the naval gun is roughlyelliptical, with the long axis in the direction offire. The GT line and its relation to the FLOTmust be considered by the FSO in selectingnaval gunfire as a fire support means. Friendlyunits should avoid the GT line. If possible, theGT line should be parallel to the FLOT.
Changing Gun-Target Line
Because of the movement of the ship whilefiring, the GT line in relation to the FLOTmay change. This can cause cancellation of thefire mission as the large range probable errorsmay cause rounds to endanger friendly forces.
Communications
The sole means of communication betweenthe ship and the shore is high-frequency (HF)radio, which may be interrupted or jammed.
A-28
FM 6-20-40
Hydrography
The hydrographic conditions of the sea area inwhich the naval gunfire ship must operate maybe unfavorable. They may cause undesirablefiring positions or require firing at longerranges.
Fixing of Ship Position
The accuracy of naval gunfire depends on theaccuracy with which the position of the firingship has been fixed. Navigational aids,prominent terrain features, or radar beaconsemplaced on the shore may be used tocompensate for this limitation.
Weather and Visibility
Bad weather and poor visibility make itdifficult to determine the position of the shipby visual means and reduce the observer’sopportunities for locating targets and adjustingfires. Bad weather also might force the shipout to sea.
Enemy Action
If the naval gunfire ship comes under enemysurface, subsurface, and/or air attack, the shipmay cancel its fire mission with the groundforces and try to counter this threat.
Magazine Capacity
The shore bombardment allowance varies withthe ship type (600 to 1,800 rounds). When theneed arises, remaining rounds will be held forself-defense of the ship.
Control MeasuresMeasures used by the Navy for its operationsare identical to those used by the FSCOORDto control other surface-to-surface fires. Thosepeculiar to naval operations which limit shipmovement or affect the fire support providedare discussed below.
Zone of Fire
The objective area is divided into zones intowhich ships are assigned to coordinate theirefforts. The zones depend on locations ofboundaries, size, visibility, and accessibility tofire.
Fire Support Area
A fire support area (FSA) is a definite seaarea assigned to an individual fire support shipor a fire support unit (more than one ship).These areas are selected on the basis of factorssuch as hydrographic conditions, minefield,antiaircraft and antisubmarine disposition,other naval activity, and the best positionbased on GT line, range, and observation.
Fire Support Station
A fire support station (FSS) is a specificlocation in which ships may be placed andmaintained while providing fire support.
CommunicationsThe brigade team operates on the divisionnaval gunfire support net (HF). This netprovides for communication between thedivision naval gunfire officer (NGO), thebrigade NGLO, and the ships in support ofthese units. This net is used for the day-to-dayplanning between the units. No direct navalcommunications net exists between thebattalion FCTs and brigade SALTs. Firesupport or maneuver nets must be used forcommunication between these two agencies.Brigade-initiated requests for fire support aretransmitted to the brigade air and navalgunfire liaison team, which then forwards therequests to the ship. A SALT officer at themaneuver battalion FS cell monitors therequest and coordinates as necessary at hisechelon. This coordination is much the sameas for field artillery engagement. The oneexception is that the SALT officer atmaneuver battalion must contact the NGLO at
A-29
FM 6-20-40
brigade, if brigade coordination is necessaryHe does this over the FSOs communicationsmeans, as he does not have directcommunication with the brigade NGLO.
Naval and Marine Corps AirNaval and/or USMC air requests areforwarded by the respective SALTs to theaviation support unit in support of the unit.The brigade FSO submits his requests throughthe Marine air officer. The actual terminalcontrol of the air is done by the firepowercontroller of the firepower control team. Inthe absence of an observer, naval and/orUSMC air may be controlled by the companyFSO, the ALO, or the Air Force FAC.
A-30
FM 6-20-40
Section V. ARMY AVIATION
Fire Support TasksIn general, attack helicopter units are notattached lower than division level, but theymay be placed OPCON to a brigade. Theorganization and equipment of combat aviationunits enable them to do several key firesupport tasks. They–
• Provide limited aerial fire support to groundmaneuver units.
• Coordinate and adjust indirect fires whentactical air and artillery are employed.
• Conduct joint air attack team (JAAT)operations.
The attack helicopter can mount an impressivearray of weapons and can be used in a firesupport role similar to that of air supportaircraft. In this role, the attack helicopterbattalion may—
Ž Attack critical logistics and command andcontrol facilities.
• Control JAAT operations.
• Perform SEAD missions,
Ž Provide fire support for rear operations.
CapabilitiesAttack helicopter capabilities include—
• Long standoff capability.
• Rapid movement to the engagement area.
Ž Delivery accuracy.
Ž Air-ground communications.
Ž Quick maneuver and massed fires regardlessof battlefield dispersion.
LimitationsAttack helicopters—
• Have a limited time on station and delayedresponse.
Ž Are affected by weather and visibility.
Ž Are affected by the air defense threat.
TargetThe type of targets should be carefullyspecified to ensure that the best ordnance isused to attack the target. The objective ofattack helicopter employment is to put theaircraft on station at the right time with theright munition. Scheduled or on-call SEADfires may be required to suppress enemy airdefenses for the attack and to cover helicopterwithdrawal after the mission.
Section VI. JOINT AIR ATTACK TEAM
Description operating with ground forces, the JAAT may
The JAAT is a combination of scout andbe strengthened by the firepower capabilitiesof maneuver forces.
attack helicopters and tactical aircraftsupported by field artillery, operating togetherto attack a single high-priority target or target
When to Use JAAT
array. The JAAT may operate either with or The JAAT is most effective against movingindependently from ground units. When targets in open areas. It is least effective when
A-31
FM 6-20-40
attacking targets that are in camouflageddug-in positions. The combination of TOWs(from attack helicopters), Maverick missiles,and 30-mm gunfire (from the A-10s) is deadlyagainst moving armor units.
Planning ConsiderationsJAAT operations, whether planned orspontaneous, require a thorough understandingof the maneuver commander’s intent and offactors influencing the battlefield, and aknowledge of JAAT capabilities. Key JAATmembers must stringently use the timeavailable to develop an in-depth JAAT planand must coordinate in detail with allparticipants. The amount of time available willbe a major factor in the complexity of theplan.
Staffs at all levels influence JAAT planningthrough their IPB. Through this analyticalapproach, appropriate targets and target areasfor employment of a JAAT can be identified.Essential to effective JAAT employment is theidentification of key intelligence trigger events,which signal the buildup of a likely enemytarget. Also, intelligence on Threat air defenseby type, amount, and location is vital to thesuccess of a JAAT operation.
The foundation of a successful JAAToperation is the maneuver commander’stactical plan, around which JAAT plans arebased. The maneuver commander’s tacticalplan specifies actions in the objective area toultimately accomplish the mission and toprepare for subsequent operations. A JAATshould be planned for and used in support ofthis overall mission. JAAT mission assignmentconsiderations include the following:
• Massed enemy armored and/or mechanizedvehicles.
• Whether the enemy is on the move.
Ž Availability of JAAT assets.
Ž Whether the enemy can be flanked.
• Whether local air superiority can be seized.
Ž Whether enemy helicopters can besuppressed.
Ž Likely offensive operations:
Enemy counterattacks.
Exploitations.
Pursuits.
• Likely defensive operations:
Reinforcement of committed groundmaneuver units.
Destruction of enemy penetrations.
Ž Deep operations to attack follow-onelements.
Brigade should be the lowest level at which ajoint air attack is planned. Coordination withthe appropriate task force is required if theJAAT is to be employed in the task forcesector; execution may be handed off to thetask force.
The ground maneuver commander isresponsible for planning, coordinating, andemploying the JAAT. The plan to employ theJAAT should allow for multidirectional attack.This enhances the survivability and success ofthe JAAT by denying the ability of the enemyAD assets and maneuver forces to focus ororient in one direction. The key staff memberswho plan and coordinate for the JAAT, on thebasis of the commander’s guidance, arediscussed below. The coordination processtakes place in the FS cell under thesupervision of the FSCOORD or FSO and theS3 air.
A-32
FM 6-20-40
S3 AirThe S3 air plans and requests the use of closeair support and attack helicopters to supportthe commander’s concept of the operation.
S2
The S2–
Ž Provides information on the avenues ofapproach, target array, terrain, and weather asit applies to the time and location of theJAAT operation.
Ž Plans and coordinates the use of nonlethalattack assets to complement the JAAT.
Attack Helicopter Battalion and/or CompanyCommander or Liaison Officer
This officer—
Ž Provides status of Army aviation assetsavailable.
• Begins planning the air corridors and airbattle positions (ABPs) to support theoperation.
• Coordinates with the FSCOORD or FSO andthe air defense officer (ADO) to deconflictair corridors.
• Coordinates for the planned ACAs.
Fire Support Coordinator orFire Support Officer
The FSCOORD or FSO—
Ž Determines the need, availability, andpositioning of artillery, commensurate withthe Threat update, to support the JAAT.
Ž Coordinates with the aviation representativeto provide call signs and frequencies to thesupporting FDC.
• Helps the TACP deconflict the IPs fromartillery positions and develop ACAs tosupport the mission.
• Determines the need for SEAD.
• Determines when and how priorities of firesshift .
Ž Recommends fire support coordinatingmeasures to enhance the success of themission.
Ž Establishes a quick fire channel if necessary.
Air Defense Officer
The air defense officer—
• Coordinates to ensure that the AD assetsknow the location of air corridors, ABPs, IPs,and ACAs.
Ž Ensures these assets are informed of friendlyair operations and their integration into thebattle.
Tactical Air Control Party
The TACP—
Ž Develops contact points and/or initial pointsand ACAs in coordination with theFSCOORD or FSO and the ADO.
Ž Disseminates the contact point and/or IP andACAs to the ASOC for dissemination to theground liaison officer (GLO) and wingoperations center (WOC) for preflightbriefing.
Ž Helps the TAC-A move aircraft forward tothe appropriate contact point or IP and thenhand them off to the aviation commanderconducting the JAAT operation.
A-33
FM 6-20-40
PreparationThe preparation phase includes briefing theplan, ensuring dissemination of the plan tosubordinate units that may have an impact onthe mission, reconnaissance, and rehearsal.
Reconnaissance by the aviation commander iscritical to the success of the JAAT. It allowshim to see the terrain and determine if theABPs need to be adjusted because of dustsignature, survivability, or communicationsand/or to facilitate control of the JAAT. Oncompletion of the recon, the aviationcommander will provide feedback to theFSCOORD or FSO and the S3 air. Ifrefinements to the plan are needed, they willbe made and disseminated expeditiously.
R e h e a r s a l s a r e c r u c i a l t o c h e c kcommunications channels, routes and ABPs tobe used, time required to move assets forward,graphical control measures, and the fire plan.The JAAT rehearsal participants should be asfollows:
• Aviation commander (JAAT commander).
• Attack helicopter platoon leader.
• Brigade FSO (may require TF FSO).
Ž Brigade air liaison officer.
• Aviation liaison officer.
• Battalion and/or battery fire direction center.
• Aerial observer and/or AFSO (if available).
ExecutionDuring the execution phase, the aviationcommander is the director and coordinator ofthe total team effort.
The flight leader and aviation platoon leadersmanage their own individual elements. Theaviation commander does not dictate theirattack methods.
En route to the target or engagement area,the aviation commander contacts the groundcommander for a tactical update.
The aviation commander should talk directlyto all fire support assets involved in the JAAToperation. However, the ground commander’sstaff will monitor their appropriate nets tokeep abreast of the JAAT operation and tohelp the aviation commander as needed.
A-34
FM 6-20-40
A-35
FM 6-20-40
A-36
FM 6-20-40
A-37
FM 6-20-40
The commander’s intent should prioritize firesupport on the battlefield and identify criticaltasks for fire support as well as for maneuver,His intent focuses fire support execution at thecritical time and place. To ensure that firesupport is properly integrated into the schemeof maneuver, the FSO must obtain answers tothe questions below. Most of the answers may
be obtained from information presented at themission brief or deduced from thecommander’s intent. Some answers mayrequire clarification by the commander himself.Regardless, these answers should be confirmedas meeting the commander’s intent for firesupport during the staff estimate, war-gaming,and rehearsal processes.
GUIDANCE FOR FIRE SUPPORT PERSONNEL
OFFENSIVE OPERATIONS
•••
•Ž•
ŽŽ
•
Ž•
Ž
•
What is the offensive mission?
What Is the scheme of maneuver?
Are there any unique maneuver requirements forthe firing batteries?
What Is the zone of action?
What Is the enemy situation?
What are the known and/or suspected enemylocations?
What units are to receive priority of fires?
What fire support assets are providing the priorityfires?
What are the priority targets, and which units willbe allocated a priority target’?
When Is priority shifted to the next priority target?
Where are special fires to be planned (smoke,illumination, FASCAM, and so forth)?
Is there a requirement to adjust smoke orIllumination targets?
Is there a requirement to register fire supportassets?
DEFENSIVE OPERATIONS
• What is the defensive mission?
Ž What Is the plan for defense?
Ž What Is the sector of action?
Ž What Is the enemy situation?
Ž What are the known and/or suspected enemylocations?
Ž What are the priority targets?
Ž Where are designated engagement areas?
• Which are the most likely avenues of approach?
• What and where are the obstacles, and how arethey to be covered? (Coordinate with engineers.)
• Have FPFs been allocated? Where are they to beplanned? Are they to be adjusted?
• What are the primary and alternate signals to firethe FPFs?
Ž How are COLTs to be employed?
• Are scouts forward?
• What special fires are to be planned (smoke,illumination, FASCAM, and so forth)?
B-1
FM 6-20-40
GUIDANCE FOR FIRE SUPPORT PERSONNEL (CONTINUED)
OFFENSIVE OPERATIONS
Ž•
•
Ž
•
Ž
•
•
How are COLTs to be employed?
Which signals or events will be used to startspecial fires?
Which maneuver control measures have beenestablished?
Are any restrictive fire support coordinatingmeasures required?
What additional fire support assets have beenallocated (attached or In support)?
Are there any pecul lar communicat ionsrequirements?
How will logistical support for mortars beaccomplished?
Who will reposition mortars?
• What are the future plans?
• What is the chain of command?
DEFENSIVE OPERATIONS
•
•
•
•
Ž
•
••ŽŽ••
Are there special fire support requirements forthe scouts?
Is there a requirement to adjust fires or toregister?
Which maneuver control measures have beenestablished?
Are any restrictive fire support coordinatingmeasures required?
What additional fire support assets have beenallocated?
Are there any pecul iar communicat ionsrequirements?
Which signals will be used to start firing?
What are the future plans?
What is the chain of command?
How much time is available?
Which units are to receive priority of fires?
When is priority shifted to the next prioritytarget?
B-2
FM 6-20-40
The operation order displays in a written support, and combat service support into aformat the commander’s selected course of synchronized operation. In this appendix, theaction, his concept of the operation, and all OPORD format is shown and fire supportguidance given during the planning of the documents have been incorporated into theoperation. It merges maneuver, fires, combat OPORD.
C-1
FM 6-20-40
C-2
FM 6-20-40
C-3
FM 6-20-40
C-4
FM 6-20-40
C-5
FM 6-20-40
C-6
FM 6-20-40
C-7
FM 6-20-40
C-8
FM 6-20-40
EXAMPLE OPERATION ORDER (CONTINUED)
(Classification)
OPORD COSMIC --2d Bde, 23d Armd Div
(2) Engineer Support. Refer to Annex D (EngineerMatrix).
(3) Military Police. Priority of effort to battlefieldcirculation control, with priority to MSRs in TF 1-14 Armorsector and area security in BSA.
d. Coordinating Instructions.
(1) High-Payoff Target List
Priority Category Sheet Number Description
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
5 ENG
1 C3
7 REC
2 FS
8 N/CH
3 MAN
4 ADA
6 RSTA
(2) PIR.
(a)
(b)
(c)
(d)
70, 71
25, 26, 30, 31
16, 105
1-8, 18-21
19, 81, 82
43, 45, 50
57, 61, 62
86
Movement Support Det, ERP
MRR/MRD Forward and Main CP
Radar Intercept, UHF/VHFJamming Site
FDCSs COPS, 122 mm, 152 mm82 mm
MRLs , 203-mm H, 240-mm M
Advance Guard, March Column
SA-6 , SA-9, ZSU-234 Platoons
Div Recon Patrol
When and where will the 4th MRD commit its TR?
Employment of chemical or nuclear weapons?
H e l i c o p t e r o v e r f l i g h t s ?
Any Threat bridging attempts across the FULDA?
( C l a s s i f i c a t i o n )
C-9
FM 6-20-40
EXAMPLE OPERATION ORDER (CONTINUED)
(Classification)
OPORD COSMIC--2d Bale, 23d Armd Div
(3) On order, 2d Bde sector extends to PL DICK.
(4) Maintain radio silence until battle hand-over.
(5) Antiterrorism Actions. All rear base entrances willbe barricaded to reduce traffic speed to a maximum of 10 kmph.Report any attack to the 2d FSB CP.
4. SERVICE SUPPORT
a. General. Concept of Logistic Support. Before the outbreakof hostilities, priority of effort will be to barrier haul. Atthe initiation of hostilities, priority shifts to movement andforward positioning of Class V and Class III. Priority on MSRs toTF 1-14 Armor, TF 1-92 Mech, 1-51 FA, and 2-636 FA; then to 1-12Armor when committed.
b. Materiel and Services.
(1) supply.
(a) Class I. A 2-day supply available at the forwardsupply section.
(b) Class II. A l-day supply available of the DSA.
(c) Class IV. Barrier materials are commandregulated. Priority to TF 1-14 Armor.
(d) Class V.
1. CSR:
D-Day S-Day
GM, TOW 5 4
155 mm (DPICM) 204 90
155 mm (ICM) 15 30
155 mm (ILLUM) 10 17
(Classification)
C-10
FM 6-20-40
EXAMPLE OPERATION ORDER (CONTINUED)
(Classification)
OPORD COSMIC--2d Bale, 23d Armd Div
155 mm (RAP)
155 mm (HE)
155 mm (WP)
155 mm (SMOKE)
155 mm (CPHD)
155 mm (ADAM)
155 mm (RAAMS)
120 mm (APFSDS)
25 mm (APDS)
25
10
10
10
10
2
7
35
120
10
15
10
15
15
7
8
26
120
2. Distribution locations:
ATP: BSA (MA270280)ASP 997 (MB7701O1)ASP 999 (MA800935)SASP: BOMBACH (MA530746)
(e) Class VII.
1. All tracked and wheeled vehicles, 2 1/2-tontruck and larger, are command regulated.
2. Critical shortage of 5-ton tractors.
(f) Class IX Shortages.
1. Engine M1500 and transmission X1100.
2. Engine HEMTT.
3. Transmission M2/M3.
(Classification)
C-11
FM 6-20-40
EXAMPLE OPERATION ORDER (CONTINUED)
(Classification)
OPORD COSMIC--2d Bde, 23d Armd Div
(2) Transportation. SOP.
(3) Services. Priority to main effort.
c. Medical Evacuation and Hospitalization. SOP.
d. Personnel. SOP.
e. Civil-Military Cooperation. SOP.
5. COMMAND AND SIGNAL
a. Command.
(1) Tactical CP at NB377284. Future location atNB312268.
(2) Main CP at NB283302. Future location at NB158283.
(3) Rear CP at NB243223. Future location at NBO04203.
(4) Alternate CP is 1-12 Armor CP.
b. Signal. SOI Index. 103-23.
Acknowledge.
WEIMANCOL
OFFICIAL:MULDOWNEYS3
Annexes: A--Situation SketchesB--Operation Overlay (TBP)C--Fire Support Execution MatrixD--Engineer MatrixE--Brigade Target ListF--FA Support Plan
Distribution:
(Classification)
C-12
FM 6-20-40
EXAMPLE OPERATION ORDER (CONTINUED)
(Classification)
APPENDIX 1 (THREAT SKETCH) TO ANNEX A (SKETCHES) TO OPORDCOSMIC--2d Bde, 23d Armd Div
(Classification)
C-13
FM 6-20-40
EXAMPLE OPERATION ORDER (CONTINUED)
(Classification
APPENDIX 2 (FRIENDLY SKETCH--23d ARMD DIV TO ANNEX A (SKETCHES)TO OPORD COSMIC--2d Bale, 23d Armd Div
(Classification)
C-14
FM 6-20-40
EXAMPLE OPERATION ORDER (CONTINUED)
(Classification)
APPENDIX 3 (FRIENDLY SKETCH -- 2d BDE) TO ANNEX A (SKETCHES) TOPORD COSMIC--2d Bale, 23d Armd Div
(Classification)
C-1 5
FM 6-20-40
EXAMPLE OPERATION ORDER (CONTINUED)
(Classification)
ANNEX C (FIRE SUPPORT EXECUTION MATRIX) TO OPORD COSMIC--2d Bale,23d Armd Div
(Classification)
C-16
FM 6-20-40
EXAMPLE OPERATION ORDER (CONTINUED)
(Classification)
ANNEX D (ENQINEER MATRIX) TO OPORD COSMIC--2d Bale, 23d Armd Div
(Classification)
C-17
FM 6-20-40
EXAMPLE OPERATION ORDER (CONTINUED)
(Classification)
ANNEX E (TARGET LIST) TO OPORD COSMIC--2d Bale, 23d Armd Div
Reference: Map , USACGSC 50-264, BAD HERSFELD-ALSFELD, edition1977, 1;50,000.
LINENUMBER
12345678910111213141516171819202122232425262728293031323334
TARGETNUMBER
AC0001AC0002AC0003AC0004AC0005AC0006AC0007AC0008AC0009AC0010AC0010AC0012AC0013AC0014AC0015AC0016AC0017 (a)AC0018 (a)AC0019 (b)AC0020 (b)AC0021 (c)AC0022 (c)AC0023 (d)AC0024 (d)AC0025 (e)AC0026 (e)AC0027AC0028 (b)AC0029AC0030AC0031AC0032 (f)AC0033 (f)AC0034 (g)
DESCRIPTION
ROAD INTERSECTIONSUSPECTED COPROAD INTERSECTIONCHOKE POINTSUSPECTED COPROAD INTERSECTIONROAD INTERSECTIONBRIDGEROAD INTERSECTIONROAD INTERSECTIONROAD INTERSECTIONROAD INTERSECTIONCHOKE POINTSUSPECTED COPSUSPECTED COPBRIDGECHOKE POINTROADROAD INTERSECTIONBRIDGEBRIDGEROADBRIDGEPOSSIBLE BRIDGE SITEBRIDGEROAD INTERSECTIONROAD INTERSECTIONBRIDGECHOKE POINTROADROADROAD INTERSECTIONROAD INTERSECTIONROAD
(Classification)
LOCATION
490209494226483236499245470248475260501276513308552353508340569344529343530284472284520328506319426241425236418242419248433276434269461294460297476315473316494339415247450334460322456308421285420281410244
C-18
FM 6-20-40
EXAMPLE OPERATION ORDER (CONTINUED)
(Classification)
ANNEX E (TARGET LIST) TO OPORD COSMIC--2d Bale, 23d Armd Div
35 AC0035 (g)36 AC0036 (h)37 AC0037 (h)38 AC0038 (i)39 AC0039 (i)40 AC004041 AC0041
REMARKS:
(a) Group A1C
(b) Group A2C
(c) Group A3C
(d) Group A4C
(e) Group A5C
(f) Group A6C
(g) Group A7C
(h) Group A8C
(i) Group A9C
ROAD INTERSECTIONROAD INTERSECTIONROAD INTERSECTIONROAD INTERSECTIONROAD INTERSECTIONROAD INTERSECTIONCHOKE POINT
408252389248388253404302408303412324426350
Enter all roads, road intersections, and choke points intoTACFIRE as possible armored vehicles.
(Classification)
C-19
FM 6-20-40
EXAMPLE OPERATION ORDER (CONTINUED)
(Classification)
Copy No1st Bn,RIMBERG040115Z
of copies51st FA(NB326276) GERJuly
ANNEX F (FA SUPPORT PLAN) TO OPORD COSMIC--2d Bale, 23d Armd Div
Reference: Map, USACGSC 50-264, BAD HERSFELD-ALSFELD, edition1977, 1:50,000.
Time Zone Used Throughout the Plan: ZULU
1. SITUATION
a. Enemy Forces. We expect to face all calibers of Threat FAin our sector. At least three MRL battalions will also fire intoour zone. The TA threat consists of counterbattery radars anddirection-finding and sound and flash ranging units. We canexpect 100 to 300 air sorties to be flown against us by bothfixed- and rotary-wing aircraft. If we can survive the indirectfire and air threats, then we can worry about the ground threatlater .
b. Friendly Forces. 23d Armd Div defends in sector. SeeOPLAN 6 and OPORD COSMIC.
c. Attachments .
See 2 (AN/TPQ-36) , Btry A (TA) , 23d FA: Att 1-51 FA
See 6 (AN/TPS-25A), Btry A (TA), 23d FA: Att 1-51 FA
Secs 1 and 2 AFSOs, 23d FA: OPCON 1-51 FA
2. MISSION
1-51 FA supports 2d Bde defense. Brigade will plan a10-minute counterpreparation to be fired as the Threat attemptsto force the FULDA.
3. EXECUTION
a. General. We have to transition from a grudging defensivestruggle to a bold and aggressive counterattack. The 2d Bdecommander, wants at least 40 percent of our ammo held back for the
(Classification)
C-20
FM 6-20-40
EXAMPLE OPERATION ORDER (CONTINUED)
(Classification)
ANNEX F (FA SUPPORT PLAN) TO OPORD COSMIC--2d Bale, 23d Armd Div
counterattack . Priority of fires to TF 1-14 Armor, on order 1-12Armor . TF 1-14 Armor plans two 400-meter by 400-meter standardFA-delivered FASCAM minefield. TF 1-92 Mech plans one standardFASCAM minefield and brigade holds one minefield. Long-durationFASCAM release held at division. Execute only if enemysuccessfully crosses FULDA in strength. TF 1-14 Armor has threeplatoon FPFs and two priority targets. Copperhead priority tobattalion scouts initially and then to TF 1-14 Armor. Counterfirepriorities: indirect fires affecting MBA units, COPs, and RAGs.
b. Organization for Combat.
1-51 FA (155, SP): DS 2d Bde
2-636 FA (155, SP): (GSR 1-51 FA
c. Positioning. The battalion will displace by battery fromforward supplementary positions. All batteries must be inposition to support the battle hand-over, assisting the coveringforce in its disengagement. We expect a massive Threat artilleryprep and 50 to 100 air sorties against us long before we see theground attack. I want batteries to occupy positions that havemaximum protection from indirect and air-to-ground fires. SeeAppendix 1 (FA Support Matrix).
d. Nuclear Fire Support.
(1) Nuclear release authority is retained at corps. 23dArmd Div nuclear subpackage A is in effect for planning.
(2) PNL :
0.2 KT 1.0 KT4 4
e. Coordinating Instructions.
(1) Target Acquisition. See Appendix 2.
(2) Meteorology . Computer met sent by 23d Div Arty every2 hours or when conditions dictate.
(Classification)
C-21
FM 6-20-40
EXAMPLE OPERATION ORDER (CONTINUED)
(Classification)
ANNEX F (FA SUPPORT PLAN) TO OPORD COSMIC--2d Bale, 23d Armd Div
(3) Target List. See brigade Annex F.
(4) Schedules. Appendix 3.
(5) Survey .
(a) RSO coordinate survey with 2-636 FA.
(b) Survey priorities: Cannons, radars, andOPs/COLTS. See Appendix 1, FA Support Matrix.
(6) Ammo Restrictions. FASCAM must be approved bybrigade commander. Illumination and HC smoke will be approved byTF commanders.
4. SERVICE SUPPORT
a. ATP: BSA (MA270280)ASP 997 (MB7701O1)ASP 999 (MA800935)SASP: BOMBACH (MA530746)
b. CSR: D-DAY
M483A1 DPICM 204M485 ILLUM 10M449 ICM 15M549A1 RAP 25M107 HE 10M11O WP 10M116A1 HC SMOKE 10M712M731M741M4A2M3A1M119M557M78M577M564M565M728M732
COPPERHEADADAMRAAMSWHITE BAGGREEN BAGCHARGE 8PDCPTITXT1VTVT
1227
210140252510
14030404030
(Classification)
S-DAY
1901015201010101027
190120202510
13030404030
C-22
FM 6-20-40
EXAMPLE OPERATION ORDER (CONTINUED)
ANNEX F (FA
5. COMMAND
(Classification)
SUPPORT PLAN) TO OPORD COSMIC--2d Bale, 23d Armd Div
AND SIGNAL
a. Command.
(1) 2d Bde tactical CP at 377284, future location at312268.
(2) 2d Bde main CP at 283302, future at 158283.
(3) 1-51 FA CP vic grid 3728.
(4) Div arty CP vic grid 2020.
b. Signal . Current SOI.
LANCELTC
OFFICIAL/S/HANSENS3
APPENDIXES: l--FA Support Matrix2––Target Acquisition3–– Schedules
(Classification)
C-23
FM 6-20-40
EXAMPLE OPERATION ORDER (CONTINUED)
(Classification)
APPENDIX 1 (FA SUPPORT MATRIX) TO ANNEX F (FA SUPPORT PLAN) TOOPORD COSMIC--2d Bale, 23d Armd Div
(Classification)
C-24
FM 6-20-40
EXAMPLE OPERATION ORDER (CONTINUED)
(Classification)
APPENDIX 2 (TARGET ACQUISITION) TO ANNEXOPORD COSMIC--2d Bale, 23d Armd Div
F (FA SUPPORT PLAN) TO
References : Map, series M745, EUROPE, sheet 1 (LAUTERBACH -STADTALLENDORF) , edition 1979, 1:50.000.Map, series M745, EUROPE, sheet 1 (BERKA - FULDA) ,edition 1979, 1:50,000.
Time Zone Used Throughout Plan: Zulu
1. PROCESSING. All counterfire targets will be sent to 1-51 FACP and then to div arty.
2. VISUAL OBSERVATION
a. Ground Observation. COLT: Copperhead priority to AVLBsand enemy bridging assets before deployment.
(1) Located 50102950, zone of obs az 1100 to 2400 mils.
(2) Located 48302070, zone of obs az 0900 to 2700 mils.
FSO 1-92 Mech provides OPs at 463346 and 449302.
b. Aerial Observation. Sections 1 and 2 AFSOs OPCON to 1-51FA.
(1) Section 1 OPCON to TF 1-14 Armor, report to TF FSO.
[2) Section 2 GS, report to 1-51 FA S2. Observationpriorities: bridging assets, movement support detachment, andMRLs.
3. RADAR
a. AN/TPS-25A, Section 6, Btry A (TA), 23d FA: Attached to1-51 FA. Priority of observation to TF 1-14 Armor, initiallocation vic 4027, azimuth 2,400 mils.
b. AN/TPQ-36, Section 2, Btry A (TA) , 23d FA: Attached to1-51 FA. Receive RDO from battalion S2. Initial position vic4030, azimuth 2,200 mils. TF 1-14 Armor will provide initialsecurity.
(Classification)
C-25
FM 6-20-40
EXAMPLE OPERATION ORDER (CONTINUED)
(Classification]
APPENDIX 2 (TARGET ACQUISITION) TO ANNEX F (FA SUPPORT PLAN) TOOPORD COSMIC--2d Bale, 23d Armd Div
4. COORDINATION
a. Brigade critical friendly zones are: TF 1-14 Armor CP; TF1-92 Mech CP; brigade tactical CP; 1-51 FA CP; 2-636 FA CP; andBtry A, B, and C, 1-51 FA.
b. Cueing Instructions. Q-36 radiates 0/0 of the battalionS2. Other acquisition assets (FIST, OPs, COLTS, FSOs) requestradar coverage through the DS battalion CF.
c. All observers submit visibility diagrams to the DSbattalion S2.
TABS :
A--COLTS Capability Overlay (omitted)B--Radar Deployment Order TPS-25 (omitted)C --Radar Deployment Order TPQ-36 (omitted)
(Classification)
APPENDIX 3COSMIC--2d
Reference:
LINENUMBER
Group A1C
1718
Group A2C
192028
(Classification)
(SCHEDULES) TO ANNEX F (FA SUPPORT PLAN) TO OPORDBde, 23d Armd Div
Map, series M745, EUROPE, sheet 1 (LAUTERBACH -STADTALLENDORF), edition 1979, 1:50,000.
FIRING TARGETUNIT NUMBER ROUNDS
B/1-51 AC0017 24A/1-51 AC0018 24
A/1-51 AC0019 32B/1-51 AC0020 32C/1-51 AC0028 32
( C l a s s i f i c a t i o n )
C-26
FM 6-20-40
APPENDIX 3COSMIC--2dLINENUMBER
Group A3C
2122
Group A4C
2324
Group A5C
2526
Group A6C
3233
Group A7C
3435
Group A8C
3637
Group A9C
3839
Remarks:
EXAMPLE OPERATION ORDER (CONTINUED)
(Classification)(SCHEDULES) TO ANNEX F (FA SUPPORT PLAN) TO OPORDBale, 23dFIRINGUNIT
B/1-51A/1-51
B/1-51C/1-51
B/1-51C/1-51
C/1-51B/1-51
B/1-51A/1-51
A/1-51B/1-51
B/1-51C/1-51
Armd DivTARGETNUMBER ROUNDS
AC0021 24AC0022 24
AC0023AC0024
AC0025AC0026
AC0032AC0033
AC0034AC0035
AC0036AC0037
AC0038ACO039
2424
3232
2424
2424
2424
3232
Fire DPICM on all groups.
(Classification)
C-27
FM 6-20-40
APPENDIX D
FIRE PLANNING TERMS, SYMBOLS, SCHEDULES, ANDTOOLS
This appendix implements portions of STANAG 2031, Edition 5, and QSTAG 515,Edition 1.
Target TermsThe term target is the most fundamental termused in fire support planning. A target ispersonnel, materiel, or a piece of terrain thatis designated and numbered for futurereference and/or attack.
Target of OpportunityA target of opportunity is a target that appearsduring combat and against which no attack hasbeen prearranged.
Planned TargetA planned target is a target upon which firesa r e p r e a r r a n g e d . T h e d e g r e e o fprearrangement varies, but some priorcoordination or action has been done tofacilitate its engagement. Planned targets maybe further subdivided into scheduled, on-call,and priority targets.
Scheduled Target. A scheduled target is aplanned target that will be attacked at aspecific time. This time may be related to anH-hour or to another time reference.
On-Call Target. An on-call target is a plannedtarget which has not been scheduled for attackat a specific time but which may be attackedwhen requested. The on-call target requiresless reaction time than a target of opportunity.
Priority Target. A priority target is a target theattack of which. when requested, takes priority
over all other requests. Priority targetsdesignated by the maneuver commander.also gives specific guidance as to when
areHethe
targets will become priority, the munitions touse, the accuracy required, and the desiredeffects. When not engaged in fire missions,firing units lay on priority targets. FSOsshould note that they can get as many as threepriority targets from a six-gun battery or fourpriority targets from an eight-gun battery. Twopriority targets may be assigned to an 81-mmmortar platoon – one per section.
Final Protective Fires. Final protective fires are aspecial set of priority targets. They aredesigned to create a final barrier of steel thatkeeps the enemy from moving across defensivelines. Final protective fires are desperationfires.
Target Numbering System
This paragraph implements STANAG 2147, Edition4, and QSTAG 221, Edition 2.
To designate nonnuclear targets for firesupport operations, the Army adheres to theprovisions of STANAG 2147 and QSTAG 221.Target designators consist of two lettersfollowed by four numerals; for example,CB3002. This numbering system is used foreach corps-size force.
Normally, nuclearspecial block of
targets are not assigned atarget numbers. A target
D-1
FM 6-20-40
should be assigned a number when it isreceived at a fire planning agency. If a targetis selected for attack, the most appropriatemeans (nuclear, chemical, or conventional), asdetermined by target analysis, will be used toattack the target. That analysis is guided by thecommander’s attack guidance and other factorssuch as nature of the target and munitionsavailable.
The first letter of the two-letter groupdesignates a particular nation or a corpsassociated with a particular nation.
NATIONAL IDENTIFYING LETTERS
NATION LETTER
Australia V
Belgium B
Canada C, Z
Denmark D
France F
Germany G
Greece E
Italy R
Luxemburg L
Netherlands H
Norway N
Portugal P
Spain S
Turkey T
United Kingdom U, X
United States A, K, Y, W
AMF (L) M
LEGEND:AMF (L) = ACE (Allied Command Europe)Mobile Force (Land)
NOTE: The letters O and I are not used.
Each Army headquarters allocates a first letterto its corps. A corps may be assigned morethan one letter. Letters assigned to eachnation may be reused as long as adjacent corpsof that nation do not share the same letter.
The second letter is assigned by corps down tobrigade level. Also, second-letter designatorsare made for corps artillery CPs, corps FScells, div arty CPs, and division FS cells.
EXAMPLE LETTER DESIGNATORS FOR12TH (US) CORPS WITH 54TH MECH
DIV AND 16TH ARMD DIV
LETTERORGANIZATION DESIGNATOR
12th (US) Corps A
12th (US) Corps Artillery CP AX
12th (US) Corps FS Cell AY
54th Mech Div FS Cell AA
54th Mech Div Arty CP AB
1st Bde, 54th Mech Div AC
2d Bde, 54th Mech Div AD
3d Bde, 54th Mech Div AE
4th Bde, 54th Mech Div AF
16th Armd Div FS Cell AG
16th Armd Div Arty CP AH
1st Bde, 16th Armd Div AJ
2d Bde, 16th Armd Div AK
3d Bde, 16th Armd Div AL
4th Bde, 16th Armd Div AM
D-2
FM 6-20-40
Blocks of numbers are assigned by thoseheadquarters having two assigned letters. Fieldartillery CPs assign blocks from 0001 through7000 as needed.
ASSIGNMENT OF BLOCKS OFNUMBERS
NUMBER ASSIGNED TO
0001-1999 FS cell
2000-2999 FSO, lowest numbered maneuverbattalion or squadron1
3000-3999 FSO, second lowest numberedmaneuver battalion or squadron
4000-4999 FSO, third lowest numberedmaneuver battalion or squadron
5000-6999 Additional FSOs
7000-7999 FDC, direct support artillery
80000-8999 Counterfire targets
9000-9999 Toxic chemical targets
1Lowest regimental number.
A battalion- or squadron-size element with ablock of numbers may suballocate numbers asshown below.
SUBASSIGNMENT OF BLOCKS OFNUMBERS
NUMBERS ASSIGNED TO
000-199 FSO
200-299 FIST, Co A
300-399 FIST, Co B
400-499 FIST, Cc C
500-699 Additional FISTs and/or COLTs
700-799 Battalion mortar platoon,squadron, or howitzer battery
800-999 As required.
NOTE: If additional numbers are needed, com-pany FSOs get them from the battalion FSO. Thetarget numbering system in effect within your unitshould be a part of the unit SOP, when possible.For contingency units, the system is OPORD-de-pendent.
Target Symbols
Standard symbols are used in the preparationof maps, charts, and overlays to identify targetsby type.
Point TargetA point target is a target that is less than 200meters wide. The symbol with relevantinformation is as shown below.
POINT TARGETSYMBOL
Linear TargetA linear target is more than 200 meters butless than 600 meters long. Targets longer than600 meters require fire support assets otherthan field artillery or must be furthersubdivided into multiple targets for attack byfield artillery. A linear target is designated onthe target list by two grids or a center grid,length, and attitude.
D-3
FM 6-20-40
Rectangular TargetA rectangular target is wider and longer than200 meters. It is designated on the target listby four grids or by a center grid, length, width,and attitude.
Circular TargetA circular target is circular in nature or itsexact shape is vague. On the target list, it isdesignated by a center grid and a radius.
Final Protective FireAn FPF is a type of priority fire which issimilar to a linear target. The symbol usedincludes the target number, the designation ofFPF, and the system and/or unit to deliver thefires.
Target Reference PointManeuver elements use an easily identifiabletarget reference point to orient direct fireweapon systems. This is one of our directinterfaces into the direct fire system. All TRPsshould be dually identified in terms of thedirect fire system and the target numberingsystem. The symbol is the same as that for astandard target with a target number and aTRP letter. Each TRP should be plotted onthe map and identified as a target. Maneuverwill call for it to be fired. TRPs are includedon the target list and are identified in theremarks section as TRPs.
D-4
FM 6-20-40
Target List Work SheetThe target list work sheet is a form thatfacilitates fire planning by the fire supportcoordinator. It is a preliminary listing of alltargets and their descriptions from which theFSO can select and plan. (See Appendix L.)
Preparation of the Target ListWork Sheet
The procedure for preparing DA Form 4655-Ris outlined below.
Line NumberThis is an administrative control measure forinternal use. Assign each target a line number.
Target NumberAssign each target a target number from theblock of numbers given to the planning source.
Description
Enter a concise target description that isadequate for a decision on how the targetshould be attacked.
LocationEnter grid coordinates for point, rectangular,and circular targets. For linear targets, enterthe coordinates of the center point.
AltitudeShow the altitude of the target in meters,unless otherwise specified.
AttitudeEnter the attitude of lineartargets in grid azimuths.
and rectangular
Size (Length and Width)Enter no dimensions for a point target, onedimension (length) for a linear target, twodimensions (length and width) for arectangular target, or the radius of a circulartarget (width).
Source and/or AccuracyThe information this column aids indetermining how to attack the target. Whenknown, enter the source and accuracy of thetarget data.
TARGET LIST WORK SHEET
D-5
FM 6-20-40
RemarksEnter any special consideration(s) for attack ofthe target. The target description may beamplified here.
Work ColumnsThese columns are used to indicate targetsthat are to be inclided in a particular firesupport schedule. Enter one diagonal line (/)under the appropriate column to show thetarget is to be included in a particularschedule. When the target has been scheduled,enter an opposing diagonal line, forming an Xto show the action is complete.
Types of Planned Fires
Group of TargetsA group of targets consists of two or moretargets on which the maneuver commanderdesires simultaneous attack. It is graphicallyportrayed by circling the targets andidentifying them with a group designator. Thisdesignator consists of the two letters assignedto the maneuver brigade with a numberbetween the letters. The numbers should beassigned sequentially as they are used. Thenumber of FA firing batteries and/or battalionsavailable must be considered in planninggroups of targets. Inclusion of individualtargets in a group does not preclude themfrom being attacked individually.
Series of TargetsA series of targets is a number of targetsand/or groups of targets planned to be fired ina predetermined time sequence to support amaneuver operation. A series may also befired on call, at a specified time, or when acertain event occurs. The maneuvercommander determines the need for a serieson the advice of his FSO. The series isindicated by a code name or nickname.Inclusion of individual targets or a group oftargets in a series does not preclude targetsfrom being attacked individually.
Program of TargetsA program is the predetermined sequentialattack of targets of a similar nature. It may beexecuted on call, at a specific time, or when aparticular event occurs. Targets are designatedby their nature and are based on thecommander’s guidance. For example, in acounterfire program, all the targets areartillery-system-related -OPs, artillerybatteries, mortar platoons, CPs. A program isnot graphically displayed.
Preparation FireFire delivered on targets preparatory to anassault is called preparation fire. Thepreparation is planned by a direct support FAbattalion or higher echelon. It is an intensevolume of fire delivered in accordance with a
D-6
FM 6-20-40
time schedule. The fires normally begin beforeH-hour and may extend beyond it. They maystart at a prescribed time or be held on call.The duration of the preparation is influencedby factors such as the fire support needs of theentire force, the number of targets, and thefiring assets and ammunition available.
CounterpreparationA counterpreparation is an intense volume ofprearranged fire that is delivered when thethreat of enemy attack is discovered.
NOTE: The decision to plan and/or fire a prepara-tion or counterpreparation is made by themaneuver commander with advice from his FSO.These fires, along with the other types of fires dis-cussed, are an Integral part of the overall opera-tion and must be synchronized with other ac-tivities.
Scheduling of FireSupport Assets
Once the decisions are made concerningplanned targets, the FSO coordinates firesupport assets to implement the plan. Forexample, if mortars and artillery are availableassets, the FSO, with input from personnel ofthose various systems, coordinates whichtargets and when the mortars will attack. Thesame is true for the artillery. The various firesupport systems retain the responsibility forthe more precise scheduling of their integralfire units.
Target OverlayThe target overlay is used to supplement theDA Form 4655-R. The overlay is a graphicalrepresentation of the target list work sheet.Symbols used on it should be standard militarysymbols. Targets are plotted on the overlay bysymbols and target numbers. Fire supportassets supporting the maneuver unit, as well as
all coordinating measures, should be plottedon the overlay. The overlay is used as a tool –
Ž To resolve duplications of targets.
Ž To integrate the scheme of maneuver withthe plan of supporting fires.
• To determine the most appropriate unit toengage the target.
Scheduling Work SheetThe FSO finds the commander’s guidance andthe fire support requirements in the firesupport plan. He analyzes this information,plus that on DA Form 4655-R, and determineswhat schedules of fire must be prepared tosupport the scheme of maneuver. The FSOthen passes these requirements to the DSbattalion CP where the necessary DA Forms4656-R (Scheduling Work Sheets) areprepared. (A reproducible copy of DA Form4656-R is in Appendix L.) Any of thefollowing schedules may be prepared,depending on the situation:
• Groups.
• Series.
• Programs.
• Preparations.
Ž Counterpreparations.
Ž Illumination.
• Harassing.
• Interdiction.
• Smoke.
A separate DA Form 4656-R is prepared foreach. It is the fire planner’s tool for organizingthe targets that appear on the DA Form
D-7
FM 6-20-40
4655-R into specific schedules. The DA Form4656-R provides the following information:
Ž A specific sequence during which the targetsscheduled will be engaged.
• Targets requiring more than one volley.These will be scheduled at the sustained rateof fire for the weapon system being used.
• The total expenditure of ammunition by eachfiring unit on each target.
• The shell-fuze combination for each target ifit deviates from the standard of HE-quick.
• Any targets that are to be engaged on call.
• Any special instructions, such as 50 percentVT on OPs.
Ž The fire support assets available.
Unless otherwise indicated in the REMARKScolumn, all targets will be engaged withHE-quick. For planning purposes, the schedule --reflects time of impact (TOT) for all targets.Targets that appear on the target list worksheet but do not appear on the schedulingwork sheet are on call.
Preparation of the SchedulingWork Sheet
The procedure for preparing a DA Form4656-R is outlined below.
HeadingEnter the type of schedule, the supported unit,and the OPORD for which it is beingprepared.
Line NumberThis is an administrative control number.Number each line sequentially. This gives allholders of the schedule a means of quickreference for finding which units have been
D-8
FM 6-20-40
scheduled and specific information that relatesto those targets.
Organization and CaliberEnter the organizational information, toinclude caliber and weapon type, for each unitfor which you have planning authority.
Firing UnitsInformation entered here reflects the size anddesignation of the firing unit.
Scheduling TargetsTo the upper right of the FIRING UNITScolumn is an untitled portion of the worksheet, referred to as the timing block.
The upper portion of the block is used by thefiring units to establish time to fire, or lanyardpull time, so that the rounds impact at thescheduled times.
Information on the lower portion of the blockis based on time of impact of rounds fired.The purpose of the block is to establish theduration of a particular schedule relative totime. Schedules may start at a specific time
(H-hour) or may be scheduled on call (startplotting at time 0).
Below the timing block is a block ofintersecting horizontal and vertical lines, calledthe time matrix. It is used to assign targets tofiring units. This assignment is based on theability of the unit to adequately engage thetarget as shown by the target overlay. The timematrix graphically portrays time of impact andduration of fires and may refer to a specificshell-fuze combination to be used. This is doneby representing the target to be engaged byeither a dot (one volley) or a horizontal line(more than one volley). The interval betweenthe vertical lines is based on the weaponsystem rate of fire and the number of differentsystems being scheduled on the same worksheet. For example, for a 155-mm howitzer,the normal interval is 60 seconds. Thus, atarget being engaged by three 155-mm volleyswould have a duration line three vertical lineslong with impacts on each of the vertical lines.Another factor that must be considered inscheduling is the shift time of the weaponsystem being scheduled. Shift time is thelength of time needed for the firing unit tocease firing on one target and commencefiring on the next scheduled target.
SHIFT TIMES
WEAPON SUSTAINED RATE OF FIRE SHIFT TIME
60-mm mortar 15 rd/mln 1 min
81-mm mortar 8 rd/mln 1 min
81-mm mortar (improved) 15 rd/min 1 min
105-mm howitzer 3 rd/min 1 min
155-mm howitzer 1 rd/min 1 min
203-mm howitzer 0.5 rd/min 2 min
LEGEND: min = minute rd/min = rounds per minute
D-9
FM 6-20-40
RemarksThe REMARKS column is used to amplifyinformation in the time matrix portion of thework sheet and to include information for theengagement of on-call targets. A parentheticalletter refers to the amplifying information inthe REMARKS column. On-call targets arelisted on the line of the firing unit assigned toengage them. Any other amplifyinginformation is listed starting under the lastfiring unit line. No duration lines or dots areused for on-call targets because the durationof fire is not specified. If a unit is ordered tofire its on-call target while it is firing theschedule, it will –
• Leave the schedule.
• Fire its on-call target at the maximum rate offire.
● Rejoin the schedule at real time.
Ž Report to its controlling headquarters thosescheduled targets that were not engaged andthose targets on which commander’s effectswere not achieved.
It is up to the controlling headquarters tonotify the commander and recommendappropriate action to engage these targets.
SAMPLE GROUPS OF FIRES SCHEDULE
D-10
FM 6-20-40
D-1 1
FM 6-20-40
APPENDIX E
FIRE SUPPORT COORDINATING MEASURES
This appendix Implements STANAG 2099, Edition 4, and QSTAG 531 (Draft)
Maneuver Control MeasuresAffecting Fire Support
Boundaries are the basic maneuver controlmeasures used by commanders to designatethe geographical area for which a particularunit is tactically responsible. They are normallydesignated along terrain features easilyrecognizable on the ground. They affect firesupport in two ways:
• They are restrictive in that no fire supportmeans may deliver fires across a boundaryunless those fires are coordinated with theforce having responsibility for the area withinthat boundary (unless a permissive measure isin effect).
• They are permissive in that the maneuvercommander has complete freedom of fire andmaneuver within his boundaries (unlessotherwise restricted by higher headquarters).
Many times, boundaries negate the need forfire support coordinating measures.
In many instances, the maneuver commandermay choose not to establish boundaries for hissubordinate elements. In that case, the FSO atthat level is responsible for all fire supportcoordination within the area of operations orzone of action. The graphic below shows justsuch a situation. The brigade commander hasassigned battle positions to his subordinateunits and has not designated battalionboundaries. Thus, the brigade FSO is nowresponsible for coordinating all fires in thebrigade sector except in those areas boundedby the battle positions. He may recommend tothe brigade commander the use of fire supportcoordinating measures as the situation dictates;for example, a brigade CFL.
E-1
FM 6-20-40
Fire Support CoordinatingMeasures
Fire support coordinating measures aredesigned to facilitate the rapid engagement oftargets and, at the same time, providesafeguards for friendly forces. They ensure thatfire support will not jeopardize troop safety,will interface with other fire support means,and/or will not disrupt adjacent unitoperations. Graphic portrayal is in black andincludes, at a minimum, the abbreviation ofthe measure, the establishing headquarters,and the effective date-time group (DTG).Usually, coordinating measures are labeled ateach end of a line or within the graphic, spacepermitting.
Permissive MeasuresPermissive measures are those that facilitatethe attack of targets.
Coordinated Fire Line
The CFL (denoted by a broken line) is a linebeyond which conventional surface-to-surface
fires may be delivered within the zone of theestablishing headquarters without additionalcoordination. Normally, it is established bybrigade or higher headquarters; however, itmay be established by a battalion operatingindependently. In the example below, the areathat extends from the CFL forward to the endof the 2d Brigade boundary may be attackedby all surface-to-surface fire support meanswithout coordination with 2d Brigade. Thisattack includes units in and adjacent to 2dBrigade.
In the offense, the CFL should be placed farenough in front of friendly forces to facilitatelifting and/or shifting of the measure to avoidfriendly casualties and to allow room for themaneuver forces. Always be aware of the timerequired to lift and/or shift the measure.
In the defense, the CFL should be brought inclose to friendly forces. Considerations forhow close are based on weather, terrain, andmunitions effects.
EXAMPLE OF COORDINATED FIRE LINE
E-2
FM 6-20-40
Fire Support Coordination LineA fire support coordination line (FSCL) maybe established by corps within its area ofoperation to support its concept of theoperation. The FSCL is used to coordinatefires of air, ground, or sea weapon systemsusing any type of ammunition against surfacetargets. The location of the FSCL must becoordinated with the appropriate tactical aircommander and other supporting elements.The purpose of this permissive fire controlmeasure is to allow the corps and itssubordinate and supporting units (such as theAir Force) to expeditiously attack targets ofopportunity beyond the FSCL. The attack oftargets beyond the FSCL by Army assetsshould be coordinated with supporting tacticalair. This coordination is defined as informingand/or consulting with supporting tactical air.However, the inability to effect thiscoordination will not preclude the attack oftargets beyond the FSCL. The interface withinthe FS cell between the various fire supportrepresentatives provides an excellent means ofinitially coordinating the attack of targets inthis area. The FSCL is denoted by a solid line.
Free-Fire AreaA free-fire area (FFA) is an area into whichany weapon system may fire without additionalcoord ina t ion wi th the es tab l i sh ingheadquarters. Normally, it is established onidentifiable terrain by division or higherheadquarters.
EXAMPLE OF FREE-FIRE AREA
EXAMPLE OF FIRE SUPPORT COORDINATION LINE
E-3
FM 6-20-40
Restrictive MeasuresRestrictive measures are those that providesafeguards for friendly forces, facilities, orterrain.
Restrictive Fire LineAn RFL is a line between converging friendlyforces that prohibits fires, or their effects,across the line without coordination with theaffected force. It is established on identifiableterrain by the common commander of theconverging forces. In the graphic below, 2dBrigade is conducting a link up with 1stBrigade. The 8th Inf Div commander, thecommon commander of both forces, hasestablished the RFL. If 2d Brigade wants toattack Target AC2301, it must coordinate with1st Brigade.
Restrictive Fire AreaAn RFA is an area with specific restrictionsand in which fires that exceed those
restrictions will not be delivered withoutcoordination wi th the es tab l i sh ingheadquarters. It is established by battalion orhigher headquarters. On occasion, it may beestablished by a company operatingindependently. The imposed restriction will beshown as in the graphic below, or a referenceto the OPORD or OPLAN where therestriction can be found is annotated on theoverlay.
EXAMPLE OF RESTRICTIVE FIRE AREA
EXAMPLE OF RESTRICTIVE FIRE LINE
E-4
FM 6-20-40
No-Fire AreaA no-fire area (NFA) is an area into which nofires or their effects are allowed. It isestablished on identifiable terrain, normally bydivision or higher headquarters. It may beestablished in conjunction with a host nation topreclude damage or destruction to a nationalasset, population center, or shrine. It also maybe established to protect an element of tacticalimportance, such as a fuel storage area. Twoexceptions to the no-fire rule exist:
• When the establishing headquarters allowsfires on a mission-by-mission basis.
• When a friendly force is engaged by anenemy located within the NFA and thecommander returns fire to defend his forces.The amount of return fire should not exceedthat sufficient to protect the force andcontinue the mission.
Airspace Coordination AreaAn ACA is a block of airspace in the targetarea in which friendly aircraft are reasonablysafe from friendly surface fires.
Informal ACAs are most often used and arethe preferred method. An informal ACA canbe established at task force or higher level andnormally is not depicted on charts or maps. Itcan be established by using lateral, altitude,timed, or lateral and altitude separation.Informal ACAs are normally in effect for veryshort periods of time. Usually, the time periodis only long enough to get the mission into andout of the target area (3 to 6 minutes). (SeeAppendix A.)
A formal ACA is occasionally established bybrigade or higher headquarters. The ALOrecommends the size. Altitude is in feet abovesea level.
EXAMPLE OF NO-FIRE AREA EXAMPLE OF FORMAL AIRSPACECOORDINATION AREA
E-5
FM 6-20-40
APPENDIX F
COMMUNICATIONS
IntroductionThis appendix is intended for users,supervisors, and planners. It provides basicguidance on planning and employingcommunications assets. The development ofoperating procedures and doctrinal changes isan evolutionary process. The information inthis appendix is modeled on an objective heavydivision (L-series) TOE. Users operating undermodification TOES (MTOEs) must understandthat some of the procedures and methodsoutlined herein are a model solution and maybe tailored to meet specific unit requirements.
Communications SystemsRadio is the major means of voice and digitalcommunications within the field artillery.Separate radio nets are established forcommand and control, fire direction, firesupport coordination, fire support planning,and administration and logistics. The executionof AirLand Battle doctrine requires the skillfuluse of all communications resources. Thus,close coordination and a clear understandingof radio net structure are necessary.
A communications system is the result of aplan designed to fulfill the requirements of ageneral heavy division mission. As a result ofnet standardization, units can quickly andaccurately communicate in combat. Commanddiscipline must be established so that thesestandard net structures and purposes are notarbitrarily changed except to tailor for aspecific modified mission. This tailoring isbased on the factors of METT-T. Standard netstructures (net title, Purpose, users, andequipment) should be defined in SOP andshould be kept current as changes inprocedures and/or systems occur.
Communications system planning must includeadvance coordination for SOI and COMSECmaterials for secure operations. Consider thefire support scheme of maneuver for planned,on-order, and anticipated missions.
Radio Net StructuresRefer to the fire support communications netsmatrix on page F-6.
Forward Observer and/or AerialObserver
A forward observer is equipped with a singleradio set; however, several nets may beavailable for the observer. The net theobserver selects is based on several factors –mission, experience level, and operationalcontrol. Whether the observer is airborne, in atracked vehicle, or on foot, each may operateon the nets discussed below.
Maneuver Battalion Mortar Fire Direction NetVHF-FM (Digital). This net is used for battalionmortar tactical and technical fire directionwithin the maneuver battalion. The battalionmortar FDC is the net control station.
Maneuver Battalion Fire Support Net VHF-FM(Voice). This net is used for voice fire supportcoordination between maneuver and firesupport elements. The battalion FS cell is thenet control station.
Direct Support Battalion Fire Direction Nets 1, 2,and 3 VHF-FM (Digital). These nets areduplicates of each other. They are used fortactical and technical fire direction from theFOs through the DS battalion FDC to thebattery and/or platoon FDC. The DS battalionFDC at the tactical CP is the NCS.
F-1
FM 6-20-40
Division Artillery Operations/Fire Nets 1, 2, and 3VHF-FM (Digital). These nets also are duplicatesof each other. They are used for tactical firedirection and fire support planning for the divarty elements. The aerial observer may berequired to operate on these nets. The div artyCP is the NCS.
Division Artillery Target Acquisition/intelligence NetVHF-FM (Digital). This net is used for div artytarget acquisition and intelligence (intel)gathering. The aerial observer may be requiredto operate on this net, as do other TA assetsat div arty such as the Q-36 radar. The NCS isthe div arty operations and processing sectionat the div arty CP.
Maneuver Battalion Mortar FireDirection Center
The maneuver battalion mortar FDC operateson three nets:
Ž Maneuver battalion command/operations(cmd/ops) net VHF-FM (voice).
• Maneuver battalion fire support (FS) netVHF-FM (digital).
Ž Maneuver battalion mortar fire direction netVHF-FM (digital).
Combat Observation/Lasing Team
The COLT has three radio sets and operatesin the following nets as directed by thebrigade fire support officer:
•
Ž
•
Maneuver battalion fire support netVHF-FM (voice), as required.
Maneuver brigade fire support net VHF-FM(voice). This net is used for fire supportcoordination between the brigade FSO, hisFS cell, FA elements, and the maneuverbrigade. The brigade FS cell is the NCS.
Maneuver battalion mortar fire direction netVHF-FM (digital), as required.
F-2
Ž Direct support battalion fire direction nets 1,2, and 3 VHF-FM (digital), as required.
Fire Support Team or Company FireSupport Officer
The FIST and the company FSO haveequipment configurations based on supportedmaneuver companies. The mechanized infantryFIST is equipped with four radio sets, and thearmor or armored cavalry FIST has threeradio sets. The FIST and FSO control the FOsand respond to input from both the maneuverand DS battalions on the following nets:
Direct Support Battalion Command Net VHF-FM(Voice). This net is used for command andcontrol and for initial coordination. Onreaching the maneuver element or unit, theFIST normally drops off this net and enters theDS battalion FD net assigned.
Direct Support Battalion Fire Direction Nets 1, 2,and 3 VHF-FM (Digital). The FIST may controlFO calls for fire support on these nets.
Maneuver Battalion Mortar Fire Direction NetVHF-FM (Digital). The FIST may control FOcalls for mortar fire support on this net andmay use it for digital control of the FOs in thecentralized mode of operation.
Maneuver Battalion Fire Support Net VHF-FM(Voice). This net is used for voice fire supportcoordination when the FSO is physically withthe maneuver commander and calls for firesupport from other than FA observers.
Maneuver Company Command/Operations NetVHF-FM (Voice). When the FSO is not physicallywith the maneuver commander, the FISTmonitors this maneuver net to provide rapidresponse to the commander’s intent.
Battalion FS Cell and Battalion FireSupport Officer
The battalion FS cell and the battalion FSOhave five radio sets and respond to input from
FM 6-20-40
both maneuver and DS battalions on thefollowing nets:
•
•
Ž
•
Maneuver battalion command/operations netVHF-FM (voice). When the FSO is notphysically with the maneuver commander theFS cell monitors this maneuver net to providerapid response to the commander’s intent.
Maneuver battalion fire support net VHF-FM(voice). The FS cell is the NCS of this net.
Maneuver brigade fire support net VHF-FM(voice).
Maneuver battalion mortar fire direction netVHF-FM (digital), as required.
• Direct support battalion fire direction nets 1, 2,and 3 VHF-FM (digital), as required.
• Direct support battalion operations/fire netVHF-FM (digital). This net is used for FAdigital fire support planning and coordinationcalls for reinforcing fire, and mutual supportoperations. The DS battalion CP is the NCS.
• Direct support battalion command netVHF-FM (voice). This net is used for initialcoordination and control of movement beforearrival at the maneuver battalion. Then the FScell drops off to the maneuver brigade firesupport net VHF-FM (voice). The FSO maymonitor this net as required.
• Div arty command net VHF-FM (voice). Thisnet is used for command and control of all divarty elements. The FSO may monitor this netas required.
Battery or Platoon Fire DirectionCenter
The battery or platoon FDC has four radiosets to operate on the following nets:
• Battery command net VHF-FM (voice). Thisnet is used for command and control of allbattery elements and provides a voice radio netfor battery use.
Ž Battery fire direction net VHF-FM (digital).This net is used for technical fire direction.
•
•
Direct support battalion command netVHF-FM (voice).
Direct support battalion fire direction nets 1,2,and 3 VHF-FM (digital).
Direct Support Battalion Command PostThe DS battalion CP has two distinctenti t ies– the FDC and the operationsprocessing section. In addition, the DSbattalion has a logistics operations centerlocated with the brigade combat trains. Thiscenter has its own radio net, the DS battalionadministrative/logistics (admin/log) netVHF-FM (voice). The CP operates on thefollowing nets:
•
•
•
Ž
•
Ž
Ž
•
Maneuver brigade command/operations netVHF-FM (voice).
Maneuver brigade fire support net VHF-FM.
Direct support battalion command netVHF-FM (voice).
Direct support battalion fire direction nets 1,2, and 3 VHF-FM (digital).
Direct support battalion operations/fire netVHF-FM (digital).
Div arty command net VHF-FM (voice).
Div arty operations/fire nets 1, 2, and 3VHF-FM (digital).
Div a r ty command/ f i re (CF) ne tHF-AM/single sideband (SSB)(voice/facsimile). This net is used to provide amultipurpose long-distance capability forcommunication with its subordinatebattalions, its MLRS battery, and the divisionFS cell. The operations/processing section isthe NCS.
F-3
FM 6-20-40
Brigade FS Cell and/or Brigade FireSupport Officer
The brigade FS cell and FSO have four radiosets to operate on the following nets:
•
•
Ž
•
•
Maneuver brigade command/operations netVHF-FM (voice). he FS cell monitors thisnet when the FSO is not physically with themaneuver commander.
Maneuver brigade fire support net VHF-FM(voice) (NCS).
Direct support battalion command netVHF-FM (voice), as required.
Direct support battalion operations/fire netVHF-FM-(digital), as required.
Div arty command net VHF-FM (voice).
• Div arty operations/fire nets 1, 2, and 3VHF-FM (digital), as required.
Ž Maneuver battalion fire support netVHF-FM (voice), as required.
Aviation Brigade FS Cell and/or AviationBrigade Fire Support Officer
The aviation (avn) brigade FS cell and FSOhave three radio sets to operate on thefollowing nets:
•
•
Ž
Ž
•
Maneuver brigade command/operations netVHF-FM (voice), as required.
Maneuver brigade fire support net VHF-FM(voice).
Direct support battalion command netVHF-FM (voice), as required.
Direct support battalion operations/fire netVHF-FM (digital), as required.
Div arty command net VHF-FM (voice).
• Div arty operations/fire nets 1, 2, and 3VHF-FM (digital), as required.
• Maneuver battalion fire support net VHF-FM(voice), as required.
Division Fire Support ElementsThe tactical and main fire support elementshave similar equipment, but the tactical FSE ismounted in an armored carrier command post(M577). Both FSEs operate on the followingnets:
•
Ž
•
•
•
Division fire support net HF-AM/SSB (voiceanchor facsimile [fax]). On this net, the FS cellsconduct fire support planning and coordinationwith each other and the div arty commandpost. The main FS cell is the NCS.
Corps fire support net HF-AM/SSB (voiceand/or facsimile). The corps FS cells conductfire support planning and coordination on thisnet. Division FS cells (tactical and main) mayenter this net as required.
Div arty command net VHF-FM (voice).
Div arty operations/fire nets 1, 2, and 3VHF-FM (digital).
Div arty command/fire net HF-AM/SSB(voice and/or facsimile), as required.
Div Arty Tactical Command Post
The div arty CP is the hub of the artilleryeffort within the division area. Therefore, theCP plays an extremely important role withineach maneuver brigade area. The CP isdivided into two main sections, the FDC andthe operations/processing section. Anadditional element, the div arty logisticsoperations center, has a radio net of its own,the div arty admin/log net VHF-FM (voice).The div arty CP maintains communicationswith division, corps artillery, direct supportbattalions, and the MLRS battery on thefollowing nets:
F-4
FM 6-20-40
• Division cmd/ops net VHF-FM (voice). Thisis a maneuver net for command and controland combat operations. The div arty CPmonitors this net to respond to the maneuvercommander’s intent.
Ž
•
•
Ž
•
Ž
Division fire support net HF-AM/SSB (voiceand/or facsimile), as required.
Div arty(NCS).
Div artyVHF-FM
command net VHF-FM (voice)
operations/fire nets 1, 2, and 3(digital) (NCS).
Div arty target acquisition/intelligence netVHF-FM (digital) (NCS).
Div arty command/fire net HF-AM/SSB(voice and/or facsimile) (NCS).
Corps art i l lery command/fire netHF-AM/SSB (voice and/or facsimile). Thisnet is a multipurpose net used forlong-distance command and control and fortechnical and tactical fire direction to allartillery elements within the corps area. Thecorps artillery CP is the NCS.
Separate Maneuver Brigade Fire SupportElement and Separate Brigade
Fire Support Officer
The separate (sep) brigade fire support effort ismultifaceted and must be able to respond tothe maneuver commander at corps or division,depending on operational control and themission assigned. The FSE and FSO may haveto coordinate with corps artillery, div arty, oran FA brigade. The separate brigade FSE andFSO may have to operate in the nets describedbelow.
When the maneuver brigade is OPCON tocorps, the brigade FSE and FSO may operatein the following nets:
• Corps command/operations net VHF-FM(voice). This is a maneuver net for command
•
•
•
and control and for combat operations. Theseparate brigade FSE monitors this net torespond to the maneuver commander’sintent. Corps main CP is the NCS.
Corps fire support net HF-AM/SSB (radioteletypewriter [RATT).
Corps artillery command net VHF-FM(voice). This net is used for command andcontrol of all corps artillery elements. Thecorps artillery CP is the NCS.
Corps artillery operations/fire nets 1,2, and 3VHF-FM (digital). These nets are used forfire support planning and coordinationbetween artillery units. They also are used fortactical and technical fire direction tosubordinate artillery elements. The corpsartillery FDC is the NCS.
Ž Corps artillery command/ f i re ne tHF-AM/SSB (voice and/or facsimile). This
When the maneuver brigade is OPCON tocorps but with a supporting FA brigade, themaneuver brigade FS cell and FSO mayoperate in the following nets:
• FA brigade command net VHF-FM (voice).This net is used for command and control ofthe FA brigade elements. The FA brigade CPis the NCS.
• FA brigade operations/fire nets 1, 2, and 3VHF-FM (digital). These nets are used forfire support planning and coordinationbetween artillery units and for tactical andtechnical fire direction to subordinate artilleryelements. The FA brigade CP is the NCS.
• FA brigade command/fire net HF-AM/SSB(voice and/or facsimile). This net is amultipurpose net used for long-distancecommand and control and for technical andtactical fire direction to all artillery elementswithin the FA brigade area. The FA brigadeCP is the NCS.
F-5
FM 6-20-40
FIRE SUPPORT COMMUNICATIONS NETS MATRIX
F-6
FM 6-20-40
When the maneuver brigade is OPCON to adivision, the brigade FS cell and FSO mayoperate in the following nets:
• Division command/operations net VHF-FM(voice).
• Division fire support net HF-AM/SSB (voiceand/or facsimile).
• Div arty command net VHF-FM (voice).
• Div arty operations/fire nets 1, 2, and 3VHF-FM (digital).
• Div arty command fire net HF-AM/SSB (voiceand/or facsimile).
Single-Channel Ground-AirborneRadio System
The single-channel ground-airborne radiosystem (SINCGARS) is the new generationcombat net radio (CNR) designed to provide amajor means of command and control. Itsmain features are its resistance to jammingthrough frequency hopping and its increasedcapacity of 2,320 channels. The basic radio isdesigned on a modular basis to achievecommonality among various systemsconfigurations. It can be used in the manpackor vehicular package. It is interoperable withthe AN/VRC-12-series radios. The presentradio net structure will not change in terms ofmission capability, net size, assignment of netstations, or distance covered. Planningconsiderations, however, require frequencymanagement on a decentralized basis. Thismeans frequency management will be done atbattalion level and will require intensivemanagement by staff and supervisors at alllevels of command.
Battlefield Electronic CEOI SystemThe battlefield electronic com-munications-electronics operation instructions(CEOI) system (BECS) is a decentralizedsystem for frequency management and the
publication of unit CEOIs (now called signaloperation instructions). The BECS has beendesigned to provide more responsiveness torapidly changing and highly mobile battlefieldconditions. The system consists of a basicgeneration unit (BGU) and an electronicnotebook (EN). Any radio operator whonormally carries a paper SOI will have anelectronic notebook instead. Distributionchannels are the same as those now used forthe paper SOI.
Mobile Subscriber EquipmentMobile subscriber equipment (MSE) is acommon-user area communications system
COMMUNICATIONS TIPS
DO – DON’T–
Use the lowest power Use homemade codes.setting for effectivetransmission. Use homemade call
signs.Make transmissions asshort as possible. Start vehicle with
radios on.Use properradiotelephone Attempt to talk aroundprocedures. sensitive information.
Use the proper Display frequencies orantenna directional call signs.antenna (possible).
Make antenna farms.Use masking, ifpossible, to hide yoursignal.
Use only authorizedcodes.
Remote radios ifpossible.
Enforce net discipline.
Authenticate.
Try to work throughjamming.
Plan for the use ofretrans.
Keep radios alignedand tuned.
F-7
FM 6-20-40
very similar to the civilian telephone system. Ithas mobile subscribers as well as regulartelephone subscribers. The MSE inconjunction with the improved high frequencyrad io ( IHFR) wi l l e l imina te rad ioteletypewriters.
Loss of CommunicationsCommunication is essential for fire support. Ifcommunication is lost with a station,everything possible must be done toreestablish the link. The FS cell should –
Ž Troubleshoot the radio.
• Erect omnidirectional or unidirectionalantennas.
Digital nets are backed up by voice nets andvice versa. If digital communication is lost,resolve the problem on the voice net. If astation cannot be contacted on any firesupport net, coordinate with maneuvercounterparts to use their nets/stations toreestablish communication. Unit SOP mustdelineate exact actions to be taken toreestablish communication, and all personnelmust be intimately familiar with those actions.
RetransmissionFrequency modulated VHF transmissiondistances are restricted by terrain andobstacles. The siting of radio equipment isoften critical. The following are helpful hintsfor using FM retrans:
Ž A a minimum, make a map recon of the areaof operation. Coordinate with the S2 and S3during the planning phase.
• Analyze the te r ra in for op t imumcommunications to support the scheme ofmaneuver.
• Select primary and alternate locations forretrans. Consider accessibility, defense, andlogistical support.
• Arrange the timetable for site occupation andnet operation. Don’t wait until retrans isneeded before sending it out.
• Ensure operators are well trained. They mustbe able to provide manual relay if they haveequipment failures.
• Ensure operators are aware of the tacticalsituation.
• Ensure users understand how retrans works.
• If retransmitting digital traffic, programadditional key and/or delay time to allowradios to key up.
Ž Users of forward entry devices (FEDs) mayplan to use nearby battery computer systemsto relay messages to TACFIRE. Thiscapabil i ty is usefu l when d i rec tcommunication with TACFIRE is notpossible. Relay addressing should beestablished per SOP or as identified in theappropriate SOI.
Communications PlanningRanges
The table below is to be used incommunications planning. The rangespresented here were determined under idealconditions; weather and terrain may havedrastic degrading influences.
PLANNING RANGES FOR FIRESUPPORT RADIOS
F-8
FM 6-20-40
PLANNING RANGES FOR FIRESUPPORT RADIOS (CONTINUED)
FieId-Expedient AntennasPoor or erratic radio communications may bethe result of excessive distances betweenstations, unfavorable terrain or weather, ordefective antenna equipment. All fire support
personnel must understand the application ofField-expedient antennas for maintaining orenhancing communications and for electroniccounter-countermeasures (ECCM). Regardlessof the type of antenna used, propermaintenance must be performed to getoptimum performance from the equipment.The field-expedient antennas discussed beloware relatively simple, easy to construct fromavailable materials, and highly effective.
Replacement Whip Antenna
In a static position, a broken whip antennam a y b e r e p l a c e d b y u s i n g W D - 1communications wire and an overhead branchor some support assembly. Cut a lo-foot pieceof wire, attach an insulator to one end, anduse a rope attached to the insulator to elevatethe antenna. Strip about 1 inch of insulationfrom the end to be attached to the radio.Loosen the antenna base on the radio, placethe bare wire between the antenna base andthe antenna support receptacle, and retightenthe antenna base. Ensure the improvisedantenna is vertical.
REPLACEMENT WHIP ANTENNAS
F-9
FM 6-20-40
Horizontal Long-Wire AntennaThis is probably the simplest, yet mosteffective, antenna for communicating over longdistances. Maximum radiation is off the endsof this antenna; thus, it is highly directional. Itnot only increases the range of transmissionand reception, but it also tends to reject orreduce signals from other directions. Thismakes it an excellent antijamming device.
WD-1 is ideal for making this antenna. Thewire should be 100 to 150 feet long. Tightlytwist the first section of the WD-1, andconnect the end between the antenna baseand the antenna support receptacle on theradio. The wire must be adequately insulated
to prevent accidental grounding. The antennashould be erected at least 7 to 9 feet high atthe radio and 15 to 20 feet above ground atthe other end. Connect the other end to apole or a tree in the direction in whichcommunication is required. This groundclearance is necessary to prevent accidents orinjuries involving personnel or vehicle traffic.
To make this a one-way (unidirectional)antenna, add a resistor at the end toward thedistant station. A dead flashlight battery BA-30makes an ideal resistor for low-power radios.Attach a nail or screw to each end of thebattery, ensuring they don’t touch, and connectthe wire to each.
HORIZONTAL LONG-WIRE ANTENNA
F-10
Center-Fed Doublet Antenna
The center-fed doublet is an effective two-way(bidirectional) antenna. It is particularlyefficient in jungle environments and for ECCMif both the sending and receiving stations areusing the same type of antenna. Unlike thewhip and many other antennas discussed in thisappendix, this antenna is electronicallyhorizontal and will not communicate with thosethat are electronically vertical.
The length of each element is critical anddepends on the operating frequency. Thislength must be one-quarter wavelength. Todetermine the length of each element in feet,divide 468 by the frequency in megahertz(MHz) which gives you one-half wavelength.Then divide this result by 2 to get one-quarterwavelength in feet. An example using theoperating frequency of 46.80 MHz follows:
4 6 8 4 8 . 8 0 = 1 0 ; 1 0 ÷ 2 = 5element is 5 feet long.
FM 6-20-40
feet; so each
After determining the length of each element,construct the antenna by measuring off slightlymore than the required length of wire and tiea figure-eight knot at that point. Separate thewire into the elements, and attach insulators ateach end. Ensure the elements are the exactlength required. Tightly twist the remainingwire going to the radio to make a transmissioncable, and strip each end of the wire. Put onewire into the center of the antenna cableconncetor, and attach the other wire to themetal case of the radio. Attach the insulatorsto the rope to permit erecting the antennabetween two trees or other support assemblies.Raise the antenna 20 to 30 feet, and ensurethe broadside is directed toward the receivingstation(s).
CENTER-FED DOUBLET ANTENNA
F-11
FM 6-20-40
Vertical Half-Rhombic Antenna
The vertical half-rhombic antenna consists of100 to 150 feet of WD-1 on a 30- to45-foot-high support. The support should becentered with approximately half of the wireon each side. Attach insulators to the ends,and fasten rope to these insulators. Thispermits the ends to be tied down to stakesand the antenna element to be insulated froma ground. Make a transmission cable by tightlytwisting the section of WD-1 coming from theradio end of the antenna element. Strip theends of the cable approximately 1 inch, andconnect these leads between the antenna baseand the antenna support receptacle on theradio. The antenna in this configuration is atwo-way (bidirectional) antenna.
To make this a one-way (unidirectional)antenna, add a resistor at the end toward thedistant station. A dead flashlight battery BA-30makes an ideal resistor for low-power radios.Attach a nail or screw to each end of thebattery, ensuring they don’t touch, and connectthe wire to each.
Resistors and Field-Expedient
Resistors
Resistors are used to draw the signal in thedesired direction of transmission.
Resistors used to construct the long-wire andhalf-rhombic antennas are readily availablethrough supply channels and local radio repairshops. These resistors must have a resistanceof 500 to 600 ohms and be at least half thewattage of the transmitter power output. Forexample, a 600-ohm, 2-watt resistor works withthe AN/PRC-77. Typical power outputs forcombat net radios are as follows:
• AN/VRC- 12-series (-46, -47, and so forth):
High power = 35 watts (minimum).
Low power = 0.5 to 8 watts.
• Ap/PRC-77 = 4 watts.
Ž SINCGARS = 50 watts (maximum).
VERTICAL HALF-RHOMBIC ANTENNA
F-12
FM 6-20-40
NOTE: SINCGARS radios do not perform frequen-cy hopping very well with field-expedient anten-nas, but any antenna is better than none at all.The use of a field-expedient antenna may degradethe SINCGARS to a single-channel operation, butit will permit communication.
Field-expedient resistors should be of the samevalues as those listed above, approximately 500to 600 ohms at about half the wattage output.A dead BA-30 with nails driven into each endwill approximate 500 to 600 ohms at 1 to 3watts. An earplug container with holes drilledin the case opposite each other and filled withsand and a few drops of crankcase oil willwork much like the battery.
Field-Expedient InsulatorsInsulators keep the signal from going in anunwanted direction. Almost anything that willnot conduct electricity but has some strengthcan be an insulator. The very best insulatorsare glass, plastic, and rubber. Less effective butstill usable are cloth, wood, and rope; however,these are not good when wet.
NOTE: The US Army Signal School is in theprocess of replacing the terms FM (frequencymodulated) and AM or AM/SSB (amplitude modu-lated and sing/e sideband) in most radio net titleswith terms more closely denoting range. The fol-lowing frequency range designations will be used:
• HF - high frequency (replacing AM/SSB).
• VHF - very high frequency (replacing FM).
FIELD-EXPEDIENT INSULATORS
F-13
FM 6-20-40
APPENDIX G
TARGET VALUE ANALYSIS
DescriptionTargeting is the process of selecting targetsand matching the appropriate response, takinginto account operational requirements andfriendly force capabilities. Atacking targetsthat the enemy can least afford to lose stripshim of his initiative and forces him to conformto our battle plan. Targeting requiresinteraction between fire support, intelligence,engineer, and maneuver personnel. Targetvalue analysis is an analytical tool to be usedin the targeting process by which themaneuver commander –
• Provides focus for his target acquisitioneffort.
• Identifies priorities for the engagement ofenemy targets that will facilitate the successof his mission.
• Identifies effects criteria.
Ž Permits planning for identified contingenciesbased on enemy options available when theenemy operation fails.
• Better estimates friendly unit capabilities.
Target value analysis is described in Chapter 3of the Fire Support Mission Area Analysis(FSMAA) (classified SECRET) and in FM6-20-10. The complete FSMAA is normallydistributed to FSEs at division and higherechelons. Selected extracts may be distributedto brigade and battalion levels.
High-valueimportantsuccessful
Definitionstargets (HVTs) are targets deemedto the enemy commander for theaccomplishment of his mission. The
loss of HVTs can be expected to contribute toa substantial degradation of an importantenemy battlefield function. High-value targetsare developed by using the TVA tools basedon the interpretation by the friendlyintelligence system of the enemy course ofaction.
High-payoff targets are HVTs that must besuccessfully acquired and attacked tocontribute substantially to the success offriendly operations. They are developed on thebasis of METT-T and are not dependent onthe ability of the unit to acquire or attackthem. If an HPT is beyond the capability ofthe unit to acquire, then it should be passed tothe next-higher echelon as a priorityintelligence requirement.
Attack criteria are a compilation of thecommander’s guidance, desired effects ofattack, high-payoff target lists, and attackpriorities.
The attack guidance matrix is a compilation ofattack criteria in a format that can beunderstood by fire support and targetingagencies.
Time-sensitive targets are those targets requiringimmediate response because they pose (or willsoon pose) a clear and present danger tofriendly forces or are highly lucrative fleetingtargets of opportunity.
Target development is the process of providingdirect combat information, targeting data, andcorrelated targeting information. It gives thecommander and his attack managers timelyand accurate locations of enemy weaponsystems, units, and activities that may impacton current or projected operations.
G-1 I G-1 FOLDOUT
FM 6-20-40
TVA Tools
Integral to the performance of duties by thetargeting officer is the use of the IPB and theTVA The TVA tools in the FSMAA includethe spread sheets and the target sheets. Thehigh-payoff target list is a product of targetvalue analysis.
Spread SheetsOn the front side of each spread sheet(example below) is information about Threatforces at regiment, division, army, and frontwith respect to the operations the forces areexpected to conduct. On the back side of thespread sheet (example on page G-5) is asummary of information about the enemy
doctrine and tactics. It indicates how theThreat is expected to fight, what his operationis intended to accomplish, and whatalternatives he has if he fails to accomplish hisprimary mission. The major sections of thespread sheet are as follows:
•
Ž
•
•
Ž
•
Ž
Title and sheet number (front and back)
Relative value matrix (front)
Attack rationale column (front)
Specific high-value targets (front)
Doctrinal template (back)
Threat force doctrinal resume (back)
Fallback option statement (back)
G-2 FOLDIN G-2
FM 6-20-40
Title and Sheet NumberThese specify the unit level and enemy missionof interest. This header is shown on the frontand back of the spread sheet.
Relative Value MatrixThe relative value matrix is the part of thespread sheet that indicates which of the 13target sets are high value in that situation. Thematrix presents information that aids managersof attack assets (both maneuver and firesupport) and collection managers in establishingpriorities.
The 13 target categories (center of the matrix)represent target groupings based on theirbattlefield functions, not on the associatedequipment. The categories (also known astarget sets) cover all of the major battlefieldfunctions of the Threat. The categories are asfollows:
Ž C3targets are command, control, andcommunications centers that affect maneuveror combined arms.
Ž The FIRE SPT category covers the entireThreat fire support system.
• MANEUVER targets are combat armstactical subunits in various postures.
• ADA refers to air defense system targets,including missile unit headquarters andprocessing centers, radar sites, andshort-range air defense platoons.
Ž ENGINEER denotes engineer targets,including crossing sites, snorkeling sites, andmovement support elements.
• RSTA assets include ground surveillanceradars, reconnaissance patrols, and airbornesensor systems.
• The REC category is radio-electroniccombat, known as offensive electronicwarfare. Because of the nature of the Soviet
Ž
system, some dedicated collection targetacquisition assets are listed in this categoryinstead of under RSTA.
NUKE/CHEMICAL targets are major firingpositions and nuclear and chemical supportelements.
CLASS III POL refers to petroleum, oil andŽlubricants support and includes transport andpipeline units and POL points.
Ž The CLASS V AMMO category covers theammunition support targets.
Ž CLASS IX MAINT covers maintenance andrepair capabilities.
Ž LIFT refers to general transport units in theThreat.
• LOC represents lines of communication forwhich no specific target types are designated.However, any target attacked that wouldinterfere with the ground or air lines ofcommunication is a candidate.
The right side of the matrix indicates therelative worth of target sets that are consideredhigh value for the situation. This part of thematrix uses a simple bar chart to show therelative worth of the target sets with respect toeach other for the specific operation depictedby the spread sheet. The relative worth of atarget refers to the relative effect that successfulattack of the target will have on the friendlyoperation and the friendly scheme of maneuver.The stated relative worth is confirmed by thestaff during the war-gaming process. The targetsets that are not considered to be of highrelative worth are not assigned a value bar.
The left side of the matrix consists of threecolumns, labeled DISRUPT, DELAY, andLIMIT. An X in the column associated withthe target set indicates that a benefit may beaccrued by attacking the target with one ofthese particular goals in mind.
G-3
FM 6-20-40
An X in the DISRUPT column indicates thatattacking a target with the goal of disruptingits function may be of considerable benefit.Such attack can be by continuous suppression,neutralization, or destruction of the target bylethal means or by offensive EW for sometypes of targets. The enemy functionrepresented by the target is consideredunacceptable on the battlefield and must beremoved.
An X in the DELAY column indicates that abenefit can be gained by attacking the targetto delay its arrival on the battlefield. In somecases, a commander could opt to use a smalleramount of ammunition and slow asecond-echelon force for a period of time. Thiswould allow his maneuver forces to recoverand conduct a coordinated effort when theenemy second echelon arrives at the FLOT. Inthis case, the unacceptable aspect of the targetset function is its time of arrival at thebattlefield, The implication is that thecombined arms team can defeat such a targetif it is given enough time to prepare.
An X in the LIMIT column indicates that abenefit can be gained if the target approach islimited, thus shunting the enemy unit toanother portion of the battlefield. This eitherputs the target into a portion of the battlefieldwhere it can be better handled or puts theenemy on terrain not suitable to his purposes.The unacceptable aspect of this target setfunction is where it is employed on thebattlefield.
Attack Rationale ColumnThe attack rationale column in the center ofthe spread sheet provides a guide of thebenefits to be derived by attacking targets of aparticular category. This column discusses thedesired objectives for attack of the target inthe category. Each description is connected tothe appropriate category by lines. A solid lineindicates - the primary results of attackingtargets in the category from which the line is
G-4
drawn. (Solid lines should be traced from leftto right.) Some descriptions are furtherattached to other categories by dotted lines.This indicates that a secondary benefit isachieved for that category when the primarytarget is attacked. Dotted lines are traced fromthe attack rationale column back to thecategory (right to left).
Two type styles are used in the attack rationalecolumn. Descriptions in normal type indicatethat the greatest benefit is achieved byattacking targets in their associated groupssequentially from the top of the matrix to thebottom. Descriptions in italics indicate that thecategories always have the same valuethroughout the operation, regardless ofposture.
Specific High-Value TargetsThe high-value target column of the spreadsheet specifies the high-value targets for eachset. Numbers in parentheses refer to specifictarget sheets containing individual targetdescriptions for the high-value target typegiven. Usually, there are some high-valuetargets for each category even though the setitself might be given a low relative value.When formulating detailed attack guidance,one should be aware of all of the specifiedhigh-value targets, not just those in thehigher-value categories. In developing thehigh-payoff target list, targeting personnelshould consider all of the high-value targets inthe context of the situation in addition to thecommander’s directive.
Doctrinal TemplateThe doctrinal template indicates the majorsubunits of the unit considered, deployed toscale, without regard to the effects of terrainand weather. Fire support personnel can usethe template to plan acquisition coverage andlikely areas of interest. However, it should beused cautiously and only as a guide, because ofthe effects of terrain.
FM 6-20-40
EXAMPLE SPREAD SHEET (BACK)
G-5
FM 6-20-40
Doctrinal ResumeThe doctrinal resume is a synopsis of themajor features of the operation. This portionindicates the objective of the force and thetactical principle that governs how the unit issupposed to fight.
Fallback Option StatementThe fallback option portion details what wecan expect the enemy to do if he fails toaccomplish his mission. Contingency plans andhigh-payoff target recommendations based onthe most likely outcome of the current battlecan be prepared and presented. Fallbackoptions are referenced to other spread sheetsin the FSMAA.
Target SheetThe target sheet is made up ofsections:
• Target category.
seven major
• Target sheet number and title (incorrectlylabeled in the FSMAA as high-payofftarget).
Ž Function.
• Description.
• Signature.
• Degradation effect.
• Some form of graphic representation.
Target Category, Sheet Number,and TitleThe target category indicates in which of the13 sets the target belongs,
The sheet number can be used to crossreference the target sheet with the spreadsheet. The target title refers to the target typeand function. The label “high-payoff target”from the FSMAA is a misnomer. This sectionreally represents the high-value targetcross-reference number (as shown on pages
EXAMPLE TARGET SHEET
(Classification)
TARGET CATEGORY: Engineer
HIGH-PAYOFF TARGET: Target 75. Ferry crossing site.
FUNCTION: Provide rapid crossing of water obstacles for tanks and othernonamphibious systems.
DESCRIPTION: Target radius – point target.Posture – exposed on water surface FEBA distance.
Composition: Vehicles normally two ferries or rafts (if river over 300 meters wide, maybe as many as five).
Personnel:
SIGNATURE: Visual – see graphic.
Electronic –
Other –
DEGRADATION: Nonamphiblous forces must find alternate means to cross.
Force that secured bridgehead is not reinforced.
GRAPHIC REPRESENTATION: (Omitted)
(Classification)
G-6
FM 6-20-40
G-8 through G-11). The other portions of thetarget sheet are more complex and containmost of the information useful to targetingpersonnel.
FunctionThe function section details the specificoperations and tasks that the target is expectedto perform. It includes the primary andsecondary functions and indicates anyrelationship to the other target categories ortypes.
DescriptionThe description of the target details thenumber and type of vehicles and equipment ina position and specifies the approximatenumber of personnel associated with theposition. It details the usual distance from theFEBA and indicates the normal posture of thetarget with respect to camouflage andorientation and the amount and type of terrainoccupied. The description is useful inconsidering what types of attack systems andmunitions are to be used. It also helps todiscriminate between targets of a similarfunction.
SignatureThe signature section describes signaturesranging from visual and electronic to auditoryand infrared.
DegradationThe degradation portion indicates whathappens to the parent unit or an associatedunit when the target function is removed. Thissection can be used by operations and firesupport personnel to help determine effectsdesired against a target.
Graphic RepresentationThe graphic representation shows in a generaloverlay format how the target would bearrayed doctrinally on the battlefield.
G-7
FM 6-20-40
GLOSSARY FOR TARGET CATEGORIES GRAPHIC
G-8
FM 6-20-40
TARGET CATEGORIES CROSS-REFERENCE (CONTINUED)
CATEGORY NUMBER AND TITLE
Target Acquistion 13. TA btry CP, arty regt, div/army14. Countermortar/counterbattery site
15. Sound ranging site16. Radar intercept/DF site (pole dish–twin box)
17. Battlefield surveillance radar site (Big Fred, Small Fred)
Weapons 18. Arty battery firing position19. MRL firing position
20. SSM firing position
21. Mortar btry firing position22. Attack helicopter flight
23. Tac air flight
Logistics 24. Ammo resupply trucks/convoy
Command, Control, 25. MR regiment main CPandCommunications
26. MR regiment forward CP
Maneuver CPS 27. MR regiment rear CP28. MR battalion main CP/COP29. Division main CP30. Division forward CP31. Division rear CP32. Division alternate CP33. Radio reiay site34. Army main CP35. Army forward CP36. Army alternate CP37. Army rear CP38. TR main CP39. TR forward CP40. TR rear CP41. Tank battalion main CP/COP42. Traffic control point
Maneuver 43. Advanced guard battalion44. Advanced detachment45. Accompanying artillery46. MR company reinforced (off)47. MR company reinforced (def)48. Tank company reinforced (off49. Tank company reinforced (def)50. Tactical march column51. Battaiion assembly area52. Administrative march column
G-9
FM 6-20-40
TARGET CATEGORIES CROSS-REFERENCE (CONTINUED)
CATEGORY
A D A
Engineer
Nuclear/Chemical
RSTA
NUMBER AND TITLE
53. SA-4 brigade CP54. SA-6 regiment CP55. SA-8 regiment CP
56. SA-4 battalion CP57. SA-6 btry CP
58. SA-8 btry CP
59. SA-4 btry CP
60. AD EW/TA radar site, long range61. ZSU-23-4 platoon62. SA-9 platoon
63. AD EW site, low Ievel
64. AD EW site, medium range
65. Assault crossing company
66. Pontoon bridge company67. Tracked amphibian company
68. Tracked ferry company69. Mobile obstacle detachment70, Movement support detachment71. Engineer reconnaissance patrol
72. Tank snorkeling site73. PMP bridge
74. Tracked amphibian crossing site75. Ferry crossing site
76. ORPD
77. PRTB
78. ARPD
79. Nuclear depot/SASP
80. SSM met station81. 203-mm howitzer firing position
82. 240-mm mortar firing position
83. Battlefield surveillance radar site (PSNR-1)
84. Combat reconnaissance patrol
85. Recon patrol, regt, reconnaissance company86. Recon patrol, regt, div reconnaissance company
87. Airbome sensors
88. HF comm jamming site89. I band noise jamming site
90. TACAN jamming site
G-10
FM 6-20-40
TARGET CATEGORIES CROSS-REFERENCE (CONTINUED)
CATEGORY NUMBER AND TITLE
91. Radio/radar intercept/DF site(division)
92. Radio/radar intercept/DF site (front)
93. I band noise jamming site
94. J band noise jamming site95. A/C comm jamming site
96. HF DF site, army97. HF DF site, front
98. Processing group, R/R recon company, recon bn, div99. Airborne SIGINT platform
100. Radar DF site (mobile co, radar ranging intercept regiment, front)
101. Tropospheric scatter intercept site
102. Radio relay airborne jamming system103. Radar intercept site (hvy co, R/R inter regt, front)104. Radio inter and DF site105. VHF/UHF jamming site
106. HF jamming site
107. Radar intercept and DF site
108. Radar intercept and DF site (radio inter regt, front and R/R inter regt, front)109. VHF jamming site
110. Radio intercept and DF site (radio inter and DF co, radar inter bn, army)
Class Ill (POL) 111. Mtr trans co, regt112. POL trans co, MTB, div113. POL regt, MT bde, front114. Pipeline bn, front115. Regt POL point
116. Div POL depot
117. Army POL depot
Class V (Ammo) 118. Ammo transport co, MTB, dlv119. Regt ammo depot
120. Div ammo depot121. Army ammo depot
122. Front ammo depot123. Front supply base section
Class IX (Maint, 124. Regt rnaint co, MRR/TRRepair Parts) 125. Bn repair and evacuation group
126. Damaged vehicle collection point
127. DARM-4 mobile artillery repair shop complex
Lift 128. MTR, trans bn, div
G-11
FM 6-20-40
High-Payoff Target ListThe high-payoff target list identifies the HPTsfor a specific point in the battle in the order oftheir priority for acquisition and attack. Whiletarget value is usually the greatest factorcontributing to target payoff, other things to beconsidered include the following:
•
•
•
Ž
•
Sequence or order of occurrence.
Ability to locate and identify the target.
Degree of accuracy and identificationavailable from the acquisition
Ability to engage the target.
Ability to defeat the target.
system.
Ž Resource requirements necessary toaccomplish all of these.
The PRIORITY column simply lists thepriority order of the list. The list may have anynumber of target priorities.
The CATEGORY column identifies the targetcategory from which each listed high-payofftarget comes. Time-sensitive (TS) targets maybe identified in this column.
The SHEET NUMBER column identifies thetarget sheet number of each high-payoff target.
The DESCRIPTION column identifies thetarget description from the appropriate targetsheet.
EXAMPLE HIGH-PAYOFF TARGET LIST
G-12
FM 6-20-40
The TVA ProcessThe following paragraphs present a divisionalhow-to guide with enough detail to provide atransition from concepts to workable TVA attackguidance. The specific tasks discussed are notnormally done at levels below division. However,similar tasks are done as part of normaloperations of a brigade battle staff. In performingits own target value analysis, the brigadeconcentrates on division-level spread sheets andtarget sheets. The brigade attack guidanceaddresses assets the brigade controls. The brigadetargeting effort always occurs within the contextof the decision support template. The high-payofftarget list and attack guidance at brigade and taskforce or battalion are normally more detailed andfocused than those at higher levels. Thisdiscussion is presented to facilitate anunderstanding of the requirements and productsof the TVA process that may impact at brigadelevel and below. Tasks identified are done atdivision by the field artillery intelligence officer(FAIO) in conjunction with the targeting teamand at brigade and below by the targeting officerin conjunction with the battle staff. For a moredetailed discussion of specific TVA tasks and thetargeting process, see FM 6-20-10.
As soon as a likely enemy course of action isdetermined, determine the tactical situation andfind the appropriate spread sheet. Then, identifythe target sets with the highest relative worth.
CoordinationCoordinate with G2 and G3 plans as follows:
• From the G2 and G3, get any commander’sguidance for relative worth or delay or limitmodifications.
Ž With the G2 and/or G3, integrate findinghigh relative worth target sets into divisionpriority intelligence requirements.
Get G2 input for the high-value target listbased on the G2 estimate of the enemysituation.
Coordinate with G2 for planning target areasof interest and decision points. The FS cellshould brief the G2 on the deep attack assetsavailable, their ranges and capabilities, andtheir reaction times.
Use of Spread SheetsFrom the selected spread sheet, extract thefollowing:
• The relative worth for each set. The relativeworth will drive target attack guidance.
• Target sets to be delayed or limited. Thesesets will drive the attack in depth
•
(interdiction) effort.
High-value targets. Develop the list ofhigh-value targets from the mission areaanalysis and the commander’s guidance. Thislist will drive the development of thehigh-payoff target list.
Enemy fallback options. These will drive•preparation of TVA for future operations.
Development of the High-PayoffTarget List
Start with the list of identified high-value targets,and prioritize the targets according to theirrelative worth and the commander’s guidance.
Eliminate all targets beyond the range ofdivision-level weapons. When the commanderhas approved the high-payoff target list,coordinate with the next-higher FS cell andthe ALO to engage these targets.
Eliminate those targets that are too large ortoo hard to engage with division-level assets.Consider these targets for engagement bycorps, CAS, and nuclear and chemicalweapons.
Coordinate with the G2 and/or ASPS.Eliminate targets to be engaged that cannot beregularly acquired in a timely manner.
G-13
FM 6-20-40
The remaining high-value targets, which can beacquired and effectively attacked once they areacquired, comprise the high-payoff target list,
Coordinate with the G2, ASPS, and/or div artytargeting personnel to search for the targets onthe high-payoff target list.
Disseminate the high-payoff target list to allfire support agencies.
Preparation of Target AttackGuidance Matrix
The attack guidance matrix is a means used topresent the attack guidance for specifichigh-payoff targets. This guidance isrecommended by operations and fire supportpersonnel for approval by the commander. Theprocedure for preparing a target attackguidance matrix is described below.
Target Category and High-PayoffTarget Numbers
First, list the 13 target categories in theCATEGORY column. Transfer all the targetsheet numbers for these categories from thehigh-payoff target list to the HIGH PAYOFFcolumn.
Effects LevelsDetermine what effect (suppress, neutralize, ordestroy) the commander wants on each targetset. Determine if the effect the commanderwants requires that a modification berecommended. If ammunition and fire unitsare plentiful, greater effects may be achievable.If ammunition and fire units are limited,decrease the effects levels for borderlinecategories. On the basis of this determination,insert the appropriate effects in the HOWcolumn of the attack guidance matrix. Enterthe letter S for suppress, N for neutralize, or Dfor destroy. If a modification or a specificeffects level is required, indicate that in theHOW column.
When to AttackDetermine when to attack each target set.Indicate in the WHEN column the decisionfor each target set. Enter the letter I forimmediate, A for as acquired, and P for plan.
Immediate attack should be limited to not morethan two target categories. The nuke/chemicaltarget category is always immediate. If there isanother category that has very high relative worthand is highly mobile, make it immediate.
Most targets will fit in the as acquired category.In general, any target that is worth shootingand is expected to move will be classified asacquired. Targets that are worth shooting andare not expected to move may be classified asacquired or plan.
NOTE: The term expected to move means thatthe target is likely to move before fires on thetarget are planned and executed. The exactlength of this time will depend on both technicalconsiderations (how long it will take to computethe fire plan, move fire units into position, breakout ammunition, and so forth) and operationalconsiderations (for instance, SEAD plans will notbe fired until nearly the time of the air strike,preparations will not be fired until nearly H-hour,and so forth).
The plan attack guidance should apply to twodifferent types of target categories:
• Target categories that, in the currentsituation, are not worth shooting at this time.
• Targets that may be used in future scheduleso f f i r e ( s u c h a s p r e p a r a t i o n s ,counterpreparations. and programs) and arenot likely to move before the schedule offires is expected to be shot.
Determine any exceptions to the I, A, and Pguidelines given above and adjust guidanceaccordingly. For example The guidance mightbe “Don’t shoot C3 targets because we aregetting good intel from radio intercepts,” This
G-14
FM 6-20-40
guidance would make C3 a plan target setinstead of as acquired.
Restrictions and/or RemarksIn the RESTRICTIONS column, identify targetsthat are to be coordinated with or engaged solelyby EW assets. Coordinate with the G3 EWofficer for guidance on what can be effectivelyjammed and how jamming can be coordinated.
Identify targets that are well suited forengagement with nuclear and/or chemicalweapons. Note which targets should go in thenuclear development file.
Identify targets that should be nominated forattack by CAS or Army aviation assets.
Identify any special ammunition or weaponsystems considerations.
Identify specific targets within a categorythat are much more important than thecategory as a whole. For instance, if amaneuver commander is particularlyconcerned about ATGMs, maneuver as awhole might be a category to suppress. Toindicate this, include the remark NeutralizeA TGMs.
Dissemination of MatrixFinalize the attack guidance matrix asshown below. Disseminate the attackguidance matrix so that all fire supportagencies have it.
G-15
FM 6-20-40
Preparation for Future OperationsTo prepare TVA for future operations, identifyenemy fallback options. As time permits,perform TVA through the identification ofhigh-payoff targets for each enemy fallbackoption. Coordinate with G3 plans to updateand modify TVA for future operations.
Integration of TVA Process IntoFire Support Planning
In the conduct of combat operations, the TVAprocess described in this appendix must bemodified at brigade level according to the timeand resources available for planning. This isbecause TVA is not conducted formally belowbrigade level. Targeting at the brigade isfocused on close operations, the nature andposture of the opposing force, and theresources available to the commander. Targetsof interest are primarily tactical CPs, smallcombat and combat service support units, andpossibly key terrain of immediate concern tothe brigade.
If the brigade is deployed as part of a division,the brigade S2 should receive the results of adetailed IPB from the division G2. Thebrigade S2 will further develop the IPB withinthe brigade zone in an attempt to identifylikely enemy avenues of approach and possibleenemy courses of action. The targeting officer,with the maneuver brigade S2, uses targetspread sheets (if available) to identify potentialhigh-value targets. Spread sheets are based onthe size of the opposing enemy force and apossible enemy course of action. A list ofthese targets prioritized on the basis of theirrelative worth to the enemy commanderbecomes the high-value target list associatedwith that particular enemy course of action.
As the staff prepares their estimates, staffmembers consider the high-value target list indetermining the friendly course of action.During the staff war-gaming process, thetargeting officer (in conjunction with the S2,
S3, and FSO) develops the high-value targetlist into a high-payoff target list based on thetargets that are of concern to the friendlymaneuver commander and that will facilitatethe success of the friendly course of action.The high-payoff target list is sent to themaneuver commander for his approval and toallow him to modify the list as he deemsnecessary.
The targeting officer recommends attackguidance from the high-payoff target list todescribe how targets are to be attacked(effects criteria), when they are to be engaged(prioritization in the engagement of specifictarget types), and any restrictions that mayapply in terms of target dwell time, targetlocation error, or munition type. Some targetcategories may be restricted from engagement,because of the limited availability of assets orbecause the target can be exploited forSIGINT information. Attack guidance isdisseminated to all fire support attack andacquisition agencies available to the brigade.
The targeting officer recommends changes tothe attack guidance based on events that occurduring the battle and on target damageassessment (TDA) reports.
Integration of TVA Process intoTACFIRE Operations
The primary means of integrating thehigh-payoff target list and the attack guidanceinto TACFIRE operations is by establishingfire mission modifications in the FM; MODfile. Select the HPT types identified on theattack guidance matrix for immediate attack,and identify them by target type or subtype inthe PTYPE field of the FM; MOD file.
Target attack modifications must then be madeto the FM;ATTACK file to override defaultattack criteria with any modifications from theattack guidance matrix. First, review thedefault attack criteria for target types orsubtypes in the FM; ATTACK file. Then,
G-16
FM 6-20-40
modify the default guidance to conform to the reviewed by TACFIRE shift personnel at leastcommander’s attack guidance contained in the as often as shifts change to ensure that theapproved matrix. current commander’s guidance is reflected in
the files.Specific changes to TACFIRE default criteriamust be published in the operation order. In For specific procedures and mnemonics for theaddition to other tactical fire support files, the FM; MOD and FM; ATTACK files, see theFM; MOD and FM;ATTACK files should be current edition of TM 11-7440-240-10.
G-17
FM 6-20-40
APPENDIX H
SPECIAL MUNITIONS
Section I. FAMILY OF SCATTERABLE MINES
Employment ConsiderationsThe decision to use and the purpose ofFA-delivered FASCAM must be carefullyconsidered by the commander, engineer, FSO,and S3. The engineer officer provides theexpertise on employment of all types ofFASCAM. The FSO provides the technicalexpertise to the engineer concerning theemployment of FA-delivered FASCAM. TheALO advises the engineer officer concerningFASCAM delivered by the Air Force. As partof the estimate process, the FS cell shouldadvise the commander of anticipatedFA-delivered FASCAM densities and safetyzones. The estimated densities and safetyzones could affect the use and/or positioningof FA-delivered FASCAM. The engineer mustseek an alternative FASCAM delivery means ifFA-delivered FASCAM will not meet thecommander’s density requirement or cannot beused because of range, positioning, or safetylimitat ions. There are two types ofFA-delivered FASCAM: an area denialantipersonnel mine (ADAM) and the remoteantiarmor munition system (RAAMS) for useagainst lightly armored vehicles. Both areavailable only in 155 mm. FASCAM has twopreset self-destruct times:
• Short duration (unclassified self-destruct timeof less than 24 hours).
• Long duration (unclassified self-destruct timeof greater than 24 hours).
The corps commander has the authority toemploy FASCAM. Employment may bedelegated for specific operations or limitedperiods of time as follows:
• Long duration down to maneuver brigade.
Ž Short duration down to maneuver battalion.
FA-delivered FASCAM enables the maneuvercommander to quickly emplace a minefield.Like any obstacle, FASCAM is best used at achoke point covered by effective indirect andantitank (AT) fire. The principles of obstaclecoverage apply even more strongly toFASCAM because the mines are surface-laidand visible. An undisturbed enemy in columncan work through this type of field quickly.
CapabilitiesIn the defense, FASCAM is used –
• To develop targets for long-range antitankweapons.
Ž To close gaps and lanes in other obstacles.
Ž To delay or disrupt attacking forces.
• To deny enemy unrestricted use of selectedareas.
Ž To disrupt movement and commitment ofsecond-echelon forces.
Ž To disrupt and harass enemy command andcontrol, logistics, or staging areas.
• To reinforce existing obstacles.
• To disrupt or delay river crossings.
In the offense, FASCAM is used –
H-1
FM 6-20-40
Ž TO supplement flank reconnaissance andsecurity forces in protecting flanks alongavenues of approach.
• To suppress and disrupt enemy securityelements once contact has been made.
Ž To hinder withdrawal of enemy forces. Ž
Ž To hinder the ability of the enemy toreinforce the objective area.
Employment OptionsFASCAM may be delivered all RAAMS, allADAM, or a combination of both. If RAAMSand ADAM are employed on the same target,ADAM is fired as the last volley.
ADAM may be used without RAAMS. Fivebasic missions for ADAM (besides augmentingRAAMS on an artillery-delivered minefield)are as follows:
• Reinforce antitank obstacles. ADAM can beused to augment antivehicle obstacles byinhibiting dismounted clearing parties.Having ADAM available for this task allowsengineer units to concentrate their efforts onantivehicle obstacles such as antitankminefields, abatis, and road craters.
• Reinforce antipersonnel obstacles. ADAMcan be used in a similar manner to augmentbarbed wire or concertina wire obstaclesagainst personnel.
• Interdict unarmored vehicles. When usedLAW guidelines discussed later, ADAM canbe used for interdiction or area denial againsta variety of soft targets. These includeresupply vehicles; towed artillery andmortars; and truck-mounted headquarters,communications, and EW sections.
• Augment conventionaltargets. ADAM can be
H-2
fires on unarmoredused to increase the
effectiveness of fires against the same sort oftargets it can interdict. These targets can beengaged with HE or improved conventionalmuntions (ICM), followed by ADAM to limittheir ability to reconstitute or reorganize anddisplace.
Provide counterfire or suppress enemy airdefense or field artillery. ADAM could bedelivered after HE or DPICM volleys onenemy AD or indirect fire units. This usewould prolong the effectiveness of theartillery attack by disrupting and neutralizingor suppressing the target after firing hasceased. If the enemy indirect fire units areself-propelled, RAAMS could be used inconjunction with ADAM.
FASCAM may be delivered in conjunctionwith other munitions. In that way, it extendsthe effects of other munitions. For example,ADAM may be fired into a logistical site afterDPICM is fired. If fired in conjunction withother munitions, FASCAM is fired in the lastvolleys.
Basic Uses of FASCAMThere are four basic uses of FA-deliveredFASCAM:
Ž Interdiction or area denial.
Ž Employment as an obstacle.
• Employment to augment an obstacle.
• Employment against targets of opportunity.
Interdiction or Area DenialFA-delivered scatterable mines are not wellsuited for interdiction or area denial. BecauseFA-delivered minefield tend to be small andof low density (because of low ammunitionavailability), they are easily bypassed and/orbreached. FA-delivered mines are poorlysuited for interdicting roads for three reasons:
FM 6-20-40
• The mines tend to break up or malfunctionwhen they land on a hard surface road.
Ž The mines are easy to see against the uniformbackground of a road.
Ž Units on roads are already moving in columnand columns are the best formations forbreaching scatterable rninefields.
If RAAMS and ADAM are used forinterdiction or area denial, three employmentguidelines apply:
• Employ them only at choke points to keep theenemy from easily bypassing the minefield.
• Employ them in high-density fields to preventbreaching.
• Employ them when and where they are hard todetect; for example, in limited visibility (atnight or in fog) or where the enemy will bebuttoned up (for instance, in a chemicallycontaminated area).
In summary, FA-delivered minefields can beused for interdiction and area denial, but alarger amount of ammunition must bedelivered at a carefully chosen place and time.In general, RAAMS and ADAM are mosteffectively employed when covered by directfire.
Employment as an Obstacle.
Any type of FASCAM should be employedaccording to the basic principles of minefieldemployment:
• Employ mines at a choke point.
Ž Cover mines with effective direct fire andindirect fire by using HE-VT or DPICM.
• Keep minefields under continuous observation.Use night observation devices (NODS) andplanned illumination targets at night.
• Emplace rninefields in belts if possible. It isbetter to force the enemy to breach threenarrow minefield than to have him breach onewide one.
• plan to defeat enemy breaching efforts.Coordinate with the S2 and engineer toanticipate how and where the enemy will try tobreach the minefield. Plan direct and indirectfires to defeat enemy breaching parties.
FASCAM in general presents a uniqueplanning challenge for fire support personnelbecause it is visible and vulnerable on thesurface of the terrain. This leads to two specialconsiderations:
• Reduce the enemy’s ability to see. Use indirectfire to make him button up, If you can force theenemy into MOPP 4 with a real or simulatedchemical attack, that is even better.
• Minimize indirect fires on top of theFASCAM. This represents a judgment call.Firing on the minefield destroys breachingparties, but it also makes the minefield easierto breach (by destroying the exposed mines).
One compromise is to concentrate indirectfires on targets immediately beyond theminefield and direct fires on targets in theminefield, (This also keeps the artillery frominterfering with TOW gunners), If a mine plowor other mine-clearing vehicle enters theminefield and clears a lane, following vehicleswill have to bunch up to enter the lane andmay present a good target.
If the enemy has cleared a lane and is on theverge of breaching the minefield, considerfiring a heavy concentration of smoke and/orDPICM directly on top of the minefield. Thesmoke should obscure the remaining mines aswell as the clear lane markers that the vehiclesare trying to follow. Use of smoke will have tobe carefully coordinated, since it will inhibitfriendly direct fire weapons, However, a firemission of this type should be on call in case
H-3
FM 6-20-40
the enemy places smoke in between yourmaneuver force and the minefield to screenhis breaching efforts. If the enemy fires smokefirst, it is to your advantage to shoot theminefield with smoke and/or DPICM todisrupt his crossing efforts.
FA-delivered scatterable mines introduceanother planning problem – timing. Firingmines too early gives the enemy time to avoidthem, limits friendly freedom to maneuver,and can result in the mines self-destructing tooearly. Firing mines too late can result in theirlanding behind attacking enemy forces andbeing worthless.
For these reasons, the trigger point for firingRAAMS and/or ADAM must be very carefullycoordinated between the S3, the S2, and theFSO. The trigger point for firing FA-deliveredmines must meet two criteria:
• When the enemy reaches the trigger point, hemust be committed to the avenue ofapproach on which the mines will bedelivered.
The trigger point must be far enough forward•of the proposed minefield that the- minefieldcan be emplaced before the enemy reaches it.
The trigger point should be a target area ofinterest in the brigade S2’s IPB. The TAIshould be under surveillance at all times (useNODS and planned illumination targets atnight). The element observing the TAI shouldhave the authority to fire the minefield or adirect communications link to whoever isgoing to call for the mines.
The TAI must be far enough beyond theminefield that the minefield will be in place intime in a worst-case scenario. The FSO shouldallow for the time it takes to send the call forfire, process the call for fire, execute themission, and arm the mines. (Remember, themines do not arm immediately on impact.)
There should be an alternate method of firingthe minefield in case TACFIRE is jammedwith other fire missions.
The key consideration in emplacingFA-delivered mines is that mines delivered tooearly may be less effective than they could be,but mines delivered too late are worthless.
Employment to Augment an Obstacle
FA-delivered scatterable mines are optionalweapons for closing lanes in existing obstaclesor reseeding breached minefield.
RAAMS and/or ADAM used to close alane(s) in an obstacle should be planned withthe same considerations as RAAMS and/orADAM planned as an obstacle. Anotherconsideration in using RAAMS and/or ADAMto close a lane is how wide the artilleryminefield should be. A rule of thumb is to usethe width of the lane plus the expecteddelivery error when the mines are fired. Thisleads to two planning considerations tominimize the amount of ammunition used:
Ž
Ž
Get the best possible grid to the center of thelane. Use PADS if possible – intersection orresection if necessary.
If possible, depending on METT-T, adjust themission in advance onto the center point ofthe lane and record it as a target.
Planning for using artillery-delivered mines toclose breached obstacles should involve the S3,S2, engineer, and FSO. This group shouldidentify the most likely points at which theenemy will try to breach the obstacle and howwide the breach will probably be. As withusing mines to close a lane, these pointsshould be identified by the most accurate gridattainable, fired in, and recorded as targets.Even if the enemy does not breachexact locations, the targets shouldaccurate points from which to shiftmines.
at theseprovidein firing
H-4
FM 6-20-40
The FSO must identify which observer is tofire RAAMS and/or ADAM to close a breachand under what conditions the obstacle isconsidered breached. (For example, is it whenone vehicle passes through or when oneengineer vehicle has passed through andmarked a lane?) The FSO should identify analternate observer to fire the minefield in casesmoke screens, communications problems, orenemy fire prevents the primary observer fromreseeding the obstacle at the proper time.
A call for fire for mines to close a breach willconflict with conventional calls for fire on thebreaching units. If a RAAMS or ADAM callfor fire is going to take priority over othercalls for fire, an alternate channel could be setup so the RAAMS or ADAM call for fire canjump the TACFIRE message queue. This willprobably require a voice call for fire over acommand net.
Employment Against Targets of Opportunity
Minefields against targets of opportunity(unplanned) must be emplaced immediatelybecause of the fleeting nature of the targets.Minefield may be requested through the firesupport channels at any level. Once themaneuver commander has approved the use ofFA-delivered FASCAM, minefield can beemplaced according to his guidance.
Normally, these minefield are used againsttargets that can be observed (by the FIST orAFSO) or that are specifically identified bytarget acquisition sources such as radar,sensors, and other acquisition devices. Theirprocessing is similar to that of FAtarget-of-opportunity missions. Fire for effect(FFE) or observer adjustment is used againsteither moving or stationary targets.
Density and Duration. Unplanned minefield arestandard in density and duration, depending onthe tactical situation and the commander’sguidance. An example is as follows:
Ž Density: 24 RAAMS, 6 ADAM.
• One aimpoint.
Ž Short duration.
Target Location. There are two types ofaimpoints – stationary and moving targets:
• The aimpoint for a stationery target is placeddirectly over the target center. Aimpoints arelocated to an accuracy of 100 meters (adjustfire) and 10 meters (FFE).
• The aimpoint for a moving target is placeddirectly in front of the enemy axis of advance,1,000 meters in front of the enemy target forevery 10 kilometers per hour (kmph) ofspeed. This allows enough time for minedelivery and arming before enemy encounter.
Fire Mission Request. The fire mission request istransmitted and processed generally the sameas other requests for target-of-opportunity firemissions. The requestor must specify thefollowing:
• Identification (call sign).
• Warning order (include RAAMS, ADAM, orboth).
Ž Target location (aimpoint).
• Target description.
Ž Method of engagement.
• Method of fire and control.
Unless the observer requests ammunition foradjustment, he wil l receive DPICM(self-registering) in adjustment and thestandard minefield in effect (6 ADAM and 24RAAMS, according to the previous example).
H-5
WARNING
FM 6-20-40
Targets of opportunity are either FFE or adjustfire missions. FFE missions should not berequested If the center of the minefield is lessthan 700 meters from the nearest friendlyposition. Adjust fire missions should not berequested if the center of the minefield is lessthan 425 meters from the nearest friendlyposition.
EXAMPLES OF FIRE MISSION REQUEST
Fire-for-Effect Mission
A4Z57 THIS IS A4Z42, FIRE FOR EFFECT,ADAM, OVER.
GRID 18045132, OVER.
PLATOON IN THE OPEN, OVER.
Adjust Fire Mission
A4Z57 THIS IS A4Z42, ADJUST FIRE, RAAMS,OVER.
GRID 180513, OVER.
FIVE T72 TANKS ATTACKING OVER.
The FA battalion receiving the call for firedesignates the firing unit(s): On completion ofthe minefield emplacement, the fired data areforwarded to the divisions, brigade, or battalionFSE. The fired data are recorded in Section Dof DA Form 5032-R (Field Artillery DeliveredMinefield Planning Sheet). A reproduciblecopy of this form is in Appendix L. The FSEcomputes the safety zone according to thefired data and passes it to the engineer fordissemination to higher, lower, and adjacentunits as appropriate.
Firing in Artillery-Delivered MinesOne of the key considerations in emplacing aminefield with indirect fire is to get a precise
target location, The three basic ways of doingthis, from most to least desirable, are asfollows:
• Use target area survey.
• Fire the center grid in with DPICM in theself-registering (ground burst) mode and havethe FDC replot to get the adjusted grid.
Ž Carefully map-spot the grid throughintersection, resection, or terrain association.
No matter which method is used, the centergrid of the proposed minefield should berecorded as a target. This provides a center forRAAMS and/or ADAM fires, a target forsmoke and/or ICM to attack breaching forces,and a known point from which to shift incalling fires onto units just beyond or in frontof the minefield. The use of FA targetnumbers for FASCAM planning by theengineer facilitates coordination.
Choosing Minefield Widthand Density
The first, and most obvious, consideration isammunition availability. This, combined withfire unit positioning and minefield depth, willprovide an estimate of how many meters ofminefield width are available for variousdensities.
Lane-closing mines should be delivered in asufficient width to cover the lane and allow fordelivery error. If the aimpoint grid has beendetermined by PADS or by replot proceduresafter being fired in, the delivery error willprobably be small. If the aimpoint location ismap-spotted, the minefield width must allowfor errors in grid location.
Artillery-delivered mines used for interdictionor area denial or as an obstacle should bewide enough to fill the choke point and to tieinto natural or artificial obstacles at either end.
H-6
FM 6-20-40
Again, the width of the minefield should allowfor errors in delivery and aimpoint location.
Density depends on the mission of theminefield. If a minefield is covered with directand indirect fire (for example, if the enemy isbuttoned up and maneuvering), a low-densityminefield will provide an effective obstacle. Ifthe mines are available, a medium-density fieldis desirable but not absolutely necessary.
Medium- and high-density fields areparticularly useful for defending forces that areheavily outnumbered and/or who need time tomove to alternate firing positions or withdrawto a subsequent battle position.
In general, the greater the enemy combatpower, the denser the minefield should be. Ifthe defending force has a relatively largeamount of firepower, the minefield serves toslow and restrict enemy units so that they canbe engaged with direct fire. If the defendingforce has relatively little firepower, the directfire of the force is used to make the enemymaneuver through the minefield so that he canbe engaged by the mines.
Fire Unit SelectionConsiderations
Two questions should be answereda fire unit:
• What is the counterfire threat?
in selecting
• What could the battery do if it were not firingRAAMS or ADAM?
The competition for artillery tubes duringbattle will be great. This tends to increase thetime between mission request and completion.The proliferation of artillery munitions andlimited haul capabilities of artillery units maytend to reduce the number of mine roundsimmediately available at battery level. Given alimited carrying capacity for artillery
ammunition, a choice must be made whetherto leave behind other ammunition to carryadditional FASCAM. Requesting ammunitionfor immediate consumption, stockpiling ofammunition on the ground, and othermeasures can be used to overcome theconstraint.
Another factor in the counterfire threat is howgood the enemy target acquisition assets are.If a battery fires one volley, it is acquired; if abattery fires 20 volleys, it is acquired. The keyquestion becomes not whether or not a batterywill be acquired (it will be) but how long itwill be before acquired batteries will beengaged. If you are acquired on the first roundand you have to move anyway, you might aswell finish your mission before you go.
Safety ZoneDetermination
The FSO is responsible for obtaining safetyzones. Safety zones may be computed by theDS battalion FDC or by the FSO by using thesafety zone table on page H-8. An alternativemethod is to use the mine safety template.(See TC 6-40 for specific delivery techniques.)The engineer is responsible for disseminatingthe safety zones to appropriate units.
Use of Safety Zone Table
Use the following fired minefield data:
Ž Type of projectile fired (ADAM orRAAMS).
• Trajectory (high or low angle).
Ž Range (to minefield center).
• Technique (met + velocity error[VE]/transfer or observer adjust).
Ž Aimpoint coordinate(s) (single or left andright).
H-7
FM 6-20-40
Enter the table at the nearest range for theprojectile type and trajectory, and use thecorrect employment technique column todetermine the size of the safety zone.
Draw the determined safety zone centeredover each aimpoint to establish the minefieldsafety zone.
NOTE: Approximately 99 percent of all mine-delivery missions will result in the entire minefield(minefleld modules) being inside the safety zonesquares.
H-8
FM 6-20-40
Use of the Mine Safety Template
Enter the template with the fired minefielddata:
Ž Technique (met + VE/transfer or observeradjust).
• Trajectory (high or low angle).
• Type projectile fired (RAMMS
Ž Range (to minefield center).
or ADAM).
Ž Aimpoint coordinates (center or left andright).
Center the selected template safety zonesquare over the aimpoint(s). Draw a square toestablish the minefield safety zone.
NOTE: A template pattern is in Appendix L.
H-9
FM 6-20-40
Scatterable Minefield ReportThe FASCAM delivery unit is responsible forinitiating the scatterable minefield report, firstby radio and later by hard copy. This report issubmitted through the FS cell to the engineer.The format is as shown below.
H-10
FM 6-20-40
Field Artillery Employment Tables
Matrix Key
As a quick reference, use the matrix key todetermine the minefield employment table tobe used. Enter the matrix from the left withthe appropriate deiivery technique, shell,trajectory, and the battery-minefield angle(BMA). Read right and then up to select theproper employment table.
Employment Tables
Once the correct table has been located, theentry arguments into each table are the rangeto the minefield center (expressed to thenearest 2,000 meters; if exactly halfwaybetween, express to lower range) and thedesired width of the minefield. Extract fromthe table the number of aimpoints required toemplace the minefield.
H-11
FM 6-20-40
H-12
FM 6-20-40
H-13
FM 6-20-40
H-14
FM 6-20-40
Location of AimpointsTo locate aimpoints for 400- by 400-metermodules–
Ž For an even number of aimpoints, place theaimpoints 200 meters left and right of thecenter point along the centerline with theremaining points at 400-meter intervals.
H-15
FM 6-20-40
Ž For an uneven number of aimpoints, placethe first aimpoint at the center point of theminefield and the others at 400-meterintervals.
Projectiles Per Aimpoint
The number of projectiles required to achievethe desired density within each module (asdefined by each aimpoint) is determined fromthe table below. Entry arguments are theprojectile type, trajectory, and desired density.
H-16
FM 6-20-40
Section II. OBSCURANTS
ApplicationsObscurants have many applications on thebattlefield. During offensive operations, theyare used to conceal units and individualweapon systems. This enables the commanderto maneuver behind a screen and deceive theenemy about his strength and position.Obscurants are also used to blind acquisitionmeans. During defensive operations, smoke isused to separate and isolate attacking echelons,which creates gaps and disrupts enemymovements. Smoke can slow and blindindividual units and weapon systems, forcingmechanized infantry to dismount. Also, itmakes enemy targets easier to hit and mayconceal defensive positions.
There are four general applications ofobscurants on the battlefield:
• Obscuration.
• Screening
Ž Marking and signaling.
• Deception
Obscuration
Smoke placed on or near the enemy positionto interfere with his observation of thebattlefield is called obscuration smoke.
Screening
Screening smoke is placed within the areas offriendly operation or in areas between friendlyand enemy forces to degrade enemyobservation and fire. It is primarily intended toconceal friendly forces.
H-17
FM 6-20-40
Marking and SignalingSmoke is used to communicate actions on thebattlefield or to mark locations.
Deception
Smoke used in conjunction with other actionsto confuse or mislead the enemy. This use isgenerally in conjunction with other deceptivemeasures.
EmploymentConsiderations
To be effective, smoke must be used insufficient quantities. Factors affecting theamount used are atmospheric conditions, typeof smoke required, size of the area to beobscured, and length of time needed. On thebasis of those conditions, excessive amounts ofammunition may be required to meet thecommander’s guidance.
If not coordinated properly, smoke mayadversely affect battlefield systems that mustoperate in concert, such as tactical air, armor,infantry, field artillery, and Army aviation.
Smoke hinders visual communications, whichcauses the unit to rely to a greater degree onradios.
Sources of Obscurants Availableto the Fire Support Officer
Mortars can deliver a high volume of smoke atmidranges. They are the most rapid andeffective indirect delivery means. Both 8l-mmand 107-mm mortars deliver WP.
Field artillery cannons can deliver smoke outto distant targets. They can deliver HC(hexachloroethane) and WP; however, assmoke is available in limited quantities,excessive use should be planned in advance.
Smoke pots can produce large volumes ofsmoke for extended periods. They are thecommander’s primary means of producingsmall smoke screens.
The heavy division has an organic smokegenerator platoon in the chemical company.The platoon has 12 M3A3 smoke generators,which can provide large-area smoke support.
Obscurant Employment Tasks
When obscurants are to be used, the FSOmust do the following:
• Coordinate with the commander or S3 todetermine obscurants requirements for theunit.
H-18
FM 6-20-40
• Obtain from subordinate FSOs their lists ofobscuration targets that require engagementbeyond their capability.
Ž Identify the potential sources of obscurantsthat will support the operation (mortars,maneuver combat vehicles, FA, and smokegenerators if available).
• For FA-delivered smoke, use the graphics inthe rest of this section to determine thenumber of rounds required to support thescreens.
NOTE: The first three graphics provide generalemployment data and/or specific weather charac-teristics. These serve as planning factors and asentry values to the last two tables for the purposeof calculating the number of obscuration muni-tions required to support the operations. Forspecific employment techniques, refer to TC 6-40.
•
Ž
Notify FA units of calculated ammunitionrequirements. If insufficient ammunitionexists, delete targets or select an alternativedelivery source.
For any delivery source other than fieldartillery, coordinate with the brigade chemicalofficer to determine brigade capability tosupport.
Ž For smoke planned at brigade level, designatethe person, event, or time that will initiate thesmoke mission.
Ž For smoke planned at brigade level,coordinate with units that might be affectedby the smoke.
• Before firing the smoke,conditions to determine ifsupport the smoke mission.
check weatherconditions still
H-19
FM 6-20-40
H-20
FM 6-20-40
H-21
FM 6-20-40
Section III. COPPERHEAD
DescriptionCopperhead is a 155-mm cannon-launchedguided projectile (CLGP) with a shaped-charge warhead and a laser seeker. When firedat a moving or stationary hard point target,Copperhead homes in on laser energy reflectedfrom the target during the final part of itstrajectory. Laser energy is provided by aremote laser designator. Optimum use ofCopperhead is against multiple targets in largetarget arrays outside the range of maneuverdirect fire weapon systems (approximately 3,000meters). Single targets or very few widelyseparated targets may be engaged byCopperhead if they are high-value targets; forexample, an enemy commander’s vehicle.Targets appearing within the range ofmaneuver direct fire weapon systems should beengaged by Copperhead only when themaneuver commander directs or when thedirect fire systems are unable to engage thetargets.
G/VLLD EmploymentSince the success of the Copperhead dependsgreatly on reflected energy, the FSO shouldensure the G/VLLD is positioned to optimizethe system capabilities and complement thedirect fire weapons. Laser designation requiresan uninterrupted line of sight between thedesignator and the target. Anything thatobstructs or weakens the laser signal will causea significant decrease in the performance ofthe round. Terrain, vegetation, fog, smoke, anddust obstruct visibility.
CopperheadEmployment
Copperhead targets can be engaged as eitherplanned targets or targets of opportunity.Planned targets are preferred because thefiring battery requires less reaction time. Mostoften, the target-of-opportunity technique isused only during offensive operations.
CHARACTERISTICS OF COPPERHEAD
STRENGTHS WEAKNESSES
Copperhead has high hit probability on point Responsiveness of the system depends on severaltargets, moving or stationary, at longer ranges than variables created by distinct acquisition andpossible with current direct fire weapons. delivery components of the system.
Copperhead is extremely lethal. The G/VLLD and operator are vulnerable tosuppressive fires.
Mulitple engagement is possible against an array oftargets within the same footprint. The Copperhead system depends on two-way
communications between the operator and theA laser designator does not have the pronounced firing battery FDC.firing signature of an ATGM.
Effectiveness of target engagement is limited bythe operator’s ability to track the target during thelast 13 seconds of the projectile flight. Weatherconditions and battlefield obscuration also maydegrade observation of the target.
The emitted signal from the designator can bedetected.
H-22
FM 6-20-40
Regardless of the method of attacking targets,the FSO must get at least the followingguidance from the maneuver commander toeffectively employ Copperhead:
• Copperhead usage (when, where, and whattype of targets)
• Most likely avenues (areas) to be targeted.
FSOs should recommend the use ofCopperhead against command and controlvehicles and high-payoff targets, rather thanagainst tanks. Command OPs, ACRVs, radars,bridges, and AD assets are examples ofgenerally good high-payoff targets. Analysis ofTVA and METT-T provides the best choices.
If the command decision is made that tanksare the targets of choice for Copperhead, ourobservers must seek flank and rear shots toachieve greatest kill probability, since tanks aredifficult to penetrate from the front.
Once the targeting information is obtained, theFSO and G/VLLD operator must be able tovisualize Copperhead footprints on existingterrain for effective target planning. Use of theCopperhead footprint template and the abilityto construct a visibility diagram for the areacontribute to fire planning success. (See TC6-40 for use of the footprint template.)
Positioning for CopperheadEmployment
Effective employment of the Copperheadmunition is enhanced by techniques used bythe FSO to position the observer or COLTand by the observer or COLT before andduring target engagement. Steps involved inoptimizing the potential employment ofCopperhead are as follows:
Ž Position the observer or COLT to mosteffectively accomplish the commander’starget attack guidance.
H-23
FM 6-20-40
• Construct a visibility diagram from the selectedposition when it is occupied.
• Employ the appropriate Copperhead footprintto engage targets effectively.
These steps do not take into account thenatural effects of weather, battlefieldobscuration, and so forth on Copperheademployment. Since the positioning of theobserver or COLT for employment ofCopperhead is the concern of the FSO, thefirst step is discussed below. The other stepsare observer tasks; therefore, they aredescribed in detail in FM 6-30.
Copperhead CoverageTemplate
The Copperhead coverage template wasdesigned as an observer position selection aid.It is used to discriminate quickly between canshoot and can't shoot engagement areas so thatpositions which will most effectively meet thecommander’s attack intent can be selected. (Atemplate pattern is in Appendix L.) Thetemplate design is based on experience, whichhas shown –
• A target engagement angle T greater than 800roils adversely effects Copperhead targeting.
• The maximum effective distance for G/VLLDoperator engagement is 3 kilometers formoving targets and 5 kilometers for stationarytargets.
Thus, given desired observer positions andknown firing unit locations, the Copperheadcoverage template is used to quickly evaluatepotential engagement areas.
There are two different procedures fordetermining effective Copperhead engagementareas from a given position. They are based onthe location of the observer:
• More than 5 kilometers from the delivery unit.
• Less than 5 kilometers from the delivery unit.
H-24
FM 6-20-40
H-25
FM 6-20-40
More Than 5 KilometersThe following procedure should be used todetermine Copperhead coverage if the observeris located more than 5 kilometers from the FAdelivery unit:
•
Ž
Ž
Ž
Determine the prospective observerpositions to support the commander’s intent.Place the template OP symbol over the initialdesired OP location. Rotate the templateover the selected OP location until thedelivery unit location is under the centerrange line of the template.
Read the distance online from the observer toThis distance becomes theother parts of the template.
the center rangethe delivery unit.entry distance for
Mark the distance obtained above at theappropriate point on each side of the5-kilometer semicircle. Trace the arc alongthe semicircle between the marks. This arcrepresents the maximum effective observerengagement distance for stationary targets.
Select the arc in the middle of thetemplate that is next lowest from the distancedetermined in above. Reposition thetemplate so that the ends of the selected arcare over the observer location and one end ofthe 5-kilometer engagement arc draw inabove. Trace the selected arc from point topoint. Repeat the step for the other end ofthe 5-kilometer engagement arc.
Ž Draw the 3-kilometer engagement arcwithin the engagement area designated by theprevious steps. This may be done by using theholes in the template at the observer locationand the 3-kilometer mark of the center rangeline as a field-expedient protractor.
• This completes the construction of theCopperhead coverage area for the observer’slocation in relation to the particular FAdelivery unit.
This procedure must be repeated for eachadditional Copperhead delivery unit that mayfire for this observer. Considering the coveragearea constructed, the FSO must now determineif the intended observer location will allow theobserver to meet the commander’s intent fortarget engagement. If the intended location willnot meet the commander’s intent, then anotherlocation should be selected; or, if the tacticalsituation does not permit alternative positionselection, the commander should be told of thedeficiencies in targeting capability in theselected position. A third alternative is to movethe firing unit location to better support thedesired observer position. This is a lessdesirable alternative, since the firing unit moveundoubtedly would be of a greater distancethan a move by the observer.
Less Than 5 Kilometers
The following procedure to determineCopperhead coverage should be used when theobserver is located less than 5 kilometers fromthe FA delivery unit:
Ž Draw the 5- and 3-kilometer engagementarcs around the proposed observer location.The 5-kilometer arc and the holes at theobserver designation and the 3-kilometercenter range line mark of the template can beused for this purpose.
• Determine the minimum distance wings ofthe Copperhead coverage area. Position thetemplate so that one side intersects theobserver location, the other side intersects thedelivery unit location, and the vertex of the800-mil angle on the template is on the5-kilometer arc. Mark the location of thevertex. Keeping the sides of the templatealigned on the observer and delivery unitlocations, move the vertex of the template andmark its location at several points across theradius of the 5-kilometer arc. These points atthe vertex of the template 800-mil angledesignate the minimum angle T distance foreffective target engagement.
H-26
FM 6-20-40
OBSERVER POSITION DETERMINATION – DISTANCE MORE THAN 5 KILOMETERS
H-27 H-27 FOLDOUT
FM 6-20-40
OBSERVER POSITION DETERMINATION –OBSERVER-TO-DELIVERY-UNITDISTANCE LESS THAN 5 KILOMETERS
H-28 FOLDIN H-28
FM 6-20-40
• Realign the template, and mark points ation in relation to other delivery units. Asacross the opposite radius of the 5-kilometer discussed in the previous procedure, thearc. FSO must determine if the coverage area
• Connect the selected points through the for the intended position meets the
observer location. The resulting Copperhead commander’s intent. If not, another locationfor the observer should be chosen or thecoverage area is the optimum for that observer
location with respect to the specific delivery commander should determine whether the
unit location. degradation of at tack capabil i ty isacceptable. The third option, moving the
Additional coverage areas should be firing unit, is also available with the samecomputed for the intended observer loc- considerations as discussed previously.
Section IV. CHEMICAL MUNITIONS
Chemical Munitions EmploymentThe responsibility for controlling chemicalweapons remains at corps until after releasehas been approved by national commandauthority. The technical aspects of planningand coordination are done at division in theFS cell with assistance from the chemicalelement. Authority to execute may bedelegated to lower echelons (that is, division,separate brigades, or in some cases brigade) inthe release message.
Planning For Chemical MunitionsFor the brigade, the focal point of chemicalfire planning input is the division FS cell.
The brigade may impact on the chemical strikeplan by nominating to the division FS celltargets to be considered for chemical attack.
There are two important planning factors toremember:
• Chemical agents do not cause many casualtiesagainst a well-trained and well-equipped force.
• Large quantities of ammunition must bedelivered in a very short time period to achievelethal dose rates.
If authority to plan and fire chemical weaponsis delegated to brigade, chemical fire planningis done by the FS cell with the assistance ofthe S2, S3, and chemical officer. Together theyselect high-payoff targets for attack withchemical munitions. Constraints from divisionand corps, along with the brigade commander’sguidance, are considered. Just before attackchemical warning (CHEMWARN) messagesare disseminated to higher, lower, adjacent,and supporting units.
Section V. NUCLEAR MUNITIONS
Nuclear Employment higher commanders. For this reason, corps is thefocal point in the planning and employment of
In most cases, final control for the employment of nuclear weapons using a corps nuclear package.nuclear weapons rests with the corps commander. Divisions are involved in the process using aIt is his responsibility to ensure that nuclear division nuclear subpackage. Echelons belowweapons are used to the greatest tactical division level usually are involved as executors.advantage, integrated into the battle plan, and Exceptions to this may exist when, for example, aemployed in accordance with guidance from brigade assumes the responsibilities of a division.
H-29
FM 6-20-40
Nuclear Planning
For the brigade, the focal point of nuclearplanning is the division FS cell. Nuclear planningis rarely done below this level. Brigade mayimpact on the nuclear strike plan by nominatingto the division FS cell targets to be considered fornuclear attack. (See FM 101-31-1.)
Nuclear Execution
The DS FA battalion maybe required to executepart of the division subpackage. Just before thenuclear subpackage is executed, the brigadereceives the portion of the nuclear strike warning(STRIKEWARN) that affects its zone. Thebrigade FSO analyzes the brigade battle plan inlight of the STRIKEWARN and reports itsimpact to the brigade commander along withrecommended changes. Also, the brigade FSOverifies the safety of friendly elements in thebrigade zone against the nuclear aimpointsselected by division. If a conflict arises, he takesone of the following actions:
Ž Recommends to the S3 that the element bemoved to a safe area or its protection beincreased.
• Tells the division FS cell of the conflict andrequests that the aimpoint be moved.
Nuclear Vulnerability Analysis
The brigade chemical officer conducts a nuclearvulnerability analysis for all elements of thebrigade anytime the brigade is in a nuclearenvironment (anytime either force has thecapability to use nuclear weapons, whether or notthey have been employed). Recommendations onincreasing protection and dispersal distances arediscussed with the S3 and are presented to thecommander when the situation dictates.
Fire Support CoordinationThe use of nuclear weapons does not changethe principles of fire support coordination.
However, the greater lethality and variety ofeffects place an increased importance onmethods and procedures for safeguardingfriendly troops and activities during nuclearemployment.
Fire Support OfficerResponsibilities
The brigade FSO is responsible for advisingthe brigade commander on all aspects of thenuclear operations. These aspects include, butare not limited to –Ž
Ž
Time considerations in performing the nuclearmission.
How the nuclear weapons effects may enhancethe scheme of maneuver.
NOTE: See FM 101-31-1 and FM 6-20-30.
Aimpoint RefinementCertain aimpoints of the division subpackagesmay be located in the brigade area ofoperations. During the decision-makingprocess, the brigade commander or S3 andFSCOORD must analyze the aimpointlocations as follows to ensure that the brigadescheme of maneuver is not affected:
•
•
•
•
•
Will collateral damage rubble structures thatwill interfere with movement?
Are aimpoints located where collateral andequipment damage is avoided from treeblowdown, bridge blowdown, and fires?
Are minimum safe distance constraintsfollowed?
How will a nuclear detonation at the aimpointsaffect the unit RES category?
If the brigade is required to exploit a nuclearstrike, will radiological contamination affect thescheme of maneuver?
H-30
FM 6-20-40
APPENDIX I
COMBAT OBSERVATION/LASING TEAM
DescriptionThe COLT is a high technology observer(HTO) team designed to maximize the use ofsmart munitions. Although originally conceivedto interface with the Copperhead a COLT canbe used with any munition that requiresreflected laser energy for final ballisticguidance. Thus, at present, the team can alsolase for smart munitions delivered by AirForce and Army aircraft. Within the heavyforce structure, the team is composed of threesoldiers equipped with a ground/vehicular laserlocator designator (G/VLLD) and thenecessary mobility and communications assets.
OrganizationEach team is composed of one sergeant, whois the team chief and primary operator of theG/VLLD; one fire support specialist; and onePFC, who is the driver and RATELO.
Each team is equipped with the following:
• One M981 with G/VLLD.
Ž Two radios – one AN/VRC-46 and oneAN/GRC-160.
Ž One forward entry device.
General ConsiderationsThe COLT laser (G/VLLD) can be used fortarget ranging and/or designation. A COLTcan provide observation for both standard andlaser-guided weapons. The G/VLLD is thecurrent organic laser for heavy forces.However, other Army (laser target designator[LTD] and OH-58D helicopter) or Marine(modular universal laser equipment [MULE])lasers may be available.
Target Ranging
A COLT can use the G/VLLD to provideaccurate range, azimuth, and vertical angle tolocate targets.
Target Designation forLaser-Guided Weapons
The LGW homes on reflected energy to attacka target. A G/VLLD can be used to designatefor a variety of LGWs. These include 155-mmCopperhead (Army FA), Hellfire missile(Army aviation), Pave Penny (USAF),laser-guided bomb (LGB) (USAF), and LaserMaverick air-ground missile (Marine). Foreffective use of laser designators, certaincriteria must be met:
Ž The PRF codes of the laser designator(G/VLLD) and the LST or LGW must be thesame.
• Prearranged direction of attack (geometry toensure necessary laser energy reflection isobtained) must be coordinated. For example,Copperhead firings require an angle T of lessthan 800 mils.
• The laser must lase at the correct time andfor the required duration.
•The delivery system must place the LGW intothe required footprint or envelope.
Environmental Restrictions
Laser designator and acquisition devices aredesigned to enhance current capabilities of firesupport. Several factors—environment, lasersystem inherent limitations, and targettypes—affect laser employment. Tactics andtechniques must take these factors intoconsideration.
l-1
FM 6-20-40
Line of Sight. There must be line of sightbetween the designator and the target andbetween the target and the laser acquisitiondevice or laser-guided weapon.
Visibility Degradation. Visibility can be degradedas discussed below.
Clouds. Clouds attenuate laser energy anddegrade LSTand LGW ability to see the spot.Since the laser spot is acquired only after thebomb comes out of the cloud, laser energyacquisition time is short; thus, ballisticaccuracy is essential. Typical minimum ceilingsand times of flight must be considered. Inconditions of reduced visibility, present lasersystems provide signal transmission ranges onlyslightly in excess of visual range.
Darkness. Laser energy transmission isunaffected by darkness, but darkness makeslocating, identifying, and tracking targets moredifficult for the COLT. The night sights forlaser designators enhance operator targetidentification and engagement during nightbattlefield operations.
Battlefield Obscuration. Smoke, dust, andchemical particles in the air may attenuate orreflect the laser beam. This prevents sufficientenergy reflection from the target for lock-onby LST or LGWs. Laser energy reflected fromsuch particles also may present a false targetto either the tracker or the munition. Whenfaced with enemy obscurants, a COLT canreduce the impact by following some simplerules of thumb. Generally, if the observer cansee a target through either day or night optics,he can successfully designate it. Positioning iskey to reducing obscurant degradation of laserperformance. Lasers should be positioned onthe flanks or on terrain where smoke is likelyto be less heavy along the line of sight.Transferring the mission from a laser beingobscured to an unobscured laser is anothersimple way to counter enemy obscurants andtactics. These techniques would require use ofCOLTS in pairs or in combination with otherlaser designators.
Concave Targets. Tunnels and other targets thatdo not reflect laser energy cannot be directlylaser-designated. Instead, the designator mustbe aimed at a nearby surface. For example,aiming the laser slightly above a tunnelopening would allow a weapon to impact atthat critical point. For weapons that tend tomiss short, like LGBs, this could guide thebomb to enter the tunnel opening.
Obstructions. Optimum positioning of groundlaser designators is essential. Obstructions(trees, leaves, grass, and so forth) between thedesignator and the target may prevent a clear,unobstructed view for ground laser designatoremployment. Thus, jungle operations maypreclude the use of ground designators andlimit the effectiveness of airborne laserdesignators (ALDs).
Temperature Extremes. Extreme temperaturesaffect battery-powered laser operation. Forexample, a cold, soaked battery may have amuch-reduced capability to power the laser.
Solar Saturation. Laser seekers look for a spot ofIR energy that stands out from thebackground. This can be a problem whenengaging with low-angle LGWs orLST-equipped aircraft, especially againsttargets above the horizon just after sunrise andjust before sunset.
Seeker Characteristics
Code
A laser seeker looks for laser designatorenergy on a specific PRF code, A designatorand a seeker must work together as a team ona specific code. Thus, seekers do not detect orinterfere with designators set on other codes.
Field of View
All seekers have a limited field of view, Theymust be pointed close to the target to see thelaser designator spot.
I-2
FM 6-20-40
Acquisition TimeTo avoid detection by enemy forces and toconserve battery energy, a COLT limits theamount of time it designates a target.Therefore, laser seekers and munitions have avery short time to detect the laser spot andguide to the target.
Different laser guidance and/or acquisitionsystems require various amounts of reflectedlaser energy to operate. Under ideal
Sensitivity
conditions, a G/VLLD must be within 5kilometers of an average stationary target toprovide optimum Copperhead guidance;whereas under ideal conditions, a Pave PennyLST can acquire an LTD spot as much as 30kilometers away on a clear day. Less sensitiveseekers are more susceptible to reflection andthe relative positions of the target, designator,and seeker.
Seeker Types
Airborne Laser Spot Tracker
An airborne LST points out laser-designatedtargets to the pilot. The pilot can then attackthe target with any weapons on board. Pilotsrequire this target cue; without this assistance,it is very difficult for them to see camouflagedtargets at long ranges and from high-speedaircraft. Normally, an LST uses a laser pulsecode established by the COLT. An LST has anarrow field of view, and the pilot mustaccurately point the airplane so the seekerlines up on the laser energy.
Laser-Guided Missile and CopperheadCannon- Launched Guided Projectile
The laser-guided missile (LGM) and CLGPmust be precisely aimed to see the laserenergy on the target. To optimize LGM orCLGP terminal guidance, laser designationmust be timed according to the LGM orCLGP predicted time of flight. If the laser
designator is turned on late, the LGM orCLGP may miss; turning the laser designatoron early will not cause a miss.
Laser-Guided Bomb
The LGB must be aimed so that the target iswithin the field of view by the seeker. If theaircraft does not have an LST, a visible targetmark may be required as an aiming cue. Sincethe laser pulse code is preset on the LGB andcannot be changed while it is airborne, theCOLT must use the code set in the bomb.When the lofting or shallow delivery method isused, if the laser designator is turned on tooearly, the LGB will steer to the laser mark toosoon and miss by falling short of the target.Whenever possible, the pilot shouldcommunicate directly with the COLT so thelaser can be turned on at the best time.Delaying designation until the last 10 secondsof weapon flight is ideal. A low-levellaser-guided bomb (LLLGB) does not havethe LGB early lock-on characteristic.
Coding for laser designators and seekers is
Designator and SeekerPulse Code
based-on pulse repetition frequency. Thissystem uses either three- or four-digit numbersmade up of the numbers 1 through 8. Thethree- and four-digit devices are compatible.When a mix of three- and four-digitequipment is used, the first digit of thefour-digit code is always 1. For example, athree-digit code of 657 would be set as 1657on a four-digit code system. To go from afour-digit code to a three-digit code, drop thefirst number. For example, a four-digit code of1246 would become a three-digit code of 246.
The joint force headquarters has overallresponsibility for code management. CorpsFSE manages ground switch settings andprovides blocks of settings to divisions (divarty). Brigade FSE is the lowest echelon thatmanages code settings. It ensures that FDCs
I-3
FM 6-20-40
and lower FSEs have positive coordination ofassigned codes. When COLTs designate forAir Force delivery systems, the FAC receivesthe designator code from the pilot and passesit to the COLT.
NOTE: The lower the PRF, the faster the Iasepulse and the better the paint of the target. Lowercodes should be assigned to the priority COLT.
Using two or more COLTs in differentlocations, on the same target, and on thesame code offers some advantages whenattacking high-payoff targets. The mainadvantage is that if one designator fails, theround will still have reflected energy fromanother laser to guide it. The LGW lockson and tracks for the designator with thestrongest reflected energy.
Employment OptionsThe COLT is primarily used as the designatorfor 155-mm artillery-delivered Copperhead.However, it can be used to optimize Air Forceand other aviation systems by providing targetdesignation and laser guidance forair-delivered munitions. The COLT gives thecommander a powerful capability to attackhard and point targets as well as area targets ifthe delivery systems are available. Tomaximize the effectiveness of the COLT whileminimizing the mobility limitations of theground designator, positioning must becarefully considered. Positioning factorsinclude the following:
Ž Ability to support the commander’s intent.
• Intelligence preparation of the battlefield.
• Angle T consideration for each potentialshooter.
Ž Altitude as close as possible to that of theexpected target. (Minimize vertical angle ofattack.)
Ž Survivability of the COLT.
• Desirability of survey.
• Maintenance of good communications.
COLTs are positioned by the FSCOORD orhis representative to support the maneuvercommander’s overall intent. The commanderapproves the COLT’s positioning as meetinghis intent during the rehearsal and/or as partof the published operation plan and/or order.The FSCOORD must consider two aspects inthe COLT positioning decision—tactical andtechnical. The technical aspect concernspositioning to accomplish the commander’sintent on the basis of where he wants toengage targets or target sets. The technicalaspect concerns the angle T target engagementparameters of the Copperhead.
COLTs assigned to div arty may betask-organized to subordinate artillerybattal ions or retained central ly. Intask-organizing COLTs, all fundamentals oforganization for combat should be considered.To provide the best coverage and to allow thegreatest survivability for the COLT, COLTsoften are employed in pairs. This allowscontinuous COLT coverage during theoperation. Since the COLT is a limited,valuable asset, careful consideration mustprecede a decision to decentralize the COLTsbelow brigade level. Any decentralizationshould be for a designated period of time, notas a matter of SOP.
Considerations in the offense are as follows.
Ž Recommend to the commander appropriatetargets for laser-guided munitions.
• Consider using COLTs for both marking anddesignating operations.
Ž Consider using a COLT as an independentobserver when LGMs are undesirable orunavailable.
I - 4
FM 6-20-40
Considerations in the defense are as follows.
• Consider using COLTs in pairs to ensurecoverage in depth.
Ž Survey COLT positions as a high priority inthe survey plan.
Ž Consider using COLTs to survey in obstaclesand to cover obstacles by observation.
• Consider using COLTs with night sights as anearly warning system.
Current and Projected LaserSystems
The tables on the following pages show:
Ž Current and projected laser spotter trackersystems, their general functions, and theircharacteristics.
• Descriptions of each laser designator system.
● Descriptions of laser-guided weapons.
GLOSSARY FOR TABLES
AGM = air-ground missile
ARBS = angle rate bombing system
DD = destroyer
DDG = guided missile destroyer
FAC = forward alr controller
FIST = fire support team
GBU = glide bomb unit
G/VLLD = ground/vehicular laser locatordesignator
LANTIRN = low-altitude navigation and targetnginfrared for night system
LGB = laser-guided bomb
LGW = laser-guided weapon
LLLGB = low-level laser-guided bomb
LMAV = Laser Maverick
LST = laser spot tracker
LTD = laser target designator
MMS = mast-mounted sight
MULE = modular universal laser equipment
NA = not applicable
NGF = naval gunfire
NOS = night observation system
TADS = target acquisition system anddesignation sight
TRAM = target recognition attack multisensory
UAV = unmanned aerial veheicle
USMC = United States Marine Corps
USN = US Navy
I-5
FM 6-20-40
I-6
FM 6-20-40
I-7
FM 6-20-40
I-8
FM 6-20-40
I-9
FM 6-20-40
I-10
FM 6-20-40
I-11
FM 6-20-40
APPENDIX J
ENVIRONMENTAL AND TERRAIN CONSIDERATIONSFOR FIRE SUPPORT
Mountain Operations
CharacteristicsIn combat operations, mountains generally arecharacterized by rugged, compartmentedterrain; steep slopes; and few natural orman-made lines of communication. Theweather spans the entire spectrum fromextreme cold, with ice and snow, to extremeheat in some areas. Vegetation can vary fromdense jungle to barren waste. Variability ofweather over short periods of time and ofvegetation from area to area significantlyinfluences both maneuver and fire supportoperations.
MunitionsMunitions effects are affected by the terrain.IPB helps determine where and whatmunitions are most effective. Considerations ofmunitions employment and effect are discussedbelow.
In snow—
• FASCAM may settle into the snowoff-vertical. At temperatures lower than -15°C, very little settling occurs. Settling maycause the antihandling devices to prematurelydetonate the munitions.
Ž VT and time fuzes are most effective in mostcases.
Ž THE-PD, HE-delay, and ICM are ineffectivebecause at least 40 percent of the effects aremuted by the snow.
Ž The phosphorus in WP can burn undetectedin snow for up to 4 days.
Ž Nuclear blast damage. radii for hard materieltargets can increase by as much as 20 percentat temperatures of -50°F. Snow will reducedynamic pressure. Thermal radius of safety isincreased by 30 percent in snow and coldweather.
In rocky terrain—
Ž
Ž
Ž
Ž
HE-PD is very effective because it producesextra fragmentation from splintering rocks.
VT and time fuzes are very effective becausethe burst covers a larger area than HE-PD onreverse slopes.
ICM are effective; however, when fired intoforested areas, they can hang up in trees.
FASCAM is effective to deny the enemy theuse of narrow defiles, valleys, roads, andusable terrain.
Copperhead is effective and should be plannedalong roads, defiles, and valleys.
When smoke and illumination are used—
Ž
Ž
Swirling winds make smoke employment verydifficult to adjust and maintain.
Close coordination is required with adjacentelements to ensure that- their vision is notobscured or that they are not highlighted.
Mortars are ideal because of their high-anglefires. They can deliver fires on reverse slopesand over intermediate crests.
Airbursts on reverse slopes are extremelyeffective.
J-1
FM 6-20-40
Target Acquisition and ObservationThe following are considerations when forwardobservers are involved in mountain operations:
Ž The FOs should be positioned on highground and spread out to overcome terrainmasks and compartments.
Ž The FOs may need mountaineeringequipment to get to the best positions, orthey may be airlifted.
• Terrain sketches and visibility diagrams areessential to deliver fast, accurate fires and toidentify blind spots.
Ž Heavy fogs or low clouds may obscureobservation.
Ž Observers looking up tend to underestimaterange, whereas observers looking down tendto overestimate range.
Ž Sunglasses may be required if terrain iscovered with snow.
Aerial observers—
Ž Are very effective to observe beyond terrainmasks, in deep defilade, and on reverseslopes.
• Complement the FOs.
• Can be used to detect deep targets
Ž May be confined to valleys and lowerelevations because thin air at high elevationsmakes flying difficult.
Radar considerations in mountain operationsare as follows:
Ž Radars should concentrate on terrain that canbe occupied by artillery and mortars (asdetermined by IPB).
• Terrain masks can degrade the effectiverange of the radar.
Ž Additional use of ground surveillance radarsand remote sensors may be required.
• More extensive use of shelling reports(SHELREPs) is required.
Targeting
The S2’s IPB should identify the following:
Ž Routes that can be used by the enemy toattack, withdraw, and resupply.
Ž Likely position areas for indirect fire assets,command and control elements, CSS assets,and observation posts.
• Terrain that is subject to snows slides,rockslides, or avalanches. These may deny theenemy use of roads and trails and maydestroy elements in defilade.
Positioning
Usually, position areas for mortars andartillery are limited and access thereto may berestricted. Because of the need to fire highangle, it is important that the mortars andartillery be positioned in defilade. to increasetheir survivability. Positioning considerationsare as follows:
• Helicopters should be used to airlift artilleryinto position areas. These air assets also maybe required to provide ammunition resupply.
• Helicopters may be useful in performingsurvey by use of Doppler radar.
• Positioning along dry river beds is hazardousbecause of the danger of flash flooding.
• Towns and cities usually have flat areas(school yards, parks, stadiums, and so forth)that can accommodate firing batteries.However, these towns and cities are oftenenemy objectives and may be targeted.
Ž Most mountainous flat land is farmland and isdifficult for towed artillery to negotiate fromspring to fall. However, in winter, if theground is frozen, farmland provides goodfiring positions for mortars and artillery.
J-2
FM 6-20-40
Close Air Support
Because the terrain forces the enemy toconcentrate his forces along roads, valleys,reverse slopes, and deep defilades, CAS is veryeffective. However, the terrain also restrictsthe attack direction of the CAS strikes. Theenemy also conducts an IPB to determine thelikely direction of the CAS strikes and willweight his air defenses along those routes. TheFSO must aggressively identify the enemy airdefense systems and target them to enhancethe survivability of the CAS assets.
Communications
Communications considerations in mountainoperations are as follows:
Ž Place antennas on sides of hills or mountains.
• Make maximum use of directional antennas.
• Plan to use retransmission capabilities.
Jungle Operations
Characteristics
Usually, jungle operations are carried out bylight forces. Fire support may be limited toindirect fires and air support. Becausesmall-unit operations are commonplace,greater challenges accrue to the FSCOORDsat company and battalion levels.
Munitions
In jungle terrain, most contact with the enemyis at extremely close range. If the friendlyforce has a substantial advantage in firesupport, the enemy will most likely try tocome in as close as possible and maintain thatclose contact. Thus, the friendly forcecommander cannot use his fire supportadvantage without inflicting casualties on hisown troops. Therefore, a knowledge of thetype of munitions best suited for the terrainand how to employ them is vital. For example,in triple-canopy jungle—
Ž HE-delay penetrates the treetops andsplinters the trees, creating additionalfragmentation (splintering effect).
Ž Smoke has limited effectiveness.
• WP is effective as a marking round and ininitial adjustments.
Target Acquisition and Observation
The triple-canopy jungle makes observationbeyond 25 to 50 meters very difficult. Thejungle also makes map reading, self-location,target location, and friendly unit location verydifficult.
Forward Observers. Experience from World WarII (WWII) and Vietnam showed that FOsmust be able to adjust mortar and FA fire bysound, because often they cannot see therounds to adjust them. This sound adjustmentis very difficult and requires experience.Greater accuracy can result from therecommended adjustments of two or moreFOs. The battery FDC can help by announcingSPLASH to let the FO know when the roundshould impact. The FO then counts theseconds until he hears the round detonate. Bymultiplying the seconds by the speed of sound,the FO can estimate the range to impact. Thespeed of sound is approximately 350 metersper second. The speed of sound variesaccording to temperature, wind speed anddirection, relative humidity, and air density;but 350 meters per second should be used as astart point.
The FO must determine his location andensure that the battery FDC has it plotted.The FO then determines the direction to thetarget and selects a target grid 1,000 metersalong the direction to the target. Using thatdirection and target grid, he sends a call forfire to the FDC. He adds 1,000 meters to hisposition location for safety.
When the initial adjusting round impacts, theFO uses that impact as a known point. He
J-3
FM 6-20-40
determines the direction to the round,measures the difference between the directionto the target and the impact of the initialround, computes the lateral correction, andmakes a range correction, if necessary. Usingthe shift from a known point call for fire, hesends the data to the FDC, reporting the newdirection.
If the FO’s position location is way off, theinitial round will be way off too. The FO canuse the initial round to redetermine hislocation. For example, the FO in his call forfire told the FDC to fire grid 123456, direction0200. The round impact is nowhere near thetarget. The FO then determines the directionand range to the burst. He plots aback-azimuth from the burst and estimatesrange along that direction to replot hisposition. Then, using his new position location,he reinitiates the mission.
Vietnam and WWII also showed that the firstround in adjustment should be WP. Becausethe FO is not sure of his own location orthose of other friendly elements, WP wasusually fired first to avoid inflicting casualtieson friendly personnel. (Using a 200-meterheight of burst [HOB] can help the FO seethe first round.)
Creeping fires were also used extensively inVietnam and WWII. The FO adds 300 to 400meters to his target location in case his ownposition location is wrong. Then he makescorrections of no more than 50 meters untilthe fires are on target. In Vietnam, thisprocess sometimes started with an aerialobserver and was taken over by the groundobserver once he was able to see the rounds.The aerial observer was often required torelay fire requests from the ground becausethe terrain severely limited the ranges of radiocommunications. The creeping method ofadjustment is used exclusively during dangerclose missions. The observer makes rangechanges by using corrections of 100 meters orless and creeping the rounds to the target. The
observer must know where all friendly troopsare to avoid endangering them. All weaponsthat will fire for effect are used in adjustment.For battalion missions, batteries should beadjusted individually.
Marking rounds can be fired to help the FOdetermine his own location. The use ofmarking rounds also helps ensure that theFDC knows in what area the friendly unit is,which ensures more responsive fires. Amarking round is usually WP fired 300 to 400meters forward of friendly units at 200 metersHOB. The FDC plots a target, fires a WPround, and sends the grid of the WP impact tothe FO. The FO then has a known position onwhich to orient.
Because of the close combat, laser rangefinders may not be of great use; however,night vision devices are extremely critical.
Aerial Observers. Aerial observers could beimportant in jungle warfare. They can detectenemy movements that ground forces have noway of seeing. They can act in concert withground observers to deliver accurate fires onenemy elements in close contact with friendlyforces. Also, the aerial observers can relaycalls for fire from ground elements to theFDC.
Aerial observers could help direct CAS assetsagainst enemy targets. Because groundobservers cannot see the whole battlefield, theaerial observer marks targets for the CASsortie (by use of flares, WP, or smoke).Caution must be taken, and positiveidentification of the target must be made.
Field Artillery Radars. Radars are extremelyeffective in the jungle, since most indirect firesare high-angle fires.
In a guerrilla war, most targets detected by theradars are fleeting in nature (shoot and move)and the radar must be tied in with an indirectfire support asset to ensure quick counterfires.
J-4
FM 6-20-40
Also, most enemy indirect fires will bedirected against friendly unit positions;therefore, the radars should be oriented so asto locate those enemy fires.
Ground surveillance radars and remote sensorsmust be used.
SHELREPs may not be as effective becausethe enemy shoots and moves quickly.
TargetingTargeting is very difficult because of the triplecanopy and the fluid nature of the conflict.Experience with the particular enemy willprovide some targets indicated by his pastperformance and techniques.
Targets should be planned—
Ž TO support the scheme of maneuver.
Ž Along roads and trails.
Ž At likely ambush sites.
Ž Around clearings.
• At river or stream crossings.
• Around built-up areas.
Also, isolated units will prepare 360-degreedefenses. FPFs must be planned to supportthat defensive posture.
Consider recommending to the DS battalioncommander a munition-specific RSR tosupport the operation.
PositioningOften, firing positions for field artillery andmortars are very limited; and some positionsmay be inaccessible by roads. While mortarsmay be dismounted and airlifted into position,artillery will be severely limited in its
movement and ability to position. Platoonsmay have to be widely separated, increasingthe difficulty of mutual defense and resupply.Each position must have 6,400-mil firingcapability, regardless of weapon types.Remember that a position occupied too long issubject to ground attack. Also, the enemy willquickly determine the range of weapons inthat position and stay out of their range.Consider using a helicopter-mounted PADS orDoppler radar to survey air-inserted mortarpositions inaccessible by road.
Close Air Support
Close air support can be effective in the junglebut hard to control because of the inability ofthe pilot to see the friendly ground elements.Also, because the combat is usually of suchclose nature, the delivery of the munitionsmust be closely controlled to avoid injuringfriendly personnel.
Pyrotechnics should be used to mark friendlyforces and the target area, An aerial observer,if available, should control the air strike. It isextremely important that the method used forthis marking not be duplicated by the enemy.Strict security is required.
Heavy bombs (2,000 to 3,000 pounds) withfuze extenders can clear away the junglecanopy.
Many Air Force cluster munitions aredesigned to penetrate jungle canopy.Depending on the type and quantity delivered,bomblets are effective against area targetsconsisting of personnel, light materiel, andarmor.
Communications
The following are communicationsconsiderations for jungle operations:
Ž Remember that communications in atriple-canopy jungle are severely degraded.
J-5
FM 6-20-40
• Elevate antennas above the canopy, whenpossible.
• Use aerial observers or airborne commandand control platforms as relay stations.
Ž Consider using directional antennas.
Ž Plan to use retrans assets.
Desert Operations
Characteristics
The three types of desert terrain aremountainous, rocky plateau, and sandy ordune-type desert. Fire support planning andconsiderations vary significantly betweenoperations in each type of desert terrain.Often, those considerations resemble those forother environments, such as arctic andmountain. The type of terrain in the area ofoperations must be analyzed before effectivefire support planning can be performed.Tactics, techniques, and employment ofmunitions are greatly affected by the differentterrain characteristics. Restricted desert terraincan offer significant disadvantages formovement and emplacement of indirect firesystems, depending on the trafficability of thesurrounding valley areas.
Munitions
Mountain Deserts. Munitions effectiveness inmountain deserts is the same as in anymountainous region except that theconsiderations involving snow usually do notapply. The following are added considerations:
• HE-PD is very effective because of the extrafragmentation created by splintering rocks.
Ž ICM are very effective.
• FASCAM is very effective and should beused to deny the enemy the use of roads,valleys, narrow defiles, and level terrain.
• Copperhead is extremely effective.
• Smoke and illumination may be degraded byswirling winds. They must be closelycoordinated with adjacent units to ensure thatthe vision of adjacent troops is not obscuredor troops are not highlighted. Both smokeand illuminating shells can be used tosilhouette the enemy.
Ž Airbursts on reverse slopes are extremelyeffective.
Rocky Plateau Deserts. The following aremunitions considerations in rocky plateaudesert operations:
• HE-PD is extremely effective. It creates extrafragments by splintering rocks.
• VT and time fuzes are effective.
• ICM are very effective.
Ž FASCAM is very effective and should beemployed with the natural terrain to force theenemy into unnavigable terrain.
Ž Copperhead can be very effective.
• Smoke and illumination may be degraded byhigh winds but may be used to silhouette theenemy.
Sandy or Dune Deserts. In sandy or dunedeserts, the following are munitionsconsiderations:
Ž HE with PD or delay fuze is smothered bydeep sand, which makes it ineffective.
Ž VT and time fuzes are very effective.
Ž ICM and FASCAM are smothered by deepsand, which makes them ineffective.
• Copperhead is very effective.
• Smoke and illumination are effective and canbe used to silhouette the enemy.
J-6
FM 6-20-40
Target Acquisition andObservation
Forward Observers. Determining location isoften very difficult in rocky plateau and sandyor dune deserts. Maps are often inaccurate,dunes shift, and heat waves hamper distanceestimations. Use of pace count or odometerreadings is essential for day and nightnavigation. Resection from available keyterrain features in desolate regions may be thebest of a few options for self-location.OH-58Ds can also be used.
Laser range finders must be used, especiallywhen heat waves degrade distance estimatingby conventional means.
FOs can detect targets by observing dustclouds created by moving enemy forces.
Dust clouds created by impacting roundssometimes make subsequent adjustmentsdifficult. Usually, adjustment of fires by an FOis enhanced when the initial round impactsbeyond the target.
The FO should consider using smoke behindthe enemy to silhouette him. The sameness ofcolors in the desert makes specific targets hardto spot. At night, illumination burning on theground behind the enemy has the same effect.
Laser range finders may need to be adjustedseveral times a day because of temperaturechanges.
COLTs should be employed to engage theenemy at maximum distances.
Most open desert terrain allows a faster or anunimpeded approach and more maneuverspace for mechanized forces. Use of triggerpoints and long-range observation capabilitiesis critical for effective engagement withavailable fire support systems. Fast-movingformations are best engaged with TACAIRassets and attack helicopters.
Increased equipment failure can be expectedas a result of heat, sand, and dust. Especiallysusceptible are radios, Vinson equipment, andother electronic equipment.
Aerial Observers. Aerial platforms for targetacquisition, coordination of fire support, andadjustment of fires are critical in flat terrain orin a desert of rolling sand dunes. The difficultyof aerial navigation in flat desert terrain is adisadvantage that must be planned for.
The absence of terrain features in an opendesert makes aerial platforms more vulnerableto enemy air defense.
Because of the ability to see great distancesand the featureless terrain of an open desert,positive identification of friendly troopsrequires special measures. More than usualcoordination may be required, withprearranged signals and procedures establishedfor friendly force locations. Maintainingcontinuous communications on fire supportand/or command nets with aviation elementsoperating in sector is even more critical.
Radars. Radars are highly effective in thedesert. However, they may have to berepositioned more often because the flatterrain does not provide adequate screeningcrests.
Targeting
A thorough IPB must be conducted—
• TO identify passable terrain for wheeled andtracked vehicles.
• To identify likely mortar and artillerypositions.
• TO assess the impact of wadis, gulches, andother significant terrain on friendly andenemy mobility.
Ž To identify likely enemy forward observationpositions.
J-7
FM 6-20-40
Targets should be planned as follows:
• ICM and FASCAM for roads in restrictedTerrain.
Ž FASCAM to deny the enemy navigableterrain and to try to force him into wadis andgulches.
Ž VT on reverse slopes.
• VT and time fuzes on targets in deep, sandydeserts.
• Smoke during the day and ground-burningillumination at night to silhouette the enemy.
• Smoke and WP against likely enemy OPs.
• HE-PD on targets in rocky terrain.
Ž ATGM systems and enemy air defensesystems as priority targets.
Positioning
Common Grid. Terrain association techniques(map spots) may be inadequate for positioningindirect fire systems.
Concealment. The artillery and mortars shouldmove under cover of darkness, because enemyobservers can detect the movement or at leastthe dust from the movement of vehicles.
Resupply should also be conducted at night,preferably en route between positions.
Emplacement in wadis and gulches offers thebest concealment. However, it entails somedegree of risk as the result of unexpected flashflooding (size of wadis is relative to degree ofrisk). Appropriate color of equipment andcamouflage systems is essential for effectiveconcealment of firing positions. Sand paintingof vehicles and equipment is an alternative.
Movement. Trafficability through the dunes maybe severely degraded. The absence of roads inthe direction of our movement will furtherslow moves.
Positioning on rocky soil away from roads reduces the dust hazard during air assaultoperations. Use of helicopter on-boardnavigational systems (Doppler) can help inlocating gun positions. However, these systemsmust be updated with accurate grid locationsat the pickup zone (PZ).
Position Area Selection. Sandy deserts usuallyare a problem for mortars and towed artillery.Solid ground to secure baseplates for theM102 howitzer may be rare in certain areas.
Close Air Support
Air support aircraft may be more vulnerablebecause of the lack of covered approaches.However, the greater visibility common inmost deserts allows target engagement frombetter standoff ranges.
Panels or other visual or electronic signaturesare required to help the pilot differentiatebetween friend and foe.
SEAD is very important.
Detailed planning for CAS is importantbecause of wide dispersion of units.
Night Operations
Reasons for Night Combat
Some specific reasons for night combatinclude—
• TO achieve surprise and to avoid heavy losseswhich might be incurred in daylightoperations over the same terrain.
• TO compensate for advantages held by anenemy with superior forces or air superiority.
Ž To counter the enemy night operations.Ž To retain the initiative or freedom of action.
Ž To exploit the technological advantage Of ourforces at night over a less sophisticatedenemy.
J-8
FM 6-20-40
Maneuver
Movement and direct fire are the two areasmost affected by the reduced visibility inherentin night operations.
Movement. Movement and land navigation aremuch more difficult at night. This is largelybecause of problems with terrain recognition.Maintaining direction while moving isextremely difficult at night.
Direct Fire. Target acquisition and engagementranges are limited to the capabilities of nightvision devices (NVDs). Ground surveillanceradars can be used for early target acquisitionand for directing engagement by indirect ordirect fires. Controlling the direct fires iscritical at night. Control requires effectivecommunications to ensure engagement of thecorrect targets.
Fire Support
The main consideration in supporting nightcombat with field artillery, mortars, tacticalaircraft, and naval gunfire is the ability todetect the target and coordinate the attack.Several considerations are critical.
Illumination and smoke assets probably will bein short supply. If their use is critical to thesuccess of an operation, the FSO must knowthe specific area in which the commanderdesires to use smoke and illumination and forwhat purpose. If inadequate amounts are onhand, action must be taken to alleviate theshortfall well in advance.
At night, the adjustment of fires without theaid of radars, artificial illumination, or soundranging is virtually impossible. Critical targetsshould be adjusted during daylight if possible,or target acquisition assets should be allocatedfor adjustment of fires.
Smoke should be planned at night to degradeenemy night vision capabilities.
The FSO plays a critical role if CAS or attackhelicopters are used in night operations. Theseweapon platforms may not be equipped withadequate night vision equipment. Theireffectiveness will depend on the ability of theforce to illuminate targets. Additionalcoordination between the FSO, maneuver S3or G3 air, and ALO is needed to integratesorties and plan illumination for their use.
Night Offensive Operations
In planning a night attack, the commandermust decide what type of attack to conduct.His decision is based on the required firesupport.
Illuminated and Nonilluminated Attacks. A nilluminated attack is used when the possibilityof achieving surprise is remote, when theenemy has NVDs, and where control of unitsoverrides the need for stealth.
The nonilluminated attack is made by usingstealth to achieve surprise in closing with theenemy before he discovers the attack. Eventhough an attack is to be nonilluminated,illumination is always planned. It is executedonly on the commander’s authority.
Execution of Planned Fires. Stealth and surprisemay be more important to the attackobjectives than the effects expected bypreparation fires. Use of preparation firesalerts the enemy to the objectives of the attackand may compromise any night advantages.However, these fires should always be planned.
The nonilluminated attack with on-call firesoffers a better opportunity for surprise.
Night Offensive Fire Support Considerations. Inaddition to the planning and coordinationconsiderations for daylight offensiveoperations, the considerations discussed belowapply.
J-9
FM 6-20-40
Fires should be planned to disrupt or destroyenemy command and control facilities.
Prearranged visual signals such as hand-heldflares can be used for initiating or cancelingfires (air support and schedules of fire such asgroups). Applicable SOI should be used.
When fires are shifted, they should be movedbeyond the friendly unit limit of advance.
Illuminating fires may not be fired but shouldbe planned. Illumination over the objectiveshould be timed to burn out approximately300 meters above the ground. Illuminationbeyond the objective should be allowed toburn on the ground to silhouette the defenderson the objective and to provide a headingreference for friendly forces. Also, illuminationcan be placed on several locations over a widearea to confuse the enemy as to the exactplace of the attack. Once used, illuminationshould probably be continuous, becausefriendly troops will have temporarily lost theirnight vision.
Smoke can be used to degrade enemy NVDs.It should be placed in front of the enemy,Smoke also can be used when key terrain is tobe bypassed. However, smoke on the objectiveduring the final assault conceals enemylocations. Only thermal devices can seethrough smoke.
Fire support coordinating measures should beplaced on identifiable terrain. Permissivemeasures should be placed well in front offriendly forces. Restrictive measures should beused minimally and must provide the safetyrequired yet not complicate clearing fires atnight. These measures must be disseminatedand understood by all friendly elements.
Suppressive fires are planned for the finalassault to the objective.
Fires are planned beyond the limit of advanceto stop enemy force retreat or reinforcement.
Night Defensive OperationsThe effective employment of fire support iscritical to the successful night defense. As withthe offense, daylight planning and coordinationconsiderations are used in addition toconsiderations for night defense, which are asfollows:
Ž On-call fires should be used to engage enemyforces as they attack or probe the defense.
Ž Use of illumination must be planned. Theapproving authority for defensive illuminationshould be retained by the appropriatemaneuver commander. This is to precludeaccidental illumination of recon patrols,engineer activities, and so forth. When used,illumination should be dropped above andbehind attacking forces to silhouette them.
• Fires, especially FPFs, should be adjustedduring daylight, if possible.
Ž Smoke may be used to slow, confuse, anddisorient attacking forces.
• FASCAM maybe planned by the engineer toseparate forces, disrupt formations, and pluggaps in the defense.
Ž Permissive fire support measures should beplanned as close to friendly troops aspossible; however, measures should be placedon positively identifiable terrain.
• Restrictive measures, if required, should beplanned and placed on easily identifiableterrain to provide safety to friendly elements.
Psychological Aspects of Night Operations
The psychological or mental factors that affectsoldiers most during night operations are thosethat tend to lessen confidence, cause fear, andincrease the perception of isolation.
Fear. Fear is a normal experience in battle,and night intensifies this emotion. Since thereis a tendency to doubt things that cannot beseen, fear of the unknown or of an unseenenemy may increase at night.
J-10
FM 6-20-40
Isolation. AirLand Battle Doctrine oftenrequires units to be dispersed on thebattlefield. At night, that dispersion seemseven greater. At night and during periods ofreduced communications, even small distancesbetween individuals, crews, or units seemexaggerated. There is a tendency for one tothink “I’m alone out here.”
Continuous OperationsPhysiological aspects of continuous operationsinclude those factors that degrade the soldier’sphysical ability to function. Sleep loss andfatigue induced by night operations magnifystress.
Sleep Loss
After 48 hours of sustained activity, loss ofsleep becomes the most significant degrader ofsoldier performance on the battlefield. Assleep loss begins to accumulate, both physicaland mental effects are observed in varyingdegrees.
Most of the following effects can occur after24 hours without sleep:
Ž Tasks may be omitted as a result of amomentary lapse into sleep (falling asleepwith eyes open).
Ž
Ž
•
•
•
Vigilance decreases rapidly, resulting inmissed critical signals.
Ability to focus on a task for more than abrief period decreases noticeably.
Memory becomes faulty, particularlyshort-term memory. This makes it difficult tolearn new information, follow instructions, orremember recent decisions.
Response to events or instructions slows. Oneseems to be operating in a daze.
The ability to formulate and make sense frominformation becomes severely degraded. It
takes longer to perform simple tasks such asencoding or decoding messages or plottinggrid coordinates. Accuracy suffers.
Ž The ability to reason logically is degraded,which may result in snap judgments.
Ž Problems with communication arise. One hasdifficulty understanding or articulating evensimple messages.
• A wide range of mood changes, characterizedby depression, anger, lack of patience, andeuphoria, is experienced.
Sleep loss is cumulative over time. Thenumber of hours needed to recover is directlyrelated to the number of hours sleep wasdeprived. As a rule of thumb, a minimum of 6hours rest is required for every 24 hourswithout sleep.
The following are recovery and adjustmenttimes:
Ž 12 hours sleep or rest before a prolongedwork period.
• 12 hours sleep or rest after 36 to 48 hoursacute sleep loss.
Ž 24 hours sleep or rest after 36 to 48 hourssleep loss with high work load (12 to 16 hoursa day).
• 2 to 3 days off after 72 hours or more acutesleep loss.
Ž 3 to 5 days to initiate biological adaptationand return to normal day-night cycle fromnight shift.
Ž 3 to 4 weeks for full adaptation of biologicalrhythms to a typical work-rest schedule (as innight shift work).
Fatigue
Fatigue is the result of excessive work andsleep loss. The latent effects of fatigue maylinger for about 3 days following sleepdeprivation of 48 hours or more.
J-11
FM 6-20-40
Military Operationson Urban Terrain
Characteristics
Because conflict on urban terrain is becomingmore likely, the FSO at any level must beaware of the special considerations for firesuppor t on urban te r ra in . Spec i f iccharacteristics of MOUT are as follows:
• The defender has the advantage.
• Freedom to maneuver within the urban areais greatly restricted.
Ž Visibility is reduced because of buildings.
Ž The attacker and the defender haveconsiderable cover and concealment.
Ž Unit boundaries are much smaller.
• Small-unit operations predominate.
Munitions
The following are considerations involving theuse of various munitions in urban terrain:
Ž Careful use of VT is required to avoidpremature arming.
• Indirect fires may create unwanted rubble.
Ž The proximity of friendly and enemy unitsrequires careful coordination.
Ž WP may create unwanted fires and smoke.
Ž Fuze delay should be used to penetratefortifications.
• Illuminating rounds can be effective;however, friendly positions must remain inshadows and enemy positions must behighlighted. Tall buildings may mask theeffect.
• VT and time fuzes and ICM are effective forclearing enemy positions, observers, andantennas off building tops.
J-12
Ž Swirling winds may degrade smokeoperations.
Ž FASCAM may be used to impede enemymovements.
Target Acquisition and Observation
Forward Observers. The following areconsiderations in the employment of forwardobservers on urban terrain:
Ž Ground observation is limited because of thebuildings.
• Consider placing FOs on tops of buildings.
Ž Adjustment of fires will be difficult becausebuildings block the view of adjustmentrounds.
Forward observers must be able to determinewhere the dead space is and how large it is.Dead space is the area in which indirect firescannot fall because of buildings, and it istherefore a safe area for the enemy. Forlow-angle artillery, the dead space is generallyfive times the height of the building. Formortars and high-angle artillery, it is generallyone-half the height of the building.
Aerial Observers. Aerial observers are veryeffective to see behind buildings immediatelyto the front of friendly forces. Aerial observerscan also relay calls for f ire whencommunications are degraded because ofpower lines or building mask.
Radars. Because most indirect fires in urbanterrain will be high angle, radars will be ableto locate many enemy positions. The radarsmust not be sited too close behind tallbuildings, or they will lose some effectiveness.
Targeting
Targeting is very difficult on urban terrain,because the enemy has many covered andconcealed position areas and movement lanes.The enemy may be on rooftops, in buildings,
FM 6-20-40
and in sewer and subway systems. Aerialobservers are extremely valuable in thetargeting process. They can see deep to detectmovements , roof top pos i t ions , andfortifications. Targets should be planned onmajor roads, road intersections, and known orlikely enemy fortifications. They should beplanned on rooftops to clear away enemy FOsand communications and radar equipment.Consider employing artillery in the direct firemode to destroy fortifications.
PositioningBecause of the predominance of concretesurfaces, finding positions for artillery andmortars on urban terrain may be difficult. Thefollowing are some positioning considerations:
•
Ž
Ž
•
Parks, school yards, and other obvious choicesfor positions are obvious to the enemy alsoand will be targeted.
Positions for howitzers within buildings(garages, warehouses, and so forth) providecover and concealment but may negativelyaffect high-angle fires.
Movement between positions may behampered by street rubble.
Commanders must have the flexibility toprovide survey control by use of conventionalmeans, as the use of PADS maybe limited.
Ž Mortar baseplates on concrete surfaces maybe stabilized by use of sandbags.
Close Air Support
The following are considerations in the use ofCAS:
Ž Enemy fortifications should be reduced withprecision guided munitions. The presence oftall buildings degrades this capability.
• CAS may create unwanted rubble. Attackenemy units moving in and out of the built-uparea.
• The presence of civilians or key facilities maylimit the use of air weapons.
• Limited ground observation may require thatairborne FACs control strike aircraft.
Communications
The following are communicationsconsiderations in MOUT:Ž Radio communications are degraded by tall
buildings.
Ž Wire should be routed through sewers andbuildings for protection.
Ž Messengers should be used.
Ž Local civilian telephone and wirecommunications facilities, if available, shouldbe used for unsecure communications.
Cold Weather OperationsFire planning for cold weather operations is nodifferent than that required for moretemperate regions. However, the fire supportplanner must consider the limited groundmobility of artillery weapons and ammunitionsupply and increased time of operation.
Characteristics
Extreme conditions of weather can bedramatic and can severely impact onobservation, mobility, and delivery of fires.Specific weather phenomena with which thefire support personnel must be concerned arewhiteout, grayout, and ice fog.
Whiteout. The observer appears to be in auniformly white glow. Neither shadows,horizon, nor clouds are discernible. Depthperception and orientation are lost. Only verynear dark objects can be seen. Whiteoutsoccur over an unbroken snow cover andbeneath a uniformly overcast sky. Blowingsnow can cause the same effect on aerialobservation.
J-13
FM 6-20-40
Grayout. Grayout is similar to whiteout, exceptthat the horizon is distinguishable undergrayout conditions. It occurs over asnow-covered surface during twilightconditions or when the snow is close to thehorizon. There is an overall grayness to thesurroundings; and when the sky is overcastwith dense clouds, there is an absence ofshadows, which results in a loss of depthperception.
Ice Fog. This is common around inhabitedareas during cold weather below 35° F. Watervapor created by humans and by vehicleexhausts may appear around soldier andequipment concentrations. Ice fog obscuresvision and discloses locations by presenting avisible cloud to the enemy. Artillery batteriesmay create ice fog when firing.
MunitionsThe following are considerations in theemployment of various munitions in coldweather operations:
• Make maximum use of airburst munitions.
• HE-PD, HE-delay, ICM, and FASCAM areineffective in deep snow and unfrozenmuskeg. At least 40 percent of the blast fromthese munitions is smothered by the snow.
Ž Smoke (HC) is not effective becausecanisters are smothered in the deep snow.
Ž WP is effective; however, phosphorus mayburn undetected in the snow for up to 3 to 4days and may be a hazard to friendly troopssubsequently moving through the area.
Ž Overall, VT is a good fuze for cold weatheroperations. However, snow and ice may causeit to detonate prematurely. Also, extremecold causes a higher number of duds amongVT fuzes. The new improved VT fuze hasreduced this problem.
Ž Extreme cold weather will affect the range ofweapons.
Ž Low temperature may cause illuminatingrounds to malfunction as the result offreezing the parachute and its components.
Target Acquisition and Observation
Forward Observers. The following areconsiderations in FO employment in coldweather operations:
• Forward observers should be equipped withsnowshoes or skis to allow them to movequickly.
• Extreme cold requires that observers in staticpositions be relieved often.
• Visibility diagrams may have to be upgradedbecause drifting snow changes visibility.
Ž Bright sunlight reflecting off a snow-coveredlandscape causes snow blindness. Amberfilters on binoculars and observation devicesreduce the incidence of snow blindness.
• Ground bursts may be difficult to observebecause of deep snow.
Aerial Observers. Aerial observers are valuablebecause they can see deep and are not asprone to disorientation as are groundobservers. However, weather conditions mayreduce the availability of aircraft.
Radars. The following should be consideredwhen radars are used in cold weatheroperations:
• Extremely cold weather may degrade theiroperations.
Ž Ground surveillance radars are effective.
• Remote sensors are not effective when usedin deep snow.
Targeting
Because of terrain and weather phenomena,target detection is difficult. However, ice fogsand snow clouds created by moving enemy
J-14
FM 6-20-40
formations will reveal targets. Also, tracks inthe snow may indicate enemy positions.
Close Air Support
The following are considerations in the use ofCAS in cold weather operations:
Ž Frequent poor weather reduces theavailability of CAS.
Ž The sameness of the terrain makes themarking of targets critical.
Ž Panels or pyrotechnics must be used toindicate friendly locations.
CommunicationsEffective communications are hampered by—
• Electronic interference.
Ž Weakened batteries. Conventional dry-cellbatteries are 40 percent effective below 0° F,20 percent effective below -10° F, and 8percent effective below -30° F. A similarproblem exists for nickel-cadmium (NICAD)and lithium batteries.
Ž Frost from human respiration forms in themouthpiece. Cover it with cloth or a sock.
Survey
Extreme cold in arctic and subarctic regionsadversely affects survey equipment operability.Accuracies may be degraded and impact ontransfer data, massed fire, and unobserved fire.
Field Artillery Movement
The following must be considered in FAmovement in cold weather operations:
•
•
Ž
•
Consider route reconnaissance in FAground and air.
Ice thickness and load-bearing capacity mustalways be determined before the FA crossesfrozen lakes and rivers.
A vehicle may be required to positionartillery weapons used in air assaultoperations.
Maximum use of aerial resupply should beplanned.
J-15
F M 6 - 2 0 - 4 0
APPENDIX K
AERIAL FIRE SUPPORT OBSERVER AND OH-58DEMPLOYMENT
Description of the OH-58DHelicopter
The OH-58D is a division or corps aerialplatform capable of conducting multipletactical missions in a relatively short time.Because of its mobility and on-board systems,this helicopter gives the commander the abilityto seize the initiative and remain extremelyflexible in a tactical environment.
The OH-58D helicopter consists of a modifiedOH-58 airframe, a mast-mounted sight, anairborne target hand-over system (ATHS), anattitude and heading reference system(AHRS), and an advanced avionics cockpit.The crew consists of one pilot and one aerialfire support observer.
Modified Airframe
Improvements to the airframe include thefollowing:
Ž A 650 shaft horsepower (SHP) turbine enginewith flight endurance of 2.5 hours.
Ž Hover out-of-ground effect (OGE) at 4,000feet at 95°F.
• Vertical climb of 500 feet per minute.
• Foward airspeed of 119 knots.
• Rearward and sideward airspeeds of 35 knots.
Advanced Avionics CockpitThis cockpit contains a complete digitalprogrammable system readout with aircraftstatistics, frequencies, location, and TACFIREmessages; one VHF radio, one UHF radio,and two FM radios; and the capability foradding an HF radio.
Airborne Target Hand-Over System
The ATHS gives the operator the capability tointerface with Army aviation aircraft (UH-60,AH-64) and Air Force aircraft (F-16, A-10,and A-7). It also gives the unit an automatedcommunications link with artillery systemsthrough TACFIRE.
Mast-Mounted Sight System
The MMS is above the rotor system andhouses the optics for the AFSO and pilot.Contained in the sight system are the laserrange finder and/or designator, the optictelescope, the thermal imaging sight, and theboresighting system. With these systems, theAFSO has the capability for day or nighttarget acquisition and recognition and theability to laser range and designate targets wellbeyond 5 kilometers.
Attitude and Heading Reference System
This system is similar to the conventionalPADS. It is capable of giving the pilot aneight-digit grid location of the aircraft duringflight. The system must be updated with surveypoints throughout the routes of the aircraft.
Crew
The pilot and the aerial fire support observerare the flight crew of the OH-58D. The pilotis the primary operator of the aircraft. TheAFSO performs navigation assistance, tacticalcoordination with the supported element, anddigital communication with the artillery units.He performs lasing, designation and hasty fireplanning; reports to higher headquarters; andis the secondary operator of the aircraft in anemergency.
K-1
FM 6-20-40
Capabilities of the OH-58DThe OH-58D helicopter has the followingcapabilities:
Ž Target acquisition capability in day or nightvisibility and in limited visibility through theuse of a thermal image system (TIS).
• Eight-digit target location capability based onthe accuracy of position location equipment,
• Ability to supplement and use Army aviation,Air Force, and other ground targetacquisition assets.
Ž Laser target designation and range-findingcapability.- The OH-58D is compatible withmunitions such as the Pave Penny,Copperhead, and other smart munitions of allservices.
• Provides a digital link to any TACFIREartillery unit and its relay systems.
• Can deploy, detect, recognize, and guide
•
•
Ž
•
munitions- to a target and send targetintelligence reports without exposing morethan the MMS to the enemy threat.
Provides rapid mobility throughout thebattlefield.
Capable of communications with all AirForce aircraft and Army assets.
Can fully support a combat aviation unit withaerial fire support coordination duringtactical operations.
In the future, aircraft will be mounted withStinger and antiaircraft missile pods for useas a self-defense weapon system.
LimitationsThe OH-58D is a line-of-sight system. Itcannot see over the horizon or throughfoliage.
If the weather or environment defeats thelaser, it may defeat the system. Defeating
K-2
conditions could include conditions such assmoke, dust clouds, fog, and ice. Because ofsafety restrictions, the system cannot be flownin icing weather conditions.
The aircraft is not certified for instrumentflight rules (IFR). That means the aircraft canbe flown by instruments in bad weather, butonly in emergency situations.
Preflight operations require 35 to 50 minutesto program systems for a mission. Navigationinformation, communications, and ATHS datamust be entered before executing a mission.
Crew endurance is limited. The division hasonly six of these aircraft; approximately fourare available at any one time because ofdowntime for maintenance. For this reason,missions for these systems must bewell-planned and briefed.
Fire support coordination is possible butdifficult to perform while target acquisitiona n d / o r a t t a c k i s b e i n g c o n d u c t e dsimultaneously. Limited space and nohard-copy capability in the aircraft makescheduling and planning difficult. The AFSOcan digitally transmit only limited fire supportplanning information. Transmission of fireplans will be limited to the capabilitiesequivalent to those of a company FSCOORD.
MissionsThe OH-58D is designed to perform a varietyof missions as described below.
Target AcquisitionTarget acquisition capabilities of the OH-58Dinclude —
Ž Acquiring deep targets for supported unitsand counterfire assets.
Ž Collecting and reporting battlefieldinformation.
Ž Early warning surveillance.
FM 6-20-40
Target Engagement
The OH-58D is capable of firing targets withall fire support assets, including smartmunitions.
Fire Support Planning andCoordination
When no other capability is available, theOH-58D can—
Ž Perform rear area fire support
• Augment combat aviation brigade firesupport operations with the AFSO.
OrganizationAt each level of command, assets from thefield artillery and the aviation brigade combineto form the OH-58D system.
Corps
Four AFSOs are assigned to the headquartersand headquarters battery (HHB) of each fieldartillery brigade.
K-3
FM 6-20-40
Fifteen aircraft and pilots are assigned to thetarget acquisition and reconnaissance company,command aviation battalion, corps aviationbrigade.
Division
Six AFSOs are assigned to the HHB, divisionartillery.
K-4
FM 6-20-40
Six aircraft and pilots are assigned to the divarty support platoon of the command aviationcompany of the aviation brigade.
EmploymentConsiderations
Because of its limited numbers, multipurposeutility, and requirement for target attack andTA systems support, the OH-58D systemrequires detailed planning and execution at allechelons within the fire support structure. Useof the OH-58D should be based on the factorsof METT-T and the commander’s intent.
On the basis of the mission, IPB, resources,TVA, and the commander’s concept andintent, the FSCOORD at each echelon ofcommand recommends to the supportedcommander the priority of employment,appropriate munitions mix, supporting andsupported units, and selection and dispositionof appropriate sensors. Determinations made
To provide the accuracy and responsivenessrequired by the OH-58D system, targetacquisition and designation systems provideimmediate target location capability and theability to interface with the fire support C3system. Targets are initially located byacquisition systems that can see deep. They arethen refined by other systems as the targetsmove closer. When contact is established, thetarget is identified by the maneuver companyFIST, the COLT, or the OH-58D. The linkbetween these other acquisition systems andthe OH-58D will be the TACFIRE, or whenfielded, the advanced field artillery tacticaldata system (AFATDS).
OH-58D missions require prior planning andcoordination between the AFSO of theOH-58D system, the unit to be supported, andthe units supporting the system. Specialrequirements include maintenance, fuel,TACFIRE subscriber codes, TACFIRE device
on OH-58D employment are reflected in the designation (such as observer with laser),task organization and fire support paragraph or survey locations, and so forth. Althoughannex of the appropriate operation order. digitally interfaced with the fire support C3
K-5
FM 6-20-40
system, the AFSO cannot effectively transmit afire support plan digitally. Therefore,transmission of the fire support plan is, for themost part, manual. When placed under theoperational control of an FA unit, theOH-58D moves to the designated rendezvouspoint and contacts the FS cell of thesupported unit. The FS cell is responsible forcoordinating the requisite C3 for employment.The OH-58D is integrated into the unit firesupport plan and positioned accordingly.Normally a direct link is established betweenthe OH-58D and the fire unit supporting it.When a target is detected, the system movesto a vantage point, coordinates the delivery offires on the target, provides target attackassessment, and reengages the target ifnecessary.
The aircraft requires significant survey supportin order to maintain the accuracy of itstarget-locating system. The system must beinitialized every 15 nautical miles or 15minutes. Less than adequate survey degradesfirst-round fire-for-effect capability. Div arty isresponsible to provide survey control referencepoints.
Operationally, the system can be employed byitself when it is performing target acquisitionand targeting. The ideal situation, however,would be to employ another aircraft, such asanother OH-58D or an OH-58C, to enhancesurvivability and mission performance. Twoaircraft will facilitate continuous coveragewhen one goes to refuel.
Division Control
OH-58D assets available to the division can beemployed in support of the division as a wholeor can be further allocated to subordinateunits. The division FS cell normally controlsemployment of OH-58D systems retainedunder divisional control. These systems aredirected toward areas of particular interest tomeet the commander’s intent. Missions includeaugmenting target designation and target
acquisition assets for surge requirements inclose, rear, and limited deep operations.Under division control, the AFSO is assignedmissions by the division FS cell and providesan acquisition capability and the ability to callfor and adjust indirect fire support. The AFSOreceives initial artillery support through the divarty. A quick fire channel can be establishedto a GS artillery unit, such as the MLRSbattery. The AFSO talks to div arty or thedivision FSE on the div arty command net(voice) or operations/fire direction net 1, 2, or3 (digital). For artillery support, the AFSOcontacts a designated artillery unit on itsoperations/fire direction net (digital). TheOH-58D may be OPCON to a rear areaoperations center (RAOC) or a tacticalcombat force to support rear operations, Inthis contingency, the OH-58D will be assignedmissions by the RAOC fire support officer.The AFSO receives artillery support throughthe artillery unit assigned the mission tosupport rear operations. The AFSO talks tothe FSE on the FSE net or on the supportingartillery unit command net (voice). The AFSOcalls for artillery support on the supportingunit FD net (digital).
Maneuver Brigade ControlThe OH-58D system should be used primarilyfor augmenting the brigade organic targetdesignation and target acquisition assets ratherthan for fire support coordination. TheOH-58D system normally is used to augmentthe brigade FISTs and COLTs. Because it cansee deeper than most other target acquisitionsystems in support of the brigade, the OH-58Dalso augments target acquisition assetssupporting the brigade and provides timelyand accurate battlefield information. In anycase, the OH-58D is under the direction of thebrigade FS cell.
Aviation Brigade Control
When the aviation brigade exercises directionof the OH-58D systems, it normally places the
K-6
FM 6-20-40
systems under the operational control of eitherthe divisional cavalry squadron or an attackhelicopter battalion (AHB).
In support of the cavalry squadron, theOH-58D system is employed in much thesame manner as in support of maneuver units.It can also be used to support the cavalrysquadron air cavalry troops individually as anaerial FIST. The OH-58D function in such arole is to provide fire support planning andcoordination, to implement the aircommander’s concept and intent, to provide
target acquisition, and to designate targets forattack helicopters.
When the OH-58D is OPCON to an attackhelicopter battalion, the AHB commander maychoose to retain control of the OH-58D ratherthan further allocate the system to subordinateunits. This is particularly true when thebattalion is given a mission requiring theemployment of the battalion as a whole. TheOH-58D system is one of the few elementsunder the commander’s control that is capableof providing effective fire support planning andcoordination.
K-7
FM 6-20-40
APPENDIX L
REPRODUCIBLE FORMS AND TEMPLATE PATTERNS
DA FormsReproducible copies of the following forms are provided for local reproduction:
• DA Form 4655-R, Target List Work Sheet.
• DA Form 4656-R, Scheduling Work Sheet.
• DA Form 5032-R, Field Artillery Delivered Minefield planning Sheet.
Ž DA Form 5368-R, Quick Fire Plan.
Template PatternsPatterns for the Copperhead Coverage Template and the Field Artillery Mine SafetyTemplate are printed here with special care to maintain tolerances for use with1:50,000-scale maps. Photocopying these template patterns Introduces errors which wouldmake the templates unsatisfactory for use. However, local Training Aids SupportCenters (TASCs) may use the printed copies as blueprints to locally fabricate thetemplates for unit use. Before their use, all locally fabricated templates must bechecked against 1:50,000-scale maps for accuracy.
L-1
●
FM 6-20-40
GLOSSARY
A
AA
AAA
AAGS
AATF
AATM
ABCA
ABP
A/C
ACA
ACE
ACR
ACRV
AD
ADA
ADAM
admin/log
ADO
AFAC
AFATDS
AFSO
AGM
AHB
AHRS
AI
ALD
ALO
AM
Aas acquired (attack matrix)
assembly area
antiaircraft artillery
Army air-ground system
air assault task force
air assault team
Australia, Britain, Canada, America
air battle position
aircraft
airspace coordination area
Allied Command Europe
armored cavalry regiment
artillery command and reconnaissancevehicle
air defense
air defense artillery
area denial artillery munition
administrative/logistics (radio net)
air defense officer
airborne forward air controller
advanced field artillery tactical datasystem
aerial fire support observer
air-ground missile
attack helicopter battalion
attitude and heading reference system
air interdiction
airborne laser designator
air liaison officer
amplitude modulated
AMC
AMF (L)
ammo
ANGLICO
anx
AO
AOF
AP
APC
APDS
APFSDS
API
armd
ARBS
ARPD
arty
AS
ASOC
ASP
ASPS
AT
ATF
ATGM
ATHS
ATI
ATO
ATP
AVLB
avn
az
air mission commander
Allied Command Europe MobileForce (Land)
ammunition
air and naval gunfire liaison company
annex
area of operations
azimuth of fire
antipersonnel
armored personnel carrier
armor-piercing discarding sabot
armor-piercing, fin-stabilized,discardingsabot
armor-piercing incendiary
armored
angle rate bombing system
army mobile transport battalion(Soviet)
artillery
Australia
air support operations center
ammunition supply point
all-source production section
antitank
amphibious task force
antitank guided missile
airborne target hand-over system
artillery target intelligence
air tasking order
ammunition transfer point
armored vehicle-launched bridge
aviation
azimuth
Glossary-1
FM 6-20-40
BAI
BCE
BCS
BDA
bde
BE
BECS
BGU
BHOL
BIFV
BLT
BMA
BMP
bn
BOS
BP
BSA
BSO
BTR
btry
C2
C3
CA
CAA
CAB
CAS
CATF
cav
CBU
CCP
Bbattlefield air interdiction
battlefield control element
battery computer system
bomb damage assessment
brigade
Belgium
battlefield electronic CEOI system
basic generation unit
battle handoff line
Bradley infantry fighting vehicle
battalion landing team
battery-minefield angle
Soviet amphibious infantry combatvehicle
battalion
battlefield operating system
battle position
brigade support area
battalion signal officer
Soviet amphibious armoredpersonnel carrier
battery
Ccommand and control
command, control, and communications
Canada
combined arms army
combat aviation brigade
close air support
commander amphibious task force
cavalry
cluster bomb unit
communications checkpoint
CCT
cdr
CEOI
CEWI
CF
CFA
CFL
CFV
CFZ
CGI
Chap
CHEMWARN
CI
CLF
CLGP
CM
cmd
cmd/ops
cml
CNR
co
COLT
comm
COMSEC
COP
counterprep
CP
CPhd
CPT
CRP
CRTA
CS
combat control team
commander
communications-electronics operationinstructions
combat electronic warfare intelligence
command/fire (radio net)
covering force area
coordinated fire line
cavalry fighting vehicle
critical friendly zone
control group intercept
Chaparral
chemical warning
count erintelligence
commander landing force
cannon-launched guided projectile
countermobility (mission)
command (radio net)
command/operations (radio net)
chemical
combat net radio
company
combat observation’lasing team
communications
communication security
command observation post (Soviet)
counterpreparation
command post
Copperhead
captain
combat recon patrol
chief of rocket troops and artillery(Soviet)
combat support
Glossary-2
FM 6-20-40
CSR
CSS
CTOC
D
(D)
DAG
DARM-4
DBA
DD
DDG
def
det
DF
DISCOM
div
div arty
DLIC
DMD
DPICM
DS
DSA
DTG
DZ
EA
ECCM
ECM
EEFI
EIR
EN
controlled supply rate
combat service support
corps tactical operations center
D
destroy (attack matrix)
digital (radio net)
division artillery group
mobile artillery repair shop complex(type)
deep battle area
destroyer
guided missile destroyer
defense
detachment
direction finding
division support command
division
division artillery
detachment left in contact
digital message device
dual-purpose improved conventionalmunitions
direct support
division support area
date-time group
drop zone
E
engagement area
electronic counter-countermeasures
electronic countermeasures
essential elements of friendlyinformation
essential intelligence requirements
electronic notebook
ENG
engr
EPW
ERP
ETAC
EW
EWS
FA
FAAR
FAC
FAIO
FASCAM
FAST
fax
FCL
FCT
FD
FDC
FEBA
FED
FFA
FFE
FID
FIST
FLIR
FLOT
FM
FO
FPF
frag
FRAGO
FS
engineer (attack matrix) (TACFIRE)
engineer
enemy prisoners of war
engineer reconnaissance patrol (Threat)
enlisted terminal attack controller
electronic warfare
electronic warfare section
F
field artillery
forward area alerting radar
forward air controller (see ALO,ETAC, and AFAC)
field artillery intelligence officer
family of scatterable mines
forward area support team
facsimile
final coordination line
firepower control team
fire direction (radio net)
fire direction center
forward edge of the battle area
forward entry device
free-fire area
fire for effect
foreign internal defense
fire support team
forward-looking infrared
forward line of own troops
field manual; frequency modulated
forward observer
final protective fire
fragmentary
fragmentary order
fire support
Glossary-3
FM 6-20-40
FSA fire support area (Navy)
FSB forward support battalion
FSC fire support coordinator (Marine)
FSCC fire support coordination center(Marine)
FS cell fire support cell
FSCL fire support coordination line
FSCOORD fire support coordinator
FSE
FSMAA
FSO
FSS
FSSG
fwd
GBU
GE
GEMSS
GLO
GM
GMRD
gp
GP
GS
GSR
GT
G/VLLD
H
HC
HE
HEI
HEMTT
fire support element
Fire Support Mission Area Analysis
fire support officer
fire support station (Navy)
force service support group
forward
G
glide bomb unit
Germany
ground-emplaced mine-scattering system
ground liaison officer
guided missile
guards motorized rifle division
group
general purpose
general support
general support reinforcing
gun-target
ground/vehicular laser locatordesignator
H
howitzer (high-payoff target list)
hexachloroethane
high explosive
high explosive incendiary
heavy expanded-mobility tactical truck
HF
HHB
HMMWV
HOB
how
HP
HPT
HQ
HTO
HUDHVT
hvy
hwy
I
IAW
ICM
IEW
IEWSE
IFR
IGB
HR
IHFR
illum
immed
inf
lntel
inter
IP
IPB
IR
ITR
high frequency
headquarters and headquarters battery
high-mobility multipurpose wheeledvehicle
height of burst
howitzer
high payoff
high-payoff target
headquarters
high-technology observer
head-up display
high-value target
heavy
highway
I
immediate (attack matrix)
in accordance with
improved conventional munitions
intelligence and electronic warfare
intelligence and electronic warfaresupport element
instrument flight rules
intergovernmental boundary
imaging infrared
improved high frequency radio
illumination
immediate
infantry
intelligence
intercept
initial point
intelligence preparation of the battlefield
infrared
independent tank regiment
Glossary-4
FM 6-20-40
JAAT
jet
JTF
km
kmph
KT
LANTIRN
LAV
LC
LD
LF
LDO
LGB
LGM
LGW
LIC
LIFT
LLLTV
LLLGB
LMAV
LO
LOAL
LOC
LOG
LP
LRRP
LST
LSU
J
joint air attack team
junction
joint task force
K
kilometer
kilometers per hour
kiloton
L
low-altitude navigation and targetinginfrared for night system
light armored vehicle
line of contact
line of departure
landing force
laser designator operator
laser-guided bomb
laser-guided missile
laser-guided weapon
low-intensity conflict
type of ground transport target(attack guidance matrix)
low-light-level television
low-level laser-guided bomb
Laser Maverick
Iiaison officer
lock on after launch
lines of communication
long-burning illumination marker
listening post
long-range reconnaissance patrol
laser spot tracker
logistics support unit
LT
LTD
LZ
M
MAGTF
maint
MAJ
MAN
MANT
MBA
MBC
MBL
mech
met
METT-T
MHz
MI
min
MLRS
mm
MMO
MMS
MOI
MOPP
mort
MOUT
MP
mph
MPI
MR
MRD
lieutenant
laser target designator
landing zone
M
mobility (mission); mortar (high-payofftarget list)
Marine air-ground task force
maintenance
major
maneuver (attack matrix) (TACFIRE)
maintenance (attack matrix mnemonic)
main battle area
mortar ballistic computer
mean burst location
mechanized
meteorological
mission, enemy, terrain and weather,and troops and time available
megahertz
military intelligence
minute
multiple launch rocket system
millimeter
maintenance management officer
mast-mounted sight
message of interest
mission-oriented protective posture
mortar
military operations on urban terrain
military police
miles per hour
mean point of impact
motorized rifle (Soviet)
motorized rifle division (Soviet)
Glossary-5
FM 6-20-40
MRL
MRR
MRR/TR
MSD
MSE
MSL
MSR
MTB
MTO
MTOE
mtr
MTR
MULE
mvr
N
NA
NM
NATO
NBC
N/CH
NCS
NCO
NFA
NGF
NGLO
NGO
NICAD
NOD
NOS
NUKE
multiple rocket launcher
motorized rifle regiment (Soviet)
motorized rifle regiment/tank regiment
minimum safe distance
mobile subscriber equipment
mean sea level
main supply route
motor transport battalion (Soviet)
message to observer
modification tables of organization andequipment
motor
motor transport regiment (Soviet)
modular universal laser equipment
maneuver
N
neutralize (attack guidance matrix)
not applicable
named area of interest
North Atlantic Treaty Organization
nuclear, biological, chemical
nuclear and/or chemical (attackguidance matrix)
net control station
noncommissioned officer
no-fire area
naval gunfire
naval gunfire liaison officer
naval gunfire officer
nickel-cadmium
night observation device
night observation system
nuclear (spread sheet)
night vision device
NVG
O&I
obj
obs
OCAKA
off
OGE
O/O
OP
OPCON
OPLAN
OPORD
OPSEC
ops/F
ORPD
OT
P
PADS
PD
PFC
PIR
PL
plt
PMP
PNL
POF
POL
night vision goggles
O
operations and intelligence
objective
observation
observation, cover and concealment,obstacles, key terrain, and avenuesof approach
offense
out-of-ground effect
on order
observation post
operational control
operation plan
operation order
operations security
operations/fire (radio net)
independent missile transport bat-talion (Soviet)
observer-target
P
plan (attack guidance matrix)
position and azimuth determiningsystem
point detonating
private first class
priority intelligence
phase line
platoon
requirements
heavy folding pontoon (Soviet bridgetype)
prescribed nuclear load
priority of fire
petroleum, oil and lubricantsNVD
Glossary-6
FM 6-20-40
pos
POW
POZ
PP
prep
PRF
PRI TGT
PRTB
PSNR-1
PUP
PZ
QSTAG
R
RAAMS
RAG
RAP
RAOC
RATELO
RATT
RDO
rd/min
REC
recon
regt
REMS
RES
retrans
RFA
position
prisoner of war
mobile obstacle detachment (Soviet)
passage point
preparation
pulse repetition frequency
priority target
mobile repair tactical base (rocketand missile) (Soviet)
battlefield surveillance radar (Soviet)
pull-up point
pickup zone
Q
quadripartite standardization agree-ment
R
reinforcing
remote antiarmor mine system
regimental artillery group (Soviet)
rocket-assisted projectile
rear area operations center
radiotelephone operator
radio teletypewriter
radio deployment order
rounds per minute
radio electronic combat
reconnaissance
regiment
remotely employed sensor
radiation exposure state
retransmission
restricted fire area
restrictive fire line
RP
R/R
RSO
RSR
RSTA
RT
S
SACC
SAL
SALT
SAM
SASP
SEAD
see
sep
SFC
SFCP
SHELREP
SHP
SIGINT
SINCGARS
SITREP
SOI
SOP
SP
SPC
SPLL
spt
SSB
SSG
SSM
release point
radio/radar
reconnaissance and survey officer
required supply rate
reconnaissance, surveillance, and targetacquisition
receiver-transmitter
S
survivability (engineer mission);suppress (attack guidance matrix)
supporting arms coordination center
special ammunition load
supporting arms liaison team
surface-to-air missile
special ammunition supply point
suppression of enemy air defenses
second; section
separate
sergeant first class
shore fire control party
shelling report
shaft horsepower
signal intelligence
single-channel ground-airborne radiosystem
situation report
signal operation instructions
standing operating procedure
self-propelled start point
Specialist
self-propelled launcher-loader
support
single sideband
staff sergeant
surface-to-surface missileRFL
Glossary-7
FM 6-20-40
STANAG NATO standardization agreement
std standard
STRIKEWARN nuclear strike warning
subs
survl
TA
tac
TAC-A
TACAIR
TACAN
TACC
TACCS
TACFIRE
TACP
TACS
TADS
TAI
TA/intel
TASC
TBP
TDA
TF
TFW
tgt
tl
TIS
TISL
TLE
tm
TMT
TOC
subsequent
surveillance
T
target acquisition
tactical
tactical air controller-airborne
tactical air
tactical air navigation
tactical air control center
tactical air command and control specialist
tactical fire direction system
tactical air control party
tactical air control system
target acquisition system anddesignation sight
target area of interest
target acquisition/intelligence (radio net)
Training Aids Support Center
to be published
target damage assessment
task force
tactical fighter wing
target
time
thermal image system
target identifier set, laser
target location error
team
total mission time
tactical operations center
TOE
TOF
TOT
TOW
TPT
TR
TRAM
trans
TRP
TS
TSOP
TTC
TV
TVA
UAV
UHF
UK
u s
USAF
USAFAS
USMC
USN
UTM
(V)
VBK
VE
VFMED
VHF
vic
tables of organization and equipment
time of flight
time on target
tube-launched, optically tracked,wire-guided missile
total processing time
tank regiment (Soviet)
target recognition attack multisensors
transport
target reference point
time sensitive
tactical standing operating procedure
tactical operations center team chief(attack matrix)
television
target value analysis
U
unmanned aerial vehicle
ultrahigh frequency
United Kingdom
United States
United States Air Force
US Army Field Artillery School
United States Marine Corps
US Navy
universal transverse mercator
V
voice (radio net)
German home defense unit
velocity error
variable format message entry device
very high frequency
vicinity
Glossary-8
FM 6-20-40
VT variable time WP white phosphorus
WWWII World War II
WBK German home defense unit Z
WOC wing operations center ZF zone of fire
Glossary-9
FM 6-20-40
REFERENCES
Users should frequently consult Department of the Army Pamphlet 25-30 for thelatest changes to or revisions of references listed herein and for newpublications relating to material covered in this publication.
Required Publications
Required publications are sources that users must read in order to understand or tocomply with this publication.
Field Manuals (FMs)
6-20 Fire Support in the AirLand Battle
6-30 Observed Fire Procedures
100-5 Operations
101-5-1 Operational Terms and Symbols
Related Publications
Related publications are sources of additional information. They are not required inorder to understand this publication.
Department of the Army (DA) Forms
2026 Recommended Changes to Publications and Blank Forms
4655-R Target List Work Sheet
4656-R Scheduling Work Sheet
5032-R Field Artillery Delivered Minefield Planning Sheet
5366-R Quick Fire Plan
Field Manuals
1-103 Airspace Management and Army Air Traffic in a Combat Zone
1-111 Aviation Brigade
1-112 Attack Helicopter Battalion
3-3 NBC Contamination Avoidance
(C) 3-10 Employment of Chemical Agents (U)
References-1
FM 6-20-40
3-50
3-100
5-100
6-2
6-15
6-20-1 (HTF)
6-20-30
6-20-50
6-121
(C) 6-141-2
6-161
7-7
7-90
9-6
11-50 (HTF)
17-95
21-26
24-1
34-1
34-3
34-81
44-1
71-1 (HT-F)
71-2
71-3
71-100 (HTF)
90-2
90-3 (HTF)
90-4
90-5 (HTF)
Deliberate Smoke Operations
NBC Operations
Engineer Combat Operations
Field Artillery Survey
Field Artillery Meteorology
Field Artillery Cannon Battalion (How to Fight)
Tactics, Techniques, and Procedures for Fire Support for Corps andDivision Operations
Tactics, Techniques, and Procedures for Fire Support forBrigade Operations (Light)
Field Artillery Target Acquisition
Field Artillery Target Analysis and Weapons Employment: Nonnuclear (U)
Field Artillery Radar Systems
The Mechanized Infantry Platoon and Squad
Tactical Employment of Mortars
Ammunition Service in the Theater of Operations
Combat Communications Within the Division (How to Fight)
Cavalry Operations
Map Reading and Land Navigation
Combat Communications
Intelligence and Electronic Warfare Operations
Intelligence Analysis
Weather Support for Army Tactical Operations
US Army Air Defense Artillery Employment
Tank and Mechanized Infantry Company Team (How to Fight)
The Tank and Mechanized Infantry Battalion Task Force
Armored and Mechanized Infantry Brigade
Armored and Mechanized Division Operations (How to Fight)
Battlefield Deception
Desert Operations (How to Fight)
Air Assault Operations
Jungle Operations (How to Fight)
References-2
FM 6-20-40
90-6 Mountain Operations
90-10 (HTF) Military Operations on Urbanized Terrain (MOUT) (How to Fight)
90-13 (HTF) River Crossing Operations (How to Fight)
100-26 The Air-Ground Operations System
100-42 US Army/US Airspace Management in an Area of Operations
101-5 Staff Organization and Operations
101-10-1 Staff Officers’ Field Manual: Organizational, Technical, and Logistical Data
101-31-1 Staff Officers’ Field Manual: Nuclear Weapons Employment Doctrine andProcedures
(SRD) 101-31-2 Staff Officers' Field Manual: Nuclear Weapons Employment Effects Data(U)
(C) 101-50-1
(C) 101-50-20
(C) 101-60-1
(C) 101-60-2
(C) 101-60-3
(C) 101-60-6
(C) 101-60-7
(C) 101-60-9
(C) 101-61-3
(C) 101-62-1
(C) 101-62-3
JCS Pub 1-02
ATP-27
Joint Munitions Effectiveness Manual: Air-to-Surface: Weapon Effectiveness,Selection and Requirements, Air-Delivered Non-Nuclear (U)
Characteristics Handbook (JMEM) (U)
Joint Munitions Effectiveness Manual/Surface-to-Surface: Effectiveness Data forMortar, 81-mm: M29 (U)
Joint Munitions Effectiveness Manual Surface-to-Surface: Effectiveness Data forHowitzer, 105-mm, M101A1 (U)
Joint Munitions Effectiveness Manual: Surface-to-Surface: Effectiveness Data forHowitzer, 155-mm, M109 (U)
Joint Munitions Effectiveness Manual: Surface-to-Surface: Effectiveness Data for5-Inch/38-Inch Naval Twin-Gun Mount, MK-28, -32 and With Gun, Fire ControlSystem MK-37 (U)
Joint Munitions Effectiveness Manual: Effectiveness Data for Mortar:4.2-Inch, M30 (U)
Joint Munitions Effectiveness Manual: Surface-to-Surface: Effectiveness Data forNaval Single-Gun Mount, MK42 w/Gun Fire Control System, MK68 (U)
Joint Munitions Effectiveness Manual/Surface-to-Surface: AmmunitionReliability (U)
Joint Munitions Effectiveness Manual: Surface-to-Surface: Safe Distances forFragmentary Munitions (U)
Joint Munitions Effectiveness Manual/Surface-to-Surface: Manual ofFragmentation Data (U)
Miscellaneous Literature
Dictionary of Military and Associated Terms
Offensive Air Support Operations
References-3
FM 6-20-40
ATP-35(A)
USREDCOMManual 525-5
TRADOCPAM 34-3
2014/506
2031/5 15
2082
2099/531
2103/187
2104/189
2147/221
2887/217
3736
Land Force Tactical Doctrine
Joint Terminal Guidance Operations
Multiservice and Joint Publications
Joint Laser (J-Laser) Designation Procedures. TACA 50-25/LANTFLT TIP-1/MCDEC OH 6-2D/USREDCOM Pam 38-1/USAFEP50-25/AACP 50-25/PACAFP 50-25
NATO Standardization Agreements/Quadripartite StandardizationAgreements (STANAGs/QSTAGs)
Operation Orders, Annexes to Operation Orders, and Administrative and LogisticsOrders
Proforma for Artillery Fire Plan
Relief of Combat Troops
Fire Coordination in Support of Land Forces
Reporting Nuclear Detonation, Biological and Chemical Attacks, and Predictingand Warning of Associated Hazards and Hazards Area (ATP-45)
Friendly Nuclear Strike Warning to Armed Forces Operating on Land
Target Numbering System (Nonnuclear)
Tactical Tasks and Responsibilities for Control of Artillery
Offensive Air Support Operations (ATP-27B)
NOTE: STANAGs and QSTAGs can be obtained from Naval Publications and Forms Center,5601 Tabor Avenue, Philadelphia, PA 19120. Use DD Form 1425 to requistion documents.
6-40
6-40A
6-50
Technical Manual (TM)
11-7440-240-10 Operator’s Manual for Fire Direction Center, Artillery 0A8389/GSG-10V)(Volumes 1 through 10)
Training Circulars (TCs)
Field Artillery Manual Cannon Gunnery
Field Artillery Automated Cannon Gunnery
The Field Artillery Cannon Battery
References-4
FM 6-20-40
34-130 Intelligence Preparation of the Battlefield
90-7 Joint (Army/Air Force) Tactical Air Control Party/Fire Support Team(TACP/FIST) Close Air Support Operations
Projected PublicationsProjected publications are sources of additional information that are scheduled forprinting but are not yet available. Upon print, they will be distributed automaticallyvia pinpoint distribution. They cannot be obtained from the USA AG PublicationsCenter until they are indexed in DA Pamphlet 25-30.
FM 6-20-10 Tactics, Techniques, and Procedures for the Targeting Process
References-5
INDEX
FM 6-20-40
Aerial observers, F-1, J-2, J-4, J-7,J-12, J-14, K-1
Air and naval gunfire liaisoncompany, A-26
Airborne forward air controller, A-12
Airborne laser spot tracker, I-3
Airspace coordination area, A-16, E-5
Altitude and lateral separation(ACA), A-20
Altitude separation (ACA), A-18
Area denial antipersonnel mine, H-1
Army aviation, A-31
AttackCoordination of CAS, A-21, A-23Criteria, G-1Systems, 1-1
Attack guidance matrix, C-8, G-1G-14
Example, G-15
Bomb damage assessment, A-12, A-24
Chemical munitions, H-29
Clearance of fires, 2-19
Close air support, 3-22, A-8, A-15,J-3, J-5, J-8, J-13, J-15
Attack execution, A-21Immediate, A-10Mission brief, A-21Night, A-24Preplanned, A-8Request channels, A-8, A-10
Combat observation/lasing team, F-2,I-1
Commander’s intent,l-3, 2-1, 2-2, 2-3,B-1
Command posts, 2-23, F-3, F-4
Communications, A-11, A-29, F-1,J-3, J-5, J-13, J-15
Field-expedient antennas, F-9Fire support net usage (chart), F-6Loss of, F-8Planning ranges, F-8Tips,F-7
Copperhead, I-3, H-22Coverage template, H-24Positioning for, H-23
Counterpreparation, D-7
Decision-making process, 2-3
Doctrinal resume, G-6
Doctrinal template, G-4
Employment considerationsArmy aviation, A-31CAS, A-8, A-24Chemical munitions, H-29COLTs, I-1, I-4Copperhead, H-22FASCAM, H-1Field artillery, A-3Joint air attack team, A-32MLRS, A-3Mortars, A-5Munitions, J-1, J-3, J-6, J-12, J-14Naval gunfire, A-28Nuclear, H-29Obscurants, H-18OH-58D, K-2, K-5TACAIR, A-15
Engineer matrix (example), C-17
Exclusive net, 3-2
Family of scatterable mines, H-1Aimpoints, H-15Density, H-5, H-6Employment tables, H-11Report, H-10Safety zone, H-7, H-8
Field artillery, 3-22, 3-37, A-1, C-1
Final protective fires, 3-21, D-1Size of (per unit), 2-10Symbol, D-4
Fire planning, 1-1, 2-1, 2-7, 3-1Defensive, 2-10, 3-1, 3-18Deliberate, 2-12Offensive, 2-9, 3-1, 3-2Principles of, 1-2Process of, 2-8Quick, 2-13
Fire supportCommunications nets, F-1, F-6Considerations of, 3-2, 3-3, 3-16,
3-17, 3-18, 3-23, 3-34, 3-35, 3-36,
3-39, 3-40, 3-41, 3-443-43, B-1Decision-making process, as part of,
2-3Tasks of, 1-5, 3-1, G-16, H-18
Fire support cell, 1-6, 1-10, 1-12,2-11, 2-23, F-2, F-4
Fire support coordination, 2-18, 3-37,3-39, G-13
Clearance of fires (examples), 2-21Principles of, 1-2
Fire support coordinating measures,3-21, E-1
Airspace coordination area, A-16,E-5
Boundaries, E-1Coordinated fire fine, E-2Fire support coordination line, E-3Free-fire area, E-3NGF control measures, A-29No-fire area, E-5Permissive, E-1, E-2Restrictive, E-1, E-4Restrictive fire line, E-4Restrictive fire area, E-4
Fire support coordinator, 1-2
Fire support execution matrix, 2-16Examples of, 2-16, 2-18, 3-13, 3-29,
3-33, 4-4, 4-10, C-16
Fire support organizationsFire support cell, 1-6, 1-10, 1-12,
2-26, F-2, F-4Fire support element, 1-6, 1-10, F-4,
F-5Fire support team, 1-3, 1-4, F-2
Forward air controller, A-11
Forward observers, 1-3, 1-5, F-1, J-3,J-7, J-12, J-14
G/VLLD employment, I-1, H-22
High-payoff target, G-1List, C-8, G-12, G-13
High-value target, G-1, G-4
Illumination, 3-19
Inherent responsibilities, A-1
Joint air attack team, A-31
Index-1
FM 6-20-40
LaserDesignator systems, A-26, I-7Guided bomb, I-3Guided weapons, I-9Spto trackers, I-6Target designation, A-13
Latteral separation (ACA), A-17
Main battle area, 3-24
METT-T, consideratiions of, 2-1
Mine safety temaplate, H-9
Mission, 1-1, A-1
Mission brief (CAS), A-21
Mobile subscriber equipment, F-7
Mortars, 3-22, A-4
Multiple launch rocket system, A-3
Naval gunfire, A-26
Nuclear munitions, 3-23, H-29
Obscurants, H-17
Obstacle plan, 3-18, H-3, H-4
OH-58D, K-1
Operation order (example), C-2
OperationsBreakout by encircled forces, 3-41Cold weather, J-13Continuous, J-11Desert, J-6Jungle, J-3Linkup, 3-41Military operations on urban terrain,
J-12Mountain, J-1Night, J-8Reconnaissance, 3-43Relief in place, 3-40River crossing, 3-39
Operations, defensive, 3-1, 3-18Delay, 3-35Example, 3-25Main battle area, 3-24Night, at, J-10passage of lines, 3-36Security area, 3-23Security operations, 3-43Withdrawal, 3-35
Operations, offensive, 3-1, 3-2Deliberate attack, 3-3
Example, 3-5 SINCGARS, F-7, F-13Exploitation, 3-16Hasty attack, 3-3 Smoke munitions, 3-19, 3-40Movement to contact, 3-2Night, at, J-9 Split CP operations, 2-23Pursuit, 3-17 Spread sheets, G-2, G-13
Personnel, duties ofBattalion FSO, 1-4, 1-7, 1-12, 2-27, STANAGs
F-2 2014, C-1Brigade FSO, 1-8, 1-11, 2-19, 2-22, 2031, C-1, D-1
F-4, H-30 2082, 3-35Company FSO and/or FIST, 1-3, 2099, E-1
1-10, A-12, A-14, F-2 2147, D-1DS battalion commander 2887, A-1
(FSCOORD), 1-2, 1-12, A-33Fire support sergeant, 1-4, 1-7, 1-12 Supporting arms liaison team, 1-9,Maneuver commander, 1-4, 1-8, 1-12 A-27
2-19.2-22 B-1Plans/targeting officer, 1-7, 1-11
Planned fires, D-6, J-9
Preparation fire, D-6
QSTAGs217, A-1221, D-1506. c-1515; C-1, D-1531, E-1
Quick fireNet, 3-2Plan, 2-13
Radars, J-2, J-4, J-7, J-12, J-14
Radio nets, F-1, F-6
Rehearsal, 2-5, 2-15
Relative value matrix, G-3
Remote antiarmor mine system, H-1
Retransmission, F-8
Safety zone (FASCAM), H-7
Scatterable mine report, H-10
Scheduling work sheet, D-7Examples of, D-10, D-nPreparation of, D-8
Scouts, 3-18
Security area, 3-23
Seekers, I-2
Shift times, D-9
TACFIRE, 3-2, G-16
Tactical air control party, 1-9, A-11,A-14, A-33
Tactical air support, A-8Attack coordination, A-11Employment considerations, A-15Immediate CAS, A-10Naval and Marine Corps air, A-30Preplanned CAS, A-8Request channels, A-8, A-10
Target(s)Categories cross reference, G-8Groups of, D-6Numbering system, D-1On-call, D-7Priority, D-1Programs of, D-6Scheduled, D-1Scheduling of, D-7Series of, D-6Sheet, G-6Symbols, D-3
Target acquisitionAs an FS system component, 1-1Available systems in a brigade, 2-11Employment of, J-1, J-3, J-7, J-12,
J-14
Target list work sheet, 2-12, D-5Example of, D-5Preparation of, D-5
Target value analysis, G-1, G-13
Time separation (ACA), A-19
Trigger points, 3-20, H-4
Index-2
FM 6-20-405 JANUARY 1990
By Order of the Secretary of the Army:
CARL E. VUONOGeneral, United States Army
Chief of Staff
Official:
WILLIAM J. MEEHANBrigadier General, United States Army
The Adjutant General
DISTRIBUTION:
Active Army, USAR, and ARNG: To be distributed in accordance with DA Form 12-11 E, Requirements forTC 6-20-6, Field Artillery Delivered Scatterable Mines (QTY rqr block no, 1264) and FM 6-20, Fire Supportin the Airland Battle (Qty rqr block no. 772).
U.S. GOVERNMENT PRINTING 0FFlCE:1994-342 -421/81774
PIN: 067170-000
